STANDARDS OF THE TUBULAR EXCHANGER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION EIGHTH EDITION TUBULAR EXCHANGER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION, INC. 25 North Broadway Tarrytown, New York 10591 Richard C. Byrne, Secretary www.tema.orgNO WARRANTY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED Zhe Standards herein ae recommended by The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Assocation, In. {o assist users, engineers and designers who specify, design and install tubular exchangers. These standards are based upon sound engineering principles, tesearch and field experience in the manufacture, design, installation and use of tubular exchangers. These standards may be subject to revision as further investigation or experience may show is necessary or desirable. Nothing herein shall constitute a warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, and warranty responsibilty of any kind is expressly denied. © Copyright 1968, 1970, 1972, 1974, 1978, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1999 Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc. ‘TEMA is a trademark of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc. This document may not be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, modified or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form in whole or in part, without prior written consent of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVEDCONTRIBUTING MEMBERS ‘TUBULAR EXCHANGER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION, INC. Comprising Manufacturers of Various Types of Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger Equipment API Heat Transfer, Inc... 2777 Walden Avenue Buffalo, NY 14225 e888 West 21st Strost ‘Sand Springs, OK 74063, vw: 1844 N. Garett Road Tulsa, OK 74116 sve-9501 West 11th Street Houston, TX 77008-60011 Cust-O-Fab, Inc... Energy Exchanger Company. Engineers and Fabricators Company. Fabsco Shell and Tube, LLC..... 0. Box 988 Sapulpa, OK 74066 wn 20 Florence Avenue Batavia, NY 14020 .»-P-O. Box 580638 Tulsa, OK 74158 ..1001 N. Fulton Avenue Tulsa, OK 74115 P.O. Box 1102 Butfalo, NY 14227 .. 2500 Broadway ‘Camden, NJ 08104 -675 Rahway Avenue Graham Corporation. Heat Transfer Equipment Co. Hughes-Anderson Heat Exchangers, Inc. ITT Standard, ITT Fluid Technology Corporation. Joseph Oat Corporation. ‘Manning and Lewis Engineering Company. Union, NJ 07083 Nooter Corporation. sevens P.O, BOX 451 ‘St. Louis, MO 63166 ‘Ohmstede, Inc.. er 825 North Main Street Beaumont, TX 7701 RAS Process Equipment, Inc. .9824 Meadowbrook Road Robbinsville, NJ 08691 ‘Southern Heat Exchanger Corporatio Struthers Industries, Inc. ...1500 34th Street ‘Gulfport, MS 89501 Wi Nand Rose P.O. Box 4187 Subsidiary of Xchanger big. Corp. Gakiand, CA 94614 Yuba Heat Transfer ... seers PO, BOX 3158 ‘A Division of Connell Limit ‘Tulsa, OK 74101 itTECHNICAL COMMITTEE OF THE ‘TUBULAR EXCHANGER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION Ken O'Connor. . API Heat Transfer, Inc. Doug Werhane. Cust-O-Fab, Inc. Ken Fultz... Energy Exchanger Company Cris Smetiey. Engineers and Fabricators Company Philip Marks, Graham Corporation Monte Davis... Heat Transfer Equipment Company ddim Harrison : vn Hughes-Anderson Heat Exchangers, Inc. Nick Tranquil oes se ITT Standard Michael Holtz. ..oseph Oat Corporation Ted Rapezynski.... Manning and Lewis Engineering Co. Stove Melerotto. .Nooter Corporation Michael Tracy... ssomnenOhmestede, Ine. Todd Allen. a nmin Southern Heat Exchanger Corp. Dan Stenman Gary L Berry. Struthers Industries, Inc. Jack E, Logan. Wiogmann and Rose Larry Brumbaugh..... ... Yuba Heat Transfer ‘A Division of Connell Limited PartnershipPREFACE Eighth Edi - 1999 ‘The Eighth Edition of the TEMA Standards was prepared by the Technical Committee of the Tubular Exchanger ‘Manufacturers Association. A compilation of previously proven information, along with new additions to the Flow Induced Vibration, Flexible Shell Elements and Tubesheet Design sections is presented for your practical use. Design methods for Floating Head Backing Devices have also been added and the scope has been changed to accommodate a larger range of sizes and pressures. Metric units and tables have been included wherever possible. ‘Suggested methods have been included for support and lifting lug design in the RGP section. ‘This edition of the TEMA Standards is dedicated to the memory of Wayne Schaefer of the Nooter Corporation for his years of dedicated service to the TEMA Technical Committee. The Editor also wishes to acknowledge the contributions to the Eighth Edition by the following past members of the Technical Committee: Victor J. Stachura, Joseph H. Kissel, Robert C. Moscicki and Harry W. Sault Jim Harrison EDITORCONTENTS: Symbol & Section Paragraph 1 0N 1 2 2 F 1 2 3 4 36 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 aoe 1 2 3 4 5 ROB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a 9 10 " ev 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMBERSHIP LIST... TECHNICAL COMMITTEE. PREFACE NOTES TO USERS... NOMENCLATURE Size Numbering and Type Designation—Recommended Practice, Nomenclature of Heat Exchanger Components.. FABRICATION TOLERANCES External Dimensions, Nozzle and Support Locations... Recommended Fabrication Tolerances: Tubesheets, Partitions, Covers, and Flanges Flange Face Imperfections... GENERAL FABRICATION AND PERFORMANCE INFORMATION ‘Shop Operation. Inspection Nameplates Drawings and ASME Code Data Reports. Guarantees Preparation of Heat Exchangers for Shipment General Construction Features of TEMA Standard Heat Exchangers. INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE Performance of Heat Exchangers [7 Installation of Heat Exchangers .. hi? Operation of Heat Exchangers... he Maintenance of Heat Exchangers. h9| MECHANICAL STANDARD TEMA CLASS RCB HEAT EXCHANGERS Scope and General Requirements. Tubes. Shells and Shell Covers Baffles and Suppor Plates .. Floating End Construction GaSKEtS conn Tubesheets. Flexible Shell Elements Channels, Covers, and Bonnet Nozzles... : End Flanges and Boting... FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION Scope and General... Vibration Damage Pattems. Fallure Regions.. Dimensionless Numbers.. Natural Frequency. ‘Axial Tube Stress... Effective Tube Mass. Damping 104 104 viNOTES TO USERS OF ‘THE TEMA STANDARDS Three classes of Mechanical Standards, RC and B, reflecting acceptable designs for various service applications are presented. The user should refer to the definition of each class and choose the one that best fits the specific need. Corresponding subject matter in the three Mechanical Standards is covered by paragraphs identically numbered except for the prefix letter. Paragraph numbers preceded by RCB indicates that all three classes are identical. Any reference to a specific paragraph must be preceded by the class designation. The Recommended Good Practice section has been prepared to assist the designer in areas outside the scope of the basic Standards. Paragraphs in the Standards having additional information in the RGP section are marked with an asterisk (*). The reference paragraph in the RGP section has the identical paragraph number, but with an“RGP" prefix. Itis the intention of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association that this edition of its Standards may be used beginning with the date of issuance, and that its requitements supersede those of the previous edition sk months from such date of issuance, except for heat exchangers contracted for prior to the end of the six month period. For this purpose the date of issuance is June 1, 1999, Questions on interpretation of the TEMA Standards should be formally addressed to the Secretary at TEMA 25 North Broadway, Tarrytown, NY 10591. Questions requiring development of new or revised technical information will only be answered through an addendum or a new edition of the Standards, Upon agreement between purchaser and fabricator, exceptions to TEMA requirements are acceptable. An exchanger ‘may stil be considered as meeting TEMA requirements as long as the exception is documented. vilNOTES TO USERS OF ‘THE TEMA STANDARDS Three classes of Mechanical Standards, R,C and B, reflecting acceptable designs for various service applications are presented. The user should refer to the definition of each class and choose the one that best fits the specific need. Corresponding subject matter in the three Mechanical Standards is covered by paragraphs identically numbered except for the prefix letter. Paragraph numbers preceded by RCB indicates that all three classes are identical. Any reference to a specific paragraph must be preceded by the class designation. ‘The Recommended Good Practice section has been prepared to assist the designer in areas outside the scope of the basic Standards. Paragraphs in the Standards having additional information in the RGP section are marked with an asterisk (*). The reference paragraph in the RGP section has the identical paragraph number, but with an "RGP" prefix. {tis the intention of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association that this edition of its Standards may be used beginning with the date of issuance, and that its requirements supersede those of the previous edition six months from such date of issuance, except for heat exchangers contracted for prior to the end of the six month period. For this purpose the date of issuance is June 1, 1999. Questions on interpretation of the TEMA Standards should be formally addressed to the Secretary at TEMA 25 North Broadway, Tarrytown, NY 10591. Questions requiring development of new or revised technical information will only be answered through an addendum or a new edition of the Standards. Upon agreement between purchaser and fabricator, exceptions to TEMA requirements are acceptable. An exchanger ‘may stil be considered as meeting TEMA requirements as ong as the exception is documented villHEAT EXCHANGER NOMENCLATURE SECTION 1 N-4 SIZE NUMBERING AND TYPE DESIGNATION-RECOMMENDED PRACTICE {tls recommended that heat exchanger size an type be designated by numbers and letters as described low. N-1.1 SIZE Sizes of shells (and tube bundles) shall be designated by numbers describing shell (and tube bundle) diameters and tube lengths, as follows: N-1.11 NOMINAL DIAMETER The nominal diameter shall be the inside diameter of the shell in inches (mm), rounded off to the nearest integer. For kettle reboilers the nominal diameter shall be the port diameter followed by the shell diameter, each rounded off to the nearest integer. N-1.12 NOMINAL LENGTH ‘The nominal length shall be the tube length in inches (mm). Tube length for straight tubes shall be taken as the actual overall length. For U-tubes the length shall be taken as the approximate straight length from end of tube to bend tangent. N-.2 TYPE Type designation shall be by letters describing stationary head, shell (omitted for bundles only), and rear head, in that order, as indicated in Figure N-1.2, N-1.3 TYPICAL EXAMPLES Ne131 ‘Split-ring floating head exchanger with removable channel and cover, single pass shell, 23.14" (691 mm) inside clameter with tubes 16 (4877 mm) long, SIZE 23-182 (691-4877) N-1.32 U-tube exchanger with bonnet type stationary head, split flow shell, 19° (483 mm) inside diameter with tubes 7'(2134 mm) straight length. SIZE 19-84 (483-2134) TYPE BGU. Ne1.33 Pul-through floating head ket type rebole having stationary head integral with tubeshet, 23" (684 mm) port diameter and 37” (840 mm) inside shell diameter with tubes 16'(4877 mm} long. SIZE 23/37-192 (684/940 - 4877) TYPE CKT. Ne1.94 Fixed tubesheet exchanger with removable channel and cover, bonnet type rear head, two pass shell 39-1/8\ (841 mm) Inside diameter with tubes 8 (2438 mmm) iong. SIZE 39-96 (@41-2438) TYPE AFM. N-1.35 Fixed tubeshest exchanger having stationary and rear heads integral with tubesheats, single pass shell, 17" (432 mm) inside diameter with tubes 16'(4877 mm) long. SIZE 17-192 (432-4877) TYPE NEN. N-1.4 SPECIAL DESIGNS Special designs are not covered and may be described as best suits the manufacturer. For example, a single tube pass, fixed tubesheet exchanger with conical heads may be described as “TYPE with Gonical Heads" pull through floating head exchanger with an Integral shell cover may be described as "TYPE AET with Integral Shell Cover’ ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 1SECTION 1 HEAT EXCHANGER NOMENCLATURE FIGURE N-1.2 prey ory sranoront wns Te oor ee ella - L d i A 7 FIXED TusesHeeT ur RUT nano 110 eT cove i. =P = eo tae reps sm Ee ITH LONGITUDINAL BARRE | }-——{—UXE "B” STATIONARY HEAD | : N | oie E gee sovear eeoen coves 7 P a) C ome Face naam tes c Tse SL | ae Channel TEAL wiTh Tuae- L s iP suraom arene || =a \e and I I wh BBE Re eee c DIVIDED FLOW seeeg : ot eee K i quam eatin war rae L EPR Lee ern YF nou 2 x ae recA mon puna cote cross now ana, 2 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationHEAT EXCHANGER NOMENCLATURE SECTION 1 N-2 NOMENCLATURE OF HEAT EXCHANGER COMPONENTS For the purpose of establishing standard terminology, Figure N-2 illustrates various types of heat exchangers. Typical parts and connections, fr llustatve purposes only, are numbered for Kertifiction in fable TABLE N-2 1. Stationary Head-Channel 21. Floating Head Cover-External 2 Stationary Head-Bonnet 22. Floating Tubesheet Skirt 3, Stationary Head Flange-Channel or Bonnet 23, Packing Box 4, Channel Cover 24. Packing 5. Stationary Head Nozzle 25. Packing Gland 6. Stationary Tubesheet 26. Lantern Ri 7. Tubes 27, Tierods and Spacers 8. Shell 28. Transverse Batfles or Support Plates 9. Shell Cover 29. Impingement Plate 10. Shell Fiange-Stationary Head End 30. Longitudinal Baffle 111. Shell Flange-Rear Head End 31. Pass Partition 42. Shell Nozzle 32. Vent Connection 18. Shell Cover Flange 33. Drain Connection 14, Expansion Joint 34. Instrument Connection 15. Floating Tubesheet 35. Support Saddle 46. Floating Head Cover 36. Liting Lug 17. Floating Head Cover Flange 87. Support Bracket 18. Floating Head Backing Device 38. Weir 19. Split Shear Ring 39. Liquid Level Connection 20. Slip-on Backing Flange 40. Floating Head Support FIGURE N-2 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 3SECTION 1 HEAT EXCHANGER NOMENCLATURE FIGURE N-2 (continued) ® @ 4 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationHEAT EXCHANGER NOMENCLATURE, SECTION 1 FIGURE N-2 (continued) QD @@ @@O©O® ® @ @@ ® @@2@@OOO @ Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationSECTION2 HEAT EXCHANGER FABRICATION TOLERANCES F-1 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS, NOZZLE AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS. ‘Standard tolerances for process flow nozzles and support locations and projections are shown in Figure F-1. Dimensions in () are millimeters. FIGURE F-1 £1/2°(12.7) 21/464) 41/464) “+ £1/4(6.4) 21/464) [/64) 21/4764) = Pig Ep eee (nP) £1/8(3.2), 41/8°(3.2) £1/4°(6.4 aif NOMINAL NOZZLE SIZE G MAX on 1716°(1.6) S. 3/32"(2.4) = 3/16 (4.8) Z 1746.4) eS VOTE Tis i pig rte ceding 5 sue 8 3.2) | x pL T of £1/4"(6-4) g STACKED EXCHANGERS x +1°(0.017 RAD) snes MAX + ALOMBLE 7 cenTeRLine I \\S TRUE ROTATION 3S (CENTERLINE RT ROTATIONAL TOLERANCE ON NOZZLE FACES CONNECTION NOZZLE ALGNMENT AND SUPPO QLERANCE ON 6 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationHEAT EXCHANGER FABRICATION TOLERANCES SECTION 2 F-2 RECOMMENDED FABRICATION TOLERANCES Fabrication tolerances normally required to maintain process flow nozzle and support locations are shown in Figure F-2. These tolerances may be adjusted as necessary to meet the tolerances shown in Figure F-1 Dimensions in () are milimeters. FIGURE F-2 (2, £1/4°(6.4) £1/8"(3.2) £1/4°(6.4)_, 41/8" £1/8"(3.2) A qd a = (3.2) £1/8°(32) 41/832) +8" Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 7SECTION 2 HEAT EXCHANGER FABRICATION TOLERANCES F-3 TUBESHEETS, PARTITIONS, COVERS AND FLANGES The standard clearances and tolerances applying to tubesheets, partons, covers and flanges are shown in Figure F-3. Dimensions in () are milimeters. FIGURE F-3 DelD DESIN ‘STANDARD UNCONFINED PLAIN FACE JOINT CONSTRUCTION 1. SECON 2 15 NOT INTENDED TO PROHET UMUACHONED TUBESHEET FACES AND FLAT 4 f aa 3 4 i 4 . a. 7 CasKers, “CONFI s| = ASE TR) TOO)” MENS CONFINED ON THE &| 6 AEE ARATE EA HVT OO -0) 4, OCIS MRE TCA. MO 00 NT a Rez S768) ____—_——1/32 (OB) (SEE OTE 1) PRECLUDE THE USEF OTHER DETAR 5 Eaten SI 88) 5. om ws ve 0" (520) 10 10" (4 ¥ DAUETER, TOLERANCES,“ AND WMA ALTERNATE eREASED TO 21/1618). TONGUE AND GROOVE JON 8 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationHEAT EXCHANGER FABRICATION TOLERANCES SECTION 2 FIGURE F-4 PERMISSIBLE IMPERFECTIONS IN FLANGE FACING FINISH FOR RAISED FACE AND LARGE MALE AND FEMALE FLANGES 1,2 NPs Maximum Rail Projection of, Maximum Depth and Radial Projection of Impertections Which Ae No Deeper Than | Imperfecione Which Ave Deeper Than the "the Bottom of the Secrations, in. rm) ‘Botiom ofthe Saraions, in. (Tm) 1/2 We 8 4/16 (1.6) af 1/8 (32) 1/16 (1.6) 1 1/8 (32) 4/16 (1.6) 14/4 4/8 (32) 4/16 (1.6) 44/2 1/8 (32) 4/16 (1) 2 1/8 (32) 4/16 (1.6) 24/2 1/8 (32) a/16 (1.6) 3 3/6 (438) 4/16 (1.6) an/2 4/4 (6a) 4/8 (3.2) 4 1/4 (6A) 1/8 (3.2) 8 1/4 (6a) 1/8 (3.2) é va (ea Vis 63 8 5/16 (79) 1/8 (32) 10 5/16 (7) 3/6 (48) 12 : 5/16 (73) 3/16 (438) 14 5/16 (79) 3/16 (438) 16 3/8 (95) 3/16 (a8) 18 4/2 (12. 4/4 (6) 20 1/2 (12.7) 1/4 (64) 24 1/2 (12, 1/4 (64) NOTES: 1) Imperfections must be separated by at least four times the permissible radial projection. (2) Protrusions above the serrations are not permitted. FLANGE PERIPHERY SSERRATED (RAISED) FACE ‘Sketch showing Radial Projected Length (RPL) serrated gasket face damage Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 910, " 12, 13, 14, 15. 16. 17. 18, 19, GENERAL FABRICATION AND PERFORMANCE INFORMATION SECTION DEFINITIONS Baffle is a device to direct the shell side fluid across the tubes for optimum heat transfer. Bale and Support Plate Tube Hole Clearance isthe diametral difference between the nominal tube OD ‘the nominal tube hole diameter in the baffle or ‘support plate. et ‘Consequential Damages are indirect liabilities lying outside the heat exchanger manufacturer's state ‘equipment warranty obligations. ‘Double Tubesheet Construction is a type of construction in which two (2) spaced tubesheets or equivalent ar ‘employed in lieu of the single tubesheet at one or both ends of the heat exchanger. Effective Shell and Tube Side Desian Pressures are the resultant load values expressed as uniform pressure used in the determination of tubesheet thickness for fixed tubesheet heat exchangers and are functions of th shell side design pressure, the tube side design pressure, the ‘equivalent differential expansion pressure an. the equivalent bolting pressure. , Equivalent Boling Pressure is the pressure equivalent resulting from the effects of bolting loads imposed o tubesheets in a fixed tubesheet heat exchanger when the tubesheets are extended for bolting as flange connections, Equivalent Differential Expansion Pressure is the pressure equivalent resulting from the effect of tubeshec loadings na fixed tubesheet heat exchanger imposed by the restraint of differential thermal expansion betwee shell and tubes. Expanded Tube Joint is the tube-to-tubesheet joint achieved by mechanical or explosive expansion of the tub into the tube hole in the tubesheet. Expansion Joint J Factor is the ratio of the spring raté of the expansion joint to the sum of the axial sprin. rate of the shell and the spring rate of the expansion joint. Ei tion Factors are factors used to compensate for the uneven application of bottin moments due to large bolt spacing. Minion dimum Baffi are designtimtations forthe spacing of bafies to provid for nical integrity and thermal and hydraulic effectiveness of the bundle. The possibility for Induce vibration has not been considered in establishing these values. ‘Normal Operating Conditions of a shell and tube heat exchanger are the thermal and hydraulic performance requirements generally specified for sizing the heat exchanger. ulsatingEluld Conditions are conditions of low generally characterized by rapid fluctuations in pressure ary flow rate resulting from sources outside of the heat exchanger. ‘Seismic Loadings are forces and moments resulting in induced stresses on any member of a heat exchange ‘due to pulse mode or complex waveform accelerations to the heat exchanger, such as those resulting fror earthquakes, ‘Shell and Tube Mean Metal Temperatures are the average metal temperatures through the shell and tub thicknesses integrated over the length of the heat exchanger for a given steady state operating condition. ‘Shut-Down Conditions are the conditions of operation which exist from the time of steady state operatin Conditions to the time that flow of both process streams has ceased. ‘Start-Up Conditions are the conditions of operation which exist from the time that flow of either or both proces streams is initiated to the time that steady state operating conditions are achieved. isa device to support the bundle or to reduce unsupported tube span without consideration fc ‘Support plate heat transfer. ‘Tubesheet Ligament is the shortest distance between edge of adjacent tube holes in the tube pattern, Welded Tube Joint is a tube-to-tubesheet joint where the tube is welded to the tubesheet. 10 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL FABRICATION AND PERFORMANCE INFORMATION SECTION 3 FIGURE G-5.2 HEAT EXCHANGER SPECIFICATION SHEET 1 ee 2} customer ‘Relrence No. 3)Aaaress Proposal Ne. 4{Piant Location Date 5 [Service of Unit Tem Na. ofsize ent ‘Gonnectod 7 [Soci Creare Fr Shela ‘SurfShell (roeaTERY q PERFORMANCE OF ONE UNIT | Fiud Ateeaton Shel Side 10rd Name 11 Fig Guantiy Toa Ta vo_ve x id 14 Steam, 1s{_ Water 16| —Noncondensatia 17 Fomperatre (vOut | 18[Speciie Gravy a ” 20 [Molecular Weight Vi 21 [Molecular Weight, Nencondensabla 12| Specific Heat BTS | 23[ Therma BRFITHr sq FI a 24[Latent Heat Bui @ | 2sfinlot Pressure Pail 26|ve FT Seq 27 [Pressure Drop, Alo. [Ga Pal n 2 [Fouling Resistance (ii. Tsar FT Bul 2 [Heat Exche BUT HEMT (Corected) 30) Transfer Rate, Senco Gran Bus HrSaFr a (CONSTRUCTION OF ONE SHELL unaleezzle Orientation) 32 ‘Shel Sie. Tie Sie 33 [Design Test Pressure 0 7 ‘34[Design Temp. Maxie r 7 '35|No, Passes por Shel 136 |Cortosion Alowance 37 [Connections [la 3a sea [ow 39|__Rating _[intermate +40) Tube Ne, (00 TTR GATTAY FEPrE, hs eeewoe 4i[Tube Tatar ‘2|Shet i [Shot Cover Tes caer) 48 [Channel or Bonnet [Ghannel Gover ‘44|Tubesheut- Star [Tubesheet Feat ‘4 Floating Head Cover impingement Preieaion 146 |e Cross Cut Gar Spacing: oe ‘47 [Bats Seal als y «| Tuber Tubeshest Jomt soles a ‘52|Gastate-Shot Side Tube Se Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association WSECTION 3 GENERAL FABRICATION AND PERFORMANCE INFORMATION FIGURE G-5.2M HEAT EXCHANGER SPECIFICATION SHEET 1 2}customer 3] Adress [Pant Location [Service of unt ofsize 7[Sudtoni Grease 4 | Fura Rocaon 10)Fuia Name. 11] Fue ua 1o]__vat x 4 eae. Reterenco No Proposal No. Date Tem Wo Tver ‘Connected 1 Shel ‘SuriShet (GeEVER) PERFORMANCE OF ONE UNIT ‘Shel Side Tar wou 1d ‘Stearn 15[——Water 18| _—Nencondensatie +7 Fernperature (vu) ag Gi ag auld 20)tolecular Weight 21 [Molecular Weight, Nencopdansatie 22 Speciic Heat 7 23] ermal Cond Win 24] latent Heat ig: 2sfinit Pressure 26|Velocty. 27 [Pressure rep, Alba Tea, 28|Fouting Resistance: 20 [Heat Exc 20] Transfer Rat, Service 3 2x 33)Dosign 7 Tost Pressure ‘34[Design Temp. Manin 35. Passes per Shel 236] coresion Alowance abs) ‘Hise Wal Ta] Sam WSar ‘Skaich (Sondia/ Nase Ovetato) (CONSTRUCTION OF ONE SHELL ‘Shel Side 7 a 37) Connections [in 38] Size [Out 39|__Rating [intermediate 40) Tube No OD. im SSS OSN Se 4[Tube Ty ator ‘shell [Shel Cover 43] Channel or Bonnet [Channel Gover 44] Tubeshoot Stationary [Tubeshea i Proiection 46[Battes Gross ‘iCut (lar Area) (7 [Bafies-Lo ‘Seal RPI Treg) ___Remov} Taber Tubeshoat Jone $52 Gaskets Shot Sido Tube Se 12 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL FABRICATION AND PERFORMANCE INFORMATION SECTION 3 G-1 SHOP OPERATION ‘The detailed methods of shop operation are left to the discretion of the manufacturer in conformity with these Standards. G-2 INSPECTION G-2.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSPECTION Inspection and testing of units will be provided by the manufacturer unless otherwise specified. The ‘manufacturer shall carry out the Inspections required by the ASME Code, and also inspections requited by state and local codes when the purchaser specifies the plant location. G-2.2 PURCHASER'S INSPECTION ‘The purchaser shall have the right to make inspections during fabrication and to witness any tests when he has so requested. Advance notification shall be given as agreed between the manufacturer and the purchaser. Inspection by the purchaser shall not relieve the manufacturer of his responsibilities. G-3 NAME PLATES G-3.1 MANUFACTURER'S NAME PLATE A suitable manufacturer's name plate of corrosion resistant material shall be permanently attached to the head end or the shell of each TEMA exchanger. Name plates for exchangers manufactured in accordance with Classes "R and “B" shall be austenitic (300 series) stainless. When insulation thickness spectied by the purchaser, the name pate shal be attached to a bracket welded 6 the exchanger. G-3.11 NAME PLATE DATA In addition to all data required by the ASME Code, a name plate shall also include the following (f provided): User's equipment identification User's order number G-3.12 SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION ‘The manufacturer shal supply supplemental information where i's pertinent tothe operation or testing ofthe exchanger. This would include information pertaining to dferential design and test pressure conditions, restrictions on operating conditions for fixed tubesheet type ‘exchangers, or other restrictive conditions applicable to the design and /or operation of the Unit or its components. Such information can be noted on the name plate or on a supplemental plate attached to the exchanger at the name plate location. G-3.2 PURCHASER’S NAME PLATE Purchaser's name plates, when used, are to be supplied by the purchaser and supplement rather than replace the manufacturer's name plate. G-3.3 TEMA REGISTRATION PLATE ‘The TEMA organization has adopted a voluntary registration system for TEMA members only. When a heat exchanger is registered with TEMA, a unique number is assigned to the heat exchanger. A TEMA registration plate, showing this number, Is affixed to the heat exchanger and the ASME Code data report is placed on file at the TEMA office. By referencing this registration number, a copy of the ASME Code data report may be obtained by the purchaser from the TEMA offic. G-4 DRAWINGS AND ASME CODE DATA REPORTS, G-4.1 DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL AND CHANGE The manufacturer shall submit for purchaser's approval three (3) prints of an outline drawing showing nozzle sizes and locations, overall dimensions, supports and weight, Other drawings may be furnished as agreed upon bythe purchaser and the manufacturers anticipated that @ reasonable number of minor drawing changes may be required at that time. Changes subsequent to receipt of approval may cause additional expense chargeable to the purchaser. Purchaser's approval cf cravings dos, ‘not relieve the manufacturer of responsiblity for compliance with this Standard and applicable ASME Code requirements. The manufacturer shall not make any changes Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 13SECTION 3 GENERAL FABRICATION AND PERFORMANCE INFORMATION on the approved drawings without express agreement of the purchaser, Shop detail drawings, while primary tor infernal use by the fabricator may be fumighea tore purchaser upon request. Wren detail drawings are requested, they will only be supplied after outline drawings have been approved. G-4.2 DRAWINGS FOR RECORD After approval of drawings, the manufacturer shall fumish three (3) prints or, at his option, a transparency of all approved drawings. G-4.3 PROPRIETARY RIGHTS TO DRAWINGS ‘The drawings and the design indicated by them are to be considered the property of the ‘manufacturer and are not to be used or reproduced without his permission, except by the purchaser for his own internal use. G-4.4 ASME CODE DATA REPORTS: : ‘After completion of fabrication and inspection of ASME Code stamped exchangers, the manufacturer shall furnish three (3) copies of the ASME Manufacturer's Data Report. G-5 GUARANTEES G-5.1 GENERAL The specific terms of the guarantees should be agreed upon by the manufacturer and purchaser. Unless otherwise agreed upon by the manufacturer and purchaser, the following paragraphs in this section will be applicable. G-5.2 PERFORMANCE The purchaser shall furnish the manufacturer with al information needed for clear understanding of performance requirements, including any special requirements. The manufacturer shall guarantoe thermal performance and mechanical design of a heat exchanger, when operated at the design conditions specified by the purchaser in his order, or shown on the exchanger specification furnished by the manufacturer (Figure G-5.2, G-5.2M). This guarantee shall extend for a period of {wale (12) months after shipping date, The manufacture shall assume no responsibilty for excessive fouling of the apparatus by material such as coke, silt, scale, or any foreign substance that ‘may be deposited. The thermal guarantee shall not be applicable to exchangers where the thermal performance rating was made by the purchaser. G-5.21 THERMAL PERFORMANCE TEST ‘A performance test shall be made if i is established after operation that the performance of the exchanger Is not satisfactory, provided the thermal performance rating was made by the ‘manufacturer. Test conditions and procedures shall be selected by agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer to permit extrapolation of the test results to the specified design conditions. G-5.22 DEFECTIVE PARTS. ‘The manufacturer shall repair or replace F.0.B. his plant any parts proven defective within the uarantee period. Finished materials and accessories purchased from other manufacturers, fRoluding tubes, are warranted only to the extent of the onginal manufacturors warranty tthe heat exchanger fabricator. G-5.3 CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ‘The manutacturer shall not be held liable for any indirect or consequential damage. G-5.4 CORROSION AND VIBRATION ‘The manufacturer assumes no responsibilty for deterioration of any part or parts of the equipment due to corrosion, erosion, flow induced tube vibration, of any other causes, regardless of when such deterioration occurs after leaving the manufacturer's premises, except as provided for in Paragraphs G-52and 65.22. 14 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL FABRICATION AND PERFORMANCE INFORMATION SECTION 3 G-5.5 REPLACEMENT AND SPARE PARTS When replacement or spare tube bundles, shells, or other parts are purchased, the manufacturer Is to guarantee satstactory ft of such pats only fhe was the orginal manufacturer. Pars fabricated 0 drawings furnished by the purchaser shall be guaranteed to meet the dimensions and tolerances specified. G-6 PREPARATION OF HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR SHIPMENT G-6.1 CLEANING Internal and external surfaces are to be free from loose scale and other foreign material that is readily removable by hand or power brushing. G-6.2 DRAINING Water, oil, of other liquids used for cleaning or hydrostatic testing are to be drained from all unit Baie Shsments Th eno fo imply hat he unks mut be compte ary. oS G-6.3 FLANGE PROTECTION All exposed machined contact surfaces shall be coated with a removable rust preventative and protected against mechanical damage by suttable covers. G-6.4 THREADED CONNECTION PROTECTION All threaded connections are to be suitably plugged. G-6.5 DAMAGE PROTECTION The exchanger and any spare parts are to be suitably protected to prevent damage during shipment. G-6.6 EXPANSION JOINT PROTECTION External thin walled expansion bellows shall be equipped with a protective cover which does not restrain movernent. G-7 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION FEATURES OF TEMA STANDARD HEAT EXCHANGERS G-7.1 SUPPORTS. Al heat exchangers are to be provided with supports. 4G-7.11 HORIZONTAL UNITS The supports should be designed to accommodate the weight of the unit and contents, including the flooded weight during hydrostatic test. For units with removable tube bundles, supports should be designed to withstand a pulling force equal to 1-1/2 times the weight of the tube bundle. For purposes of support desig, forces from external nozzle loadings, wind and selsmic events are assumed to be negligible unless the purchaser specifically details the Toquirements. When these additional loads and forces are required to be considered, the Combinations need not be assumed to occur simultaneously. ‘The references under Paragraph G-7.13 may be used for calculating resulting stresses due to the saddle supports. Horizontal units are normaly provided with at least two sadal type supports, with holes for anchor bolts. The holes in all but one of the supports are to be elongated to accommodate ‘axial movernent of the unit under operating conditions. Other types of support may be used if all design criteria are met, and axial movement is accommodated. *G-7.12 VERTICAL UNITS Vertical units are to be provided with supports adequate to meet design requirements. The supports may be of the lug, annular ring, leg or skirt type. I the unit is to be located in a Supporting structure, the supports should be of sufficient size to allow clearance for the body flanges. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 15SECTION 3 GENERAL FABRICATION AND PERFORMANCE INFORMATION G-7.13 REFERENCES: (1) Zick LP, ‘Stresses in Large Horizontal Cylindrical Pressure Vesssts on Two Saddle Supports,” Pressure Vessel and Piping; Design and Analysis, ASME, 1972. (2) Vinet, R., and Dore, R., “Stresses and Deformations in a Cylindrical Shell Lying on a Continuous Rigid Suppor,” Paper No. 75-AM-1, Journal of Applied Mechanics, Trans. ASME. (@) Krupka, V., "An Analysis for Lug or Saddle Supported Cylindrical Pressure Vessels,” Proceedings ofthe Firt International Conference on Pressure Vessol Technology, Pp. (4) Singh, K.P., Soler, A. |, "Mechanical Design of Heat Exchangers and Pressure Vessel Components,” Chapter 17, Arcturus Publishers, Inc. (6) Bijlaard, P. P., "Stresses from Local Loadings in Cylindrical Pressure Vessels," Trans. ASME, Vol. 77, No. 6, (August 1955). (6) Wichman, K. R., Hopper, A.G., and Mershon, J. L., "Local Stresses in Spherical and Gytinrical Shells due to External Loadings," We 1g Research Council, Bulletin No. 107, ev. (7) Rodabaugh, E. C., Dodge, W. G., and Moore, S. E., "Stress Indices at Lug Supports on Piping Systems,” Welding Research Council Bulletin No. 198. (8) Brownell, L.E., and Young, E. H., "Process Equipment Design,” John Wiley & Sons Inc. (9) Jawad, M.H., and Farr, J. R., “Structural Analysis and Design of Process Equipment," John ‘Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1984. (10) Bednar, H. H., "Pressure Vessel Design Handbook,” Van Nostrand Reinhold Company. (11) Blodgett, O. W., "Design of Welded Structures,” The James F. Lincoln Arc Welding Foundation, 1966. (12) Moss, Dennis R., "Pressure Vessel Design Manual," 1987, Gulf Publishing Company. *G-7.2 LIFTING DEVICES Channels, bonnets, and covers which weigh over 60 lbs. (27.2 Ka) ate to be provided with iting lugs, fings or tipped holes for eysbots. Unless otherwise speciied, these iting devices are designed to lift only the component to which they are directly attached. Lugs for liting the complete unit are not normally provided. When lifting lugs or trunnions are required by the purchaser to lift the complete unit, the device must be adequately designed. (1) The purchaser shall inform the manufacturer about the way in which the lifting device will be used. Tre purchaser sal be noted of any ition of te ing device relating to design or method of rigging (2) Liquid penetrant examination of the lifting device attachment weld should be considered on large heavy units (3) The design load shall incorporate an appropriate impact factor. (4) Plate-type litting lugs should be oriented to minimize bending stresses, (6) The hole diameter in the lifting device must be large enough to accept a shackle pin having a load rating greater than the design load, (6) The effect on the unit component to which the lifting device is attached should be considered. It may be necessary to add a reinforcing plate, annular ring or pad to distribute the load. (7) The adequacy of the exchanger to accommodate the lifting loads should be evaluated. *G-7.3 WIND & SEISMIC DESIGN For wind and seismic forces to be considered in the design of a heat exchanger, the purchaser must ‘specify in the inquiry the design requirements. The "Recommended Good Practice” section of these Standards provides the designer with a discussion on this subject and selected references for design application. 16 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationINSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SECTION 4 E-1 PERFORMANCE OF HEAT EXCHANGERS Satisfactory operation of heat exchangers can be obtained only from units which are properly designed and have builtin quality. Correct installation and preventive maintenance are user resporeibilies, E-1.1 PERFORMANCE FAILURES The failure of heat exchanger equipment to perform satisfactorily may be caused by one or more factors, such as: (1) Excessive fouling (2) Air or gas binding resulting from improper piping installation or lack of suitable vents. (3) Operating conditions differing from design conditions. (4) Maldistribution of flow in the unit. (6) Excessive clearances between the baffies and shell and/or tubés, due to corrosion. (6) improper thermal design. The user's best assurance of satisfactory performance lies in dependence upon manufacturers competent in the design and fabrication of heat transfer equipment. £-2 INSTALLATION OF HEAT EXCHANGERS E-2.1 HEAT EXCHANGER SETTINGS E-2.11 CLEARANCE FOR DISMANTLING For straight tube exchangers fitted with removable bundles, provide sufficient clearance at the stationary head end to permit removal ofthe bundle from the shell and provide adequate space beyond the rear head to permit removal of the shell cover and/or floating head cover. For fixed tubesheet exchangers, provide sufficient clearance at one end to permit withdrawal and replacement of the tubes, and enough space beyond the head at the opposite end to permit removal of the bonnet or channel cover. For U-tube heat exchangers, provide sufficient clearance at the stationary head end to permit withdrawal of the tube bundle, or at the opposite end to permit removal of the shell E-2.12 FOUNDATIONS Foundations must be adequate so that exchangers will not settle and impose excessive strains on the exchanger, Foundation bolts should be set to allow for setting inaccuracies. In ‘concrete footings, pipe sieeves at least one size larger than bolt diameter slipped over the bolt and cast in place are best for this purpose, as they allow the bolt center to be adjusted after the foundation has set. E-2.13 FOUNDATION BOLTS Foundation bolts should be loosened at one end of the unit to allow free expansion of shells. Slotted holes in supports are provided for this purpose. £-2.14 LEVELING Exchangers must be set level and square so that pipe connections may be made without forcing. £-2.2 CLEANLINESS PROVISIONS £-2.21 CONNECTION PROTECTORS All exchanger openings should be inspected for foreign material. Protective plugs and covers should not be removed untl just prior to installation. E-2.22 DIRT REMOVAL The entre system should be clean belor starting operation. Under some conditions, the use of strainers in the piping may be required. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association BeeSECTION 4 INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE E-2.23 CLEANING FACILITIES Convenient means should be provided for cleaning the unit as suggested under "Mainte of Heat Exchangers,” Paragraph E-4. : ccananedral claimed E-2.3 FITTINGS AND PIPING E-2.31 BY-PASS VALVES It may be desirable for purchaser to provide valves and by-passes in the pipit stem to, permit inspection and repairs. 7 a Me be fae E-2.32 TEST CONNECTIONS When not integral with the exchanger nozzles, thermometer well and pressure gage connections should be installed close to the exchanger in the inlet and outlet piping. E.2.33 VENTS, ‘Vent valves should be provided by purchaser so units can be purged to prevent vapor or gas binding. Special consideration must be given to discharge of hazardous or toxic fiuids. E-2.34 DRAINS Drains may discharge to atmosphere, if permissible, or into a vessel at lower pressure. They should not be piped to a common closed manila E-2.95 PULSATION AND VIBRATION - {mall installations, cafe should be taken to eliminate or minimize transmission of fluid pulsations and mechanical vibrations to the heat exchangers. E-2.96 SAFETY RELIEF DEVICES The ASME Code defines the requirements for safety relief devices. When specified by the. purchaser, the manufacturer will provide the necessary connections for the safety relief Govices. The size and type ofthe required connections wil be spectied by the purchaser ‘The purchaser will provide and install the required relief devices. E-3 OPERATION OF HEAT EXCHANGERS, E-3.1 DESIGN AND OPERATING CONDITIONS Equipment must not be operated at conditions which exceed those specified on the name piate(s). E-3.2 OPERATING PROCEDURES Before placing any exchanger in operation, reference should be made to the exchanger drawings, ‘specification sheet(s) and name plate(8) for any special instructions. Local safety and health regulations must be considered. Improper start-up or shut-down sequences, particularly of fixed tubesheet units, may cause leaking of tube-to-tubesheet and/or bolted flanged joints. £-3.21 START-UP OPERATION Most exchangers with removable tube bundles may be placed in service by first establishing circulation of the cold medium, followed by the gradual introduction of the hot medium. During start-up all vent valves should be opened and left open untl all passages have been purged of air and are completely filed with fluid. For fixed tubesheet exchangers, fluids must be introduced in a manner to minimize differential expansion between the shell and tubes. E-3.22 SHUT-DOWN OPERATION For exchangers with removable bundles; the units may be shut dawn by frst gradually stopping the flow of the hot medium and then stopping the flow of the cold medium. Hf itis Necessary to stop the flow of cold medium, the circulation of hot medium through the ‘exchanger should also be stopped. For fixed tubesheet exchangers, the unit must be shut down ina manner to minimize differential expansion between shell and tubes. When shutting down the system, all units should be drained completely when there is the poss\bilty of freezing or corrosion damage. To guard against water hammer, condensate should be 18 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationINSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SECTION 4 drained from steam heaters and simlar apparatus during start-up or shut-down, To reduce Water retention after drainage, the tube sie of water codted exchangers should be blown out air. £-3.23 TEMPERATURE SHOCKS Exchangers normally should not be subjected to abrupt temperature fluctuations. Hot fluid ‘must not be suddenly introduced when the unit is cold, nor cold fluid suddenly introduced when the unit Is hot. E-3.24 BOLTED JOINTS Heat exchangers are pressure tested before leaving the manufacturer's shop in accordance with ASME Code requirements, However, normal relaxing of the gasketed joints may occur in the interval Between testing in the manufacturer's shop and installation at the jobsite. Therefore, all external bolted joints may require retightening after installation and, if necessary, after the exchanger has reached operating temperature. E-3.25 RECOMMENDED BOLT TIGHTENING PROCEDURE Itis important that all bolted joints be tightened unifo pattern, as illustrated in Figure E-3.25, except for speci instructions of the manufacturer should be followed. FIGURE E-3.25, and ina diametrically staggered high pressure closures when the START E-4 MAINTENANCE OF HEAT EXCHANGERS E-4.1 INSPECTION OF UNIT At regular intervals and as frequently as experience indicates, an examination should be made of the interior and exterior condition of the unit. Neglect in keeping all tubes clean may result in complete stoppage of flow through some tubes which could cause severe thermal strains, leaking tube joints, or structural damage to other components. Sacrificial anodes, when provided, should be inspected to determine whether they should be cleaned or replaced. E-4.11 INDICATIONS OF FOULING Exchangers subject to fouling or scaling should be cleaned periodically. A light sludge or scale coating on the tube greatly reduces its efficiency. A marked increase in pressure drop and/or reduction in performance usually indicates cleaning is necessary. The unit should first bbe checked for alr or vapor binding to confirm that this Is not the cause for the reduction in performance. Since the dificulty of cleaning increases rapidly as the scale thickness or deposit increases, the intervals between cleanings should not be excessive. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 19SECTION 4 INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE E-4.12 DISASSEMBLY FOR INSPECTION OR CLEANING Before disassembly, the user must assure himself that the unit has been depressurized, vented and drained, neutralized and/or purged of hazardous material. To inspect the inside of the tubes and also make them accessible for cleaning, the following procedures should be used: (1) Stationary Head End (@) Type A, C, D &N, remove cover only (0) Type B, remove bonnet (2) Rear Head End (@) Type L, N&P, remove cover only (0) Type M, remove bonnet (©) Type S &T, remove shell cover and floating head cover (8) Type W, remove channel cover or bonnet E-4.13 LOCATING TUBE LEAKS The following procedures may be used to locate perforated or split tubes and leaking joints between tubes and tubesheets. In most cases, the entire front face of each tubesheet will be accessible for inspection. The point where water escapes indicates a defective tube or tube-to-tubesheet joint. (1) Unt with removable channel cover: Remove channel cover and apply hydraulic pressure inthe shel. (2) Units with bonnet type head: For fixed tubesheet units where tubesheets are an integral ‘part of the shell, remove bonnet and apply hydraulic pressure in the shell~For fixed tubesheet units where tubesheets are not an integral part of the shell and for units with removable bundles, remove bonnet, re-bolt tubesheet to shell or install test flange or gland, whichever is applicable, and apply hydraulic pressure in the shell. See Figure E-4.13-1 for typical test flange and test gland, FIGURE E-4.13-1 (@) Units with Type S oF T floating head: Remove channel cover or bonnet, shell cover and floating head cover. Install test ring and bott in place with gasket and packing. Apply hydraulic pressure in the shell. A typical test ring is shown in Figure E-4.13-2. When a test ring is not available itis possible to focate leaks in the floating head end by removing the shell cover and applying hydraulic pressure in the tubes. Leaking tube joints may then be located by sighting through the tube lanes. Care must be exercised when testing partially ‘assembled exchangers to prevent over extension of expansion joints or overioading of tubes and/or tube-to-tubesheet joints. (4) Hydrostatic test should be performed so that the temperature of the metal is over 60° F (16° C) unless the materials of construction have a lower nil-ductlity transition temperature. 20 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationINSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SECTION 4 FIGURE E-4.13-2 TEST RING FLOATING TUBESHEET — SHELL FLANGE- REAR HEAD ENO PACKING GLAND Gasket §-4.2 TUBE BUNDLE REMOVAL AND HANDLING To avoid possible damage during removal of a tube bundle from a shell, a pulling device should be attached fo eyebolts screwed into the tubesheet. If the tubesheet does not have tapped holes for eyebolts, steel rods or cables inserted through tubes and attached to bearing plates may be used. {he bundle should be supported on the tube bef, supports ortubesheets fo prevent damage to the tu Gasket and packing contact surfaces should be protected. E-4.3 CLEANING TUBE BUNDLES £-4.31 CLEANING METHODS The heat transfer surfaces of heat exchangers should be kept reasonably clean to assure satisfactory performance. Convenient means for cleaning should be made available. Heat exchangers may be cleaned by either chemical or mechanical methods. The method selected must be the choice of the operator of the plant and will depend on the type of deposit and the facilities available in the plant. Following are several cleaning procedures that may be considered: (1) Circulating hot wash oil or light distilate through tubes or shel at high velocity may effectively remove sludge or similar soft deposits. (2) Some salt deposits may be washed out by circulating hot fresh water. (@) Commercial cleaning compounds are available for removing sludge or scale provided hot wash oll or water is not available or does not give satisfactory results. (4) High pressure water jet cleaning, (6) Scrapers, rotating wire brushes, and other mechanical means for removing hard scale, ‘coke, or other deposits. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 21SECTION 4 INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (6) Employ services of a qualified organization that provides cleaning services. These ‘organizations will check the nature of the deposits to be removed, furnish proper solvents ‘and/or acid solutions containing inhibitors, and provide equipment and personnel for a complete cleaning job. -4.32 CLEANING PRECAUTIONS: (1) Tubes should not be cleaned by blowing steam through individual tubes since this heats the tube and may result in severe expansion strain, deformation of the tube, or loosening ‘of the tube-to-tubeshest joint (2) When mechanically cleaning a tube bundle, care should be exercised to avoid damaging the tubes. (8) Cleaning compounds must be compatible with the metallurgy of the exchanger. E-4,4 TUBE EXPANDING : A suitable tube expander should be used to tighten a leaking tube joint. Care should be taken to ensure that tubes are not over expanded. E-4.5 GASKET REPLACEMENT Gaskets and gasket surfaces should be thoroughly cleaned and should be free of scratches and other defects. Gaskets should be property positioned before attempting to retighten bolts. It is recommended that when a heat exchanger is dismantled for any cause, it be reassembled with new gaskets. This will tend to prevent future leaks and/or damage to the gasket seating surfaces of the heat exchanger. Composition gaskets become dried out and britle so that they do not always provide an effective seal when Feused Metal or meta jacketed gaskets, when compressed intial, flow to match their contact surfaces. in so doing they are work hardened and, if reused, may provide an imperiect seal or result in deformation and damage tothe gasket contact surfaces of the exchanger. Bolted joints and flanges are designed for use with the particular type of gasket specified, Substitution of a gasket of different construction or improper dimensions may result in leakage and damage to gasket surfaces. Therefore, any gasket substitutions should be of compatible design. ‘Any leakage at a gasketed joint should be rectified and not permitted to persist as it may result in damage to the gasket surfaces. Metal jacketed type gaskets are widely used. When these are used with a tongue and groove joint without a nubbin, the gasket should be instailed so that the tongue bears on the seamless side of the gasket jacket. When a nubbin is used, the nubbin should bear on the seamless side. £-4,.6 SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS: ‘The procurement of spare or replacement parts from the manufacturer will be facilitated if the correct ‘name for the part, as shown in Section 1, Table N-2, of these Standards is given, together with the serial number, type, size, and other information from the name plate. Replacement parts should be purchased from the original manufacturer. E-4.7 PLUGGING OF TUBES: In U-tube heat exchangers, and other exchangers of special design, it may not be feasible to remove and replace defective tubes, Defective tubes may be plugged using commercially avalabe tapered plugs with ferrules or tapered only plugs which may of may not be seal welded. Excessive tube Bugging may result in reduced thermal performance, higher pressure drop: and/or mechanical damage. Its the user's responsibilty to remove plugs and neutralize the bundle prior to sending it toa shop for repairs. 22 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationSECTION 5, MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B RCB-1 SCOPE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS RCB-1.1 SCOPE OF STANDARDS RCB-1.11 GENERAL ‘The TEMA Mechanical Standards are applicable to shell and tube heat exchar hich not exceed any of the following one areata (1) inside diameters of 100 inches (2540 mm) (2) product of nominal diameter, inches (mm) and desi ure, psi (kPa) of 1 @) product ef (mm) sign pressure, psi (kPa) of 100,000 (@) a design pressure of 3,000 psi (20684 kPa) ‘The intent of these parameters is to limit the maximum shell wall thickness to approximately 3 inches (76 mm), and the maximum stud diameter to approximately 4 inches (102 mm) Criteria contained in these Standards may be applied to units which exceed the above parameters. -1.12 DEFINITION OF TEMA CLASS "R’ EXCHANGERS ‘The TEMA Mechanical Standards for Class "R" heat exchangers specify design and fabrication of unfired shell and tube heat exchangers for the generally severe requirements of petroleum and related processing applications. C-1.12 DEFINITION OF TEMA CLASS °C" EXCHANGERS ‘The TEMA Mechanical Standards for Class °C" heat exchangers specify design and fabrication of unfired shell and tube heat exchangers for the generally moderate requirements ‘of commercial and general process applications. B-1.12 DEFINITION OF TEMA CLASS "B" EXCHANGERS ‘The TEMA Mechanical Standards for Class "B" heat exchangers specify design and fabrication of unfired shell and tube heat exchangers for chemical process service. RCB-1.13 CONSTRUCTION CODES The Indival vessels shall comply withthe ASME (American Society of Mechanica) Engineers) Boller and Pressure Vessel Code, Section Vill, Division 1, hereinafter referred to asthe Code. These Standards supplement and define the Code for heat exchanger applications, The manufacturer shall comply with the construction requirements of state and local codes when the purchaser specifies the plant location. It shall be the responsibility of the purchaser to inform the manufacturer of any applicable local codes. Application of the fe symbol is required, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. RCB-1.14 MATERIALS-DEFINITION OF TERMS For purposes of these Standards, “carbon stee!" shall be construed as any steel or low alloy faling within the scope of Part UCS of the Code. Metals not included by the foregoing (except cast ron shal be considered 28 “alloys unless otherwise specfically narned. Materals of construction, including gaskets, should be specified by the purchaser. The manufacturer ‘assumes no responsiblity for deterioration of parts for any reason. RCB-1.2 DESIGN PRESSURE RCB-1.21 DESIGN PRESSURE Design pressures for the shell and tube sides shall be specified separately by the purchaser. RCB-1.3 TESTING RCB-1.31 STANDARD TEST ‘The exchanger shall be hydrostatically tested with water. The test pressure shall be held for atleast 30 minutes. The shell side and the tube side are to be tested separately in such a ‘manner that leaks at the tube joints can be detected from at least one side. When the tube side design pressure is the higher pressure, the tube bundle shall be tested outside of the ‘shell only # specified by the purchaser and the construction permits. Welded joints are to be Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 23SECTIONS MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B sufficiently cleaned prior to testing the exchanger to permit proper ion during the test. ‘The minimum hyerostae tee pressure et room temperature shal be in accordance withthe le. RCB-1.311 OTHER LIQUID TESTS Liquids other than water may be used as a testing medium if agreed upon purchaser and the manufacturer. ‘g agreed upon between the RCB-1,32 PNEUMATIC TEST When liquid cannot be tolerated as a test medium the exchanger may be glven a pneumatic test in accordance with the Code. It must be recognized that air or gas is hazardous when used as a pressure testing medium. The pneumatic test pressure at room temperature il be in accordance with the Code. e . eae RCB-1.33 SUPPLEMENTARY AIR TEST When a supplementary air or gas test is specified by the purchaser, it shall be preceded by the hydrostatic test required by Paragraph RCB-1.31. The test pressure shall be as agreed upon by the purchaser and manuiacturer, bu shal not exceed tht required by Paragraph RCB-1.4 METAL TEMPERATURES RCB-1.41 METAL TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS FOR PRESSURE PARTS ‘The metal temperature limitations for various metals are those prescribed by the Code. RCB-1.42 DESIGN TEMPERATURE OF HEAT EXCHANGER PARTS RCB-1.421 FOR PARTS NOT IN CONTACT WITH BOTH FLUIDS Design temperatures forthe shel and tube sides shal be speotied separately by the purchaser. ‘The Code provides the allowable stress limits for parts to be designed at ‘the specified design temperature. RCB-1.422 FOR PARTS IN CONTACT WITH BOTH FLUIDS ‘The design temperature is the design metal temperature and is used to establish the Code stress limits for design. The design metal temperature shall be based on the ‘operating temperatures of the shellside and the tubeside fluids, except when the purchaser specifies some other design metal temperature. When the design metal temperature is less than the higher of the design temperatures referred to in Paragrap! FACB:1.421, tho design metal tmperature andthe affcteg pats shal be shown onthe ‘manufacturer's nameplate(s) as described in Paragraph G-3.1 RCB-1.43 MEAN METAL TEMPERATURES RCB-1.431 FOR PARTS NOT IN CONTACT WITH BOTH FLUIDS ‘The mean metal temperature is the calculated metal temperature, under specified ‘operating conditions, of a part in contact with a fluid. it is used to establish metal properties under operating conditions. The mean metal temperature is based on the Specified operating temperatures of the fluid in contact with the part. RCB-1.432 FOR PARTS IN CONTACT WITH BOTH FLUIDS ‘The mean metal temperature is the calculated metal temperature, under specified operating conditions, of a part in contact with both sheliside and tubeside fluids. It is used to establish metal properties under operating conditions. The mean metal temperature is based on the specttied operating temperatures of the shellside and tubeside fluids. In establishing the mean metal temperatures, due consideration shall be given to such factors as the relative heat transfer coefficients of the two fluids contacting the part and the relative heat transfer area of the parts contacted by the tv fluids, RCB-1.5 STANDARD CORROSION ALLOWANCES ‘The standard corrosion allowances used for the various heat exchanger parts are as follows, unless the conditions of service make a different allowance more suitable and such allowance is specttied by the purchaser. 24 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B SECTION 5S RCB-1.51 CARBON STEEL PARTS: R-1.511 PRESSURE PARTS All carbon steel pressure parts, except as noted below, are to have a corrosion allowance of 1/8" (3.2 mm). CB-1.511 PRESSURE PARTS All carbon steel pressure parts, except as noted below, are to have a corrosion allowance of 1/16" (1.6 mm). RCB-1,512 INTERNAL FLOATING HEAD COVERS Internal floating head covers are to have the corrosion allowance on all wetted ‘surfaces except gasket seating surfaces. Corrosion allowance on the outside of the flanged portion may be included in the recommended minimum edge distance. RCB-1.513 TUBESHEETS ‘Tubesheets are to have the corrosion allowance on each side with the provision that, on the grooved side of a grooved tubesheet, the depth of the gasketed groove may be considered as available for corrosion allowance. RCB-1.514 EXTERNAL COVERS Where flat external covers are grooved, the depth ofthe gasketed groove may be ‘considered as available for corrosion allowance. RCB-1,515 END FLANGES Corrosion allowance shall be applied only to the inside diameter of flanges where exposed to the fluids. RCB-1.516 NONPRESSURE PARTS: ‘Nonpressure parts such as tie-rods, spacers, baffles and support plates are not required to have corrosion allowance. RCB-1,517 TUBES, BOLTING AND FLOATING HEAD BACKING DEVICES ‘Tubes, bolting and floating head backing devices are not required to have corrosion _ allowance. RCB-1.518 PASS PARTITION PLATES Pass pattition plates are not required to have corrosion allowance. RCB-1.52 ALLOY PARTS Alloy parts are not required to have corrosion allowance, R-1.53 CAST IRON PARTS Gast iron pressure parts shall have a corrosion allowance of 1/8" (3.2 mm). CB-1.53 CAST IRON PARTS Cast iron pressure parts shall have a corrosion allowance of 1/16" (1.6 mrn), RCB-1.6 SERVICE LIMITATIONS RB-1.61 CAST IRON PARTS Cast iron shall be used only for water service at pressures not exceeding 150 psi (1034 kPa). C-1.61 CAST IRON PARTS Cast iron shall not be used for pressures exceeding 150 psi (1034 kPa), or for lethal or flammable fluids at any pressure. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 25SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B 26 RCB-1.62 EXTERNAL PACKED JOINTS Packed joints shall not be used when the purchaser specifies that the fluid in contact with th joint is lethal or flammable, RCB-1.7 ANODES ‘Selection and placement of anodes is not the responsibility of the heat exchanger manufacturer. If heat exchanger i to be furished wh anodes, when requesting a quotation, the purchaser is responsible for furnishing the heat exchanger manufacturer the following information: (1) Method of anode attachment. (2) Quantity of anodes required. (@) Size and manufacturer of the anodes. (4) Anode material. " (6) Sketch of anode locations and spacing Ifthe heat exchanger manufacturer chooses to install anodes for a customer, the manufacturer is n responsible for the suitability of the anodes for the service its installed in, the life of the anodes, the corrosion protection provided by the anode, or any subsequent damage to the heat exchanger le, attributed to the anode, the method of anode installation, or the installed location of the anode in th heat exchanger. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B SECTION 5 *RCB-2 TUBES RCB-2.1 TUBE LENGTH The following tube lengths for both straight and U-tube exchangers are commonly used: 96 (2436) 120 (ode), 144 (2059), 192 (4877) and 40 (6096) inchs frm Other lengths Mey be used Also see Paragraph N-1.12. RCB-2.2 TUBE DIAMETERS AND GAGES RCB-2.21 BARE TUBES Table RCB-2.21 lists common tube diameters and gages for bare tubes of copper, steel and alloy. Other diameters and gages are acceptable. gee TABLE RCB-2.21 BARE TUBE DIAMETERS AND GAGES OD. Copper and Copper Alloys | Carbon Steel, Aluminum Other Alloys inches ‘and Aluminum Alloys (mm) BW. BWG. BWG. 4/4 27 : 27 @4) 24 : 24 22 : 22 3/8 22 - 22 (5) 20 : 20 18 : 18 1/2 20 = 20 (12.7) 18 = 18 5/8 20 18 20 (159) 18 16 18 16 14 16 3/4 20 16 18 (18.1) 18 14 16 16 12 4 7/8 18 14 16 (222) 16 12 14 14 10 12 12 : . % e $ 5.4) 1 (25.4) 4 2 12 14/4 16 14 14 (18) 14 12 12 14/2 16 14 14 (8.1) 14 12 12 2 14 14 4 (60.8) 12 2 12 Notes: 1. Wall thickness shall be specified as either minimum or average. 2. Characteristics of tubing are shown in Tables D-7 and D7M. RCB-2,22 INTEGRALLY FINNED TUBES ‘The nominal fin diameter shall not exceed the outside diameter of the unfinned section. Specified wall shall be based on the thickness at the root diameter. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 27SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B RCB-2,3 U-TUBES RCB-2.31 U-BEND REQUIREMENTS ‘When U-bends are formed, it is normal for the tube wall at the outer radius to thin. The minimum tube wall thickness in the bent portion before bending shall be: coal to Original tube wall thickness, inches (mm) t, = Minimum tube wall thickness calculated by Code rules for a straight tube subjected to the same pressure and metal temperature, inches (mm) do= Outside tube diameter, inches (mm) R= Mean radius of bend, inches (mm) ‘More than one tube gage, or dual gage tubes, may be used in a tube bundle. When U-bends are formed from tube materials which are relatively non-work-hardening and of suitable temper, tube wall thinning in the bends should not exceed a nominal 17% of ‘original tube wall thickness. Flattening at the bend shall not exceed 10% of the nominal tube outside diameter. U-bends formed from tube materials having low ductilty, or materials which are susceptible tc ‘work-hardening, may require special consideration. Also refer to Paragraph RCB-2.33. RCB-2.32 BEND SPACING - RCB-2,321 CENTER-TO-CENTER DIMENSION ‘The center-to-center dimensions between parallel legs of U-tubes shall be such that they can be inserted into the baffle assembly without damage to the tubes. RCB-2.322 BEND INTERFERENCE ‘The assembly of bends shall be of workmanlike appearance. Metal-to-metal contact between bends in the same plane shall not be permitted. RCB-2.33 HEAT TREATMENT Cold work in forming U-bends may induce embrittlement or susceptibility to stress corrosion in certain materials and/or environments. Heat treatment to alleviate such conditions may be performed by agreement between manufacturer and purchaser. RCB-2.4 TUBE PATTERN ‘Standard tube pattems are shown in Figure RCB-2.4. FIGURE RCB-2.4 so" oo 70 “ Triangular ‘fata Square . Seusre Note: Flow arrows are perpendicular to the baffle cut edge. 28 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R CB SECTIONS RCB-2.41 SQUARE PATTERN In removable bundle units, when mechanical cleaning of the tubes is specified by the purchaser, tube lanes should be continuous. RCB-2.42 TRIANGULAR PATTERN Triangular or rotated triangular pattern should not be used when the shell side is to be cleaned mechanically. R-2.5 TUBE PITCH Tubes shall be spaced with a minimum center-to-center distance of 1.25 times the outside diameter of the tube. When mechanical cleaning of the tubes is specified by the purchaser, minimum cleaning lanes of 1/4" (6.4 mm) shall be provided. C-2.5 TUBE PITCH . ‘Tubes shall be spaced with a minimum center-to-center distance of 1,25 times the outside diameter ofthe tube. Where the tube diameters are 5/8" (15.9 mm) of less and tube-to-tubesheet joints are ‘expanded only, the minimum center-to-center distance may be reduced to 1.20 times the outside diameter. B-2.5 TUBE PITCH Tubes shall be spaced with a minimum center-to-center distance of 1.25 times the outside diameter of the ube, When mechanical cleaning ofthe tubes is specied by the purchaser ard the nominal shell diameter is 12 inches (305 mm) or ess, minimum cleaning lanes of 3/16" (4.8 mm) shall be provided. For shell diameters greater than 12 inches (305 mm), minimum cleaning lanes of 1/4" (6.4 mm) shail be provided. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 29SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B RCB-3 SHELLS AND SHELL COVERS RCB-3.1 SHELLS RCB-3.11 SHELL DIAMETERS {t shall be left to the discretion of each manufacturer to establish a system of standard shell diameters within the TEMA Mechanical Standards in order to achieve the economies peculiar individual design and manufacturing facilities. RCB-3.12 TOLERANCES RCB-3,121 PIPE SHELLS ‘The inside diameter of pipe shells shall be in accordance with applicable ASTM /ASME pipe specifications. e RCB-3.122 PLATE SHELLS ‘The inside diameter of any plate shell shall not exceed the design inside diameter by more than 1/8" (3.2 mm) as determined by circumferential measurement. RCB-3.13 MINIMUM SHELL THICKNESS Shell thickness is determined by the Code design formulas, plus corrosion allowance, but in ‘no case shall the nominal thickness of shells be less than that shown in the applicable table. ‘The nominal total thickness for clad shells shall be the same as for carbon steel shells. TABLE R-3.13 MINIMUM SHELL THICKNESS. Dimensions In Inches (mm) to = Minimum Thickness Nominal Shell Diameter Carbon Steel ‘Alloy * Pipe Plate 6 152) ‘SCH. 40 P 18 (32) 8-12 (203-305) SCH. 30 : ye (32) 13-29 330-737) SCH. STD 3/8 es) | afte (48) 30-39 762-9911 : 76. (14.1) V4 64) 40-60 (1016-1524) - ye (ne. 5/6 (79) 61-80 (1549-2032) : a/aeeeg ae Ga 81-100 (2057-2540) : A/apetee (ia 3/8 (985) TABLE CB-3.13 MINIMUM SHELL THICKNESS Dimensions in Inches (mm) Minimum Thickness Nominal Shell Diameter Carbon Steel Alloy * Plate 6 (152) SCH. 40 - 1/8 (32) 8-12 (203-305) SCH. 30 - ye 32 13-23 (330-584) SCH 20 5/16 79) | 178 (32) 24-29 (610-73 - 5/6 7s) | 3/16 (48) 30-39 (762-991 3/8 (95) 4 (64) 40-60 (1016-1524) TAG (tt) 174 (64) 61-80 (1549-2032) : we 5/16 (79) 81-100 (2057-2540) : 72 27) | 3/8 G5) L *Schedule 6S Is permissible for 6 inch (152 mm) and 8 inch (203 mm) shell diameters. 30 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R CB SECTION 5 RCB-3.2 SHELL COVER THICKNESS Nominal thickness of shell cover heads, before forming, shall be at least equal to the thick shell as shown in the applicable table. : ae RCB-4 BAFFLES AND SUPPORT PLATES RCB-4.1 TYPE OF TRANSVERSE BAFFLES ‘The segmental or muiti-segmental type of baffle or tube support plate is standard. Other type batt are parrissibie. Baffle cutls detind as the segment opentig height expressed as a acciagech the shell inside diameter or as a percentage of the total net free area inside the shell (shell cross sectional area minus total tube area). The number of tube rows that overlap for multi-segmental bbaffies should be adjusted to give approximately the same net free area flow through each baffle. Baffles shall be cut near the centerline of a row of tubes, of a pass lane, of a tube lane, or outside the {ube pattern. Baffles shall have a workmanlike finish on the outside diameter. Typical baffle cuts are illustrated in Figure RCB-4.1. Baffle cuts may be vertical, horizontal or rotated. FIGURE RCB-4.1 BAFFLE CUTS FOR SEGMENTAL BAFFLES Oe Horizontal Vertict Rotated BAFFLE CUTS FOR MULTI-SEGMENTAL BAFFLES O @ t DOUBLE SEGMENTAL QD ¢).40 t TRIPLE SEGMENTAL, RCB-4.2 TUBE HOLES ‘Where the maximum unsupported tube length is 36 inches (914 mm) or less, or for tubes larger in dlameter than 1-1/4 inches (81.8 mm) OD; standard tube hoes are to be 1/2 Inch (0.8 mm) over the ‘OD of the tubes. (Where the unsupported tube length exceeds 36 inches (914 mm) for tubes 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm) diameter and smaller, standard tube holes are to be 1/64 inch (0.4 mm) over the GD of the tubes, For pulsating conditions, tube holes may be smaller than standard. Any burrs shall be removed and the tube holes given a workmanlike finish. Baffle holes wil have an over-tolerance (fF 0.010 inch (0.3 mm) except that 4% of the holes are allowed an aver-tolerance of 0.015 inch (0.4 mm). RCB-4.3 TRANSVERSE BAFFLE AND SUPPORT CLEARANCE ‘The transverse baffle and support plate clearance shall be such that the difference between the shell design inside diameter and the outside diameter of the baffie shall not exceed that indicated in Table RCB-4.3. However, where such clearance has no significant effect on shell side heat transfer coefficient or mean temperature difference, these maximum clearances may be increased to twice the tabulated values. (See Paragraph RCB-4.43.) Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 31SECTIONS MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B TABLE RCB-4.3 Standard Cross Baffle and Support Plate Clearances Dimensions In Inches (mm) Nominal Shell ID Design ID of Shell Minus Baffle OD 6-17 (1524s 1/8 (32) 18-39 (457-991 3/16 (48) 40-54 1016-1372) V4 (64) 55-69 1397-1753) 5/16 (7.9) 70-84 178-2134) 3/8 (95) 85-100 (2159-2540) TAG (11.4 ‘The design inside diameter of a pipe shell is defined as the nominal outside diameter of the pipe, minus twice the nominal wall thickness. The design inside diameter of a plate shell is the specified inside lamer. In any case, the design Inside diameter may be taken as the actual measured shell inside diameter. RCB-4.4 THICKNESS OF BAFFLES AND SUPPORT PLATES RCB-4.41 TRANSVERSE BAFFLES AND SUPPORT PLATES The following tables show the minimum thickness of transverse baffles and support plates applying to all materials for various shell diameters and plate spacings. ‘The thickness of the baffle or support plates for U-tube bundles shall be based on the unsupported tube length in the straight section of the bundle. The U-bend length shall not be considered in determining the unsupported tube length for required plate thickness. TABLE R-4.41 BAFFLE OR SUPPORT PLATE THICKNESS. Dimensions in Inches (mm) Plate Thickness Unsupported tube length between central baffles. End spaces between Nominal Shell ID tubeshests and baffles are not a consideration. 24 (610) and | Over 24 (610) [Over 36 (914) | Over 48 ‘Over 60 fer | 10.96 (914) | 10.48 (1219) | (1219) to60 |. (1524) Inclusive | ~ Inclusive (1524) Inclusive 6-14 (152-356) 1/8 (3.2) [ase (4a) [1/4 (64) [3/8 (95) [3/8 (95) 15-28 © (aat-711) |a/te (48) |1/4 (64) |a/e (95) [3/8 (9.58) |1/2 (127 29-98 7965) |1/4 (64) |5/16 (75) |3/a (95) |1/2 (12.7) \5/8 (189) 30-60 —(gat-1524) 1/4 (64) [3/8 (5) |1/2 (12.7) 5/8 (15.9) [6/8 (15.9) 61-100 (1549-2540) |3/8 (95) 1/2 (127) |5/8 (15.9) [3/4 (19.4) [3/4 (19.4 32 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B SECTION 5 TABLE CB-4.41 BAFFLE OR SUPPORT PLATE THICKNESS Dimensions in inches (mm) Plate Thickness Unsupported tube length between central baffles. End spaces between Nominal Shell ID tubesheets and baffles are not a consideration. 12 (305) | Over 12 | Over24 | Overaé | Over48 | Over6o and Under | (805) to 24 (610) to 36 | (914) to 48 | (1219) to60| (1524) 610) @14) (1219) (1524) Inclusive | inctusve | Inclusive | Inclusive S14 (iseasg [i/s8 (Lala Balas alia alae (alae es 15-28 (81-711) |1/8 (3.2) |9/16 (48) |1/4 (64) |3/8 (5) 13/8 (9.5) |1/2 (12.7) 29-98 37-965) |3/16 (48) |1/4 (6.4) |5/16 (75) |3/8 (5) |1/2 (12.7) |5/8 (159) 39-60 —_(o01-1524) |1/4 (6.4) |1/4 (6.4) [3/8 (95) |3/2 (12.7) |5/8 (15.9) 5/8 (15.9) 61-100 (1549-2540) |1/4 (6.4) |3/8_@.5)|1/2_ (12.7) |5/8_ (15.9) [3/4 _ (19.1) |3/4_ (19.1 R-4.42 LONGITUDINAL BAFFLES Longitudinal baffles shall not be less than 1/4" (6.4 mm) nominal metal thickness. (CB-4.42 LONGITUDINAL BAFFLES Longitudinal carbon steel baffles shall not be léss than 1/4” (6.4 mm) nominal metal thickness. Longitudinal alloy baffles shall not be less than 1/8" (3.2 mm) nominal metal thickness, RCB-4,43 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS ‘Special consideration should be given to: (1) Baffles and support plates subjected to pulsations. (2) Baffles and support plates engaging finned tubes. {@) Longitudinal baffles subjected to large differential pressures due to high shell side fluid pressure drop. (4) Support of tube bundles when larger clearances allowed by RCB-4.3 are used. RCB-4.5 SPACING OF BAFFLES AND SUPPORT PLATES RCB-4.51 MINIMUM SPACING ‘Segmental baffles normally should not be spaced closer than 1/5 of the shell ID or 2 inches (Gi mm), whichever Is greater. However, special design considerations may dictate a closer spacing. RCB-4.52 MAXIMUM SPACING ‘Tube support plates shall be so spaced that the unsupported tube span does not exceed the value indicated in Table RCB-4.52 for the tube material used. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 33SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B TABLE RCB-4.52 MAXIMUM UNSUPPORTED STRAIGHT TUBE SPANS Dimensions in inches (mm) ‘Tube Materials and Temperature Limits °F (°C) [Carbon Steel & High Alloy Steel, 750 [Aluminum & Aluminum Alloys, (399) ‘Copper & Copper Alloys, Titanium Tube OD —_| Low Alloy Steel, 850 (454) Alloys At Code Maximum Allowable Nickel-Copper, 600 (316) Temperature Nickel, 850 (454) Nickel-Chromium-Iron, 1000 (538) 1/4 (6.4) 26 (660) 5 22 us 63 8 (ee 2 (ree 4/2 (12.7) 44 (1118) 38 (965) 5/8 (15.9) 52 (1321 45 (1143) 3/4 (19.4 60 (1524) 52 (1921 7/8 (22.2) 69 (1753) 60 (1524) + (25.4 74 (1880) 64 (1626) 14/4 G18 88 (2235) 76 (1930) 44/2 (38.1 100 (2540) 87 (2210) 2 (608) 125 (3175) 110 (2794! Notes: oe (1) Above the metal temperature limits shown, maximum spans shall be reduced in direct portion to the fourth root of the ratio of elastic modulus at temperature to elastic modulus at tabulated limit temperature. 2) In the case of circumferentially finned tubes, the tube OD shall be the diameter at the root of the fins and the corresponding tabuated or interpolated span shal be euced in direct proportion to the fourth root of the ratio of the weight per unit length of the tube, if strippec Of fins to that of the actual finned tube. (3) The maximum unsupported tube spans in Table RCB-4.52 do not consider potential flow induced vibration problems. Refer to Section 6 for vibration criteria. RCB-4.53 BAFFLE SPACING Baffles normally shall be spaced uniformly, spanning the effective tube length. When this is ‘not possible, the baffles nearest the ends of the shell, and/or tubesheets, shall be located as Gloge a price! othe shell nozles. The remaining betes normally shal be spaced uniformly. RCB-4,54 U-TUBE REAR SUPPORT ‘The support plates or baffles adjacent to the bends in U-tube exchangers shall be so located that, for any individual bend, the sum of the bend diameter plus the straight lengths measure: along both legs from supports to bend tangents does not exceed the maximum unsupportec span determined from Paragraph RCB-4.52. Where bend diameters prevent compliance, special provisions in addition to the above shall be made for support of the bends. RCB-4.55 SPECIAL CASES When pulsating conditions are specified by the purchaser, unsupported spans shall be as short as pressure drop restrictions permit. if the span under these circumstances approache the maximum permitted by Paragraph RCB-4.52, consideration should be given to alternative flow arrangements which would permit shorter spans under the same pressure drop restrictions. RCB-4,56 TUBE BUNDLE VIBRATION ‘Shell side flow may produce excitation forces which result in destructive tube vibrations. Existing predictive correlations are inadequate to insure that any given design wil be free of such damage. The vulnerability of an exchanger to flow induced vibration depends on the flow rate, tube and bafle mates, unsupported tube spans, tube field layout, shell ameter and inlet/outlet configuration. Section 6 of these Standards contains information which is 34 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B SECTION 5 intended to alert the designer to potential vibration problems. In any case, and consistent with Paragraph G-5, the manufacturer is not responsible or liable for any direct, indirect, or consequential damiages resulting from vibration. RCB-4.6 IMPINGEMENT BAFFLES AND EROSION PROTECTION ‘The following paragraphs provide limitations to prevent or minimize erosion of tube bundle ‘components at the entrance and exit areas. These limitations have no correlation to tube vibration and the designer should refer to Section 6 for information regarding this phenomenon, RCB-4.61 SHELL SIDE IMPINGEMENT PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS ‘An impingement plate, or other means to protect the tube bundle against impinging fluids, shall be provided when entrance line values of p V”? exceed the following: non-abrasive, single phase fluids, 1500 (2232); all other liquids, including a liquid, at its boiling point, 500 (744). For all other gases and vapors, Including all nominally saturated vapors, and for liquid vapor, ‘moures, impingement protection is required. / is the linear velocity of the fluid in feet per second (meters per second) and p is its density in pounds per cubic foot (kilograms per cubic meter). A properly designed diffuser may be used to reduce line velocities at shell entrance. *RCB-4.62 SHELL OR BUNDLE ENTRANCE AND EXIT AREAS In no case shall the shell or bundle entrance or exit area produce a value of p V*in excess of 4,000 (6953) where I’ is the linear velocity of the fluid in fest per second (meters per second) and p Is its density in pounds per cubic foot (kilograms per cubic meter). *RCB-4.621 SHELL ENTRANCE OR EXIT AREA WITH IMPINGEMENT PLATE When an impingement plate is provided, the flow area shall be considered the Unrestricted area between the inside diameter of the shell at the nozzle and the face of the impingement plate. *RCB-4.622 SHELL ENTRANCE OR EXIT AREA WITHOUT IMPINGEMENT PLATE For determining the area available for flow at the entrance or exit of the shell where there is no impingement plate, the flow area between the tubes within the projection of the nozzle bore and the actuai unrestricted radial flow area from under the nozzle or dome measured between the tube bundle and shell inside diameter may be considered. *RCB-4,623 BUNDLE ENTRANCE OR EXIT AREA WITH IMPINGEMENT PLATE ‘When an impingement plate is provided under a nozzle, the flow area shall be the. Unrestricted area between the tubes within the compartments between baffles and /or ‘tubesheet. *RCB-4.624 BUNDLE ENTRANCE OR EXIT AREA WITHOUT IMPINGEMENT PLATE For determining the area available for flow at the entrance or exit of the tube bundle ‘where there is no impingement plate, the flow area between the tubes within the ‘compartments between baffles and/or tubesheet may be considered. RCB-4.63 TUBE SIDE Consideration shall be given to the need for special devices to prevent erosion of the tube ends under the following conditions: (1) Use of an axial inlet nozzle. : (2) Liquid p ’? is in excess of 6000 (8928), where I’ is the linear velocity in feet per second (meter per second), and pis its density in pounds per cubic foot (kilograms per cubic meter). RCB-4,7 TIE RODS AND SPACERS Tie rods and spacers, or other equivalent means of tying the baffle system together, shall be provided to retain all transverse baffles and tube support plates securely n position Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 35SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B R-4.71 NUMBER AND SIZE OF TIE RODS Table R-4.71 shows suggested tie rod count and diameter for various sizes of heat exchangers, Other combinations of tie rod number and diameter with equivalent metal area are permissible; however, no fewer than four tie rods, and no diameter less than 3/8" {@:S'mn) shal be Used. Any baffle sogment requires a minimum of ves polnts of suppor. TABLE R-4.71 TIE ROD STANDARDS Dimensions in Inches (mm) Nominal Tie Rod Minimum Shell Diameter Diameter | Number of Tie Rods 6-15 152-381 3/8 (95) 4 16-27 (406-686) 3/8 (95) 6 28-33 11-838) 4/2 (12. 6 34-48 (964-1219) 4/2 (12: 8 49-60 (1245-1524) 4/2 (12: 10 61-100 (1549-2540) 5/8 (153) 12 CB-4.71 NUMBER AND SIZE OF TIE RODS Table CB-4.71 shows suggested tie rod count and diameter for various sizes of heat exchangers. Other combinations of tie rod number and diameter with equivalent metal arez are permissible; however, no fewer than four'tie rods, and no diameter less than 3/8" (@.5 mm) shall be used above 15 inch (881) nominal shell diameter. Any baffle segment equires a minimum of three points of support. TABLE CB-4.71 TIE ROD STANDARDS Dimensions in Inches (mm) ‘Nominal Tie Rod Minimum Shell Diameter Diameter | Number of Tie Rods 6-15 152-381 wa 6a 4 16-27 (406-686) 3/8 (95) 6 28-33 11-838) 4/2 (121 6 34-48 1219) 1/2 (12: 8 49-60 (1245-1524) 4/2 (12: 40 61-100 __ (1549-2540 5/8 (15.9) 42 RCB-4.8 SEALING DEVICES In addition to the baffles, sealing devices should be installed when necessary to prevent excessive fiuid by-passing around or through the tube bundle. Sealing devices may be seal strips, tie rods w spacers, dummy tubes, or combinations of these. RCB-4.9 KETTLE TYPE REBOILERS For kettle type reboilers, skid bars and a bundle hold-down may be provided. One method is sho. in Figure RCB-4.9. Other methods which satisfy the intent are acceptable. Bundle hold-downs are not required for fixed tubesheet kettles. 36 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTIONS FIGURE RCB-4.9 CROSS-SECTION END VIEW OF TUBE BUNDLE AND SHELL Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 37SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B RCB-5 FLOATING END CONSTRUCTION RCB-5.1 INTERNAL FLOATING HEADS (Types S and T) -5.11 MINIMUM INSIDE DEPTH OF FLOATING HEAD COVERS For multipass floating head covers the inside depth shall be such that the minimum cross-over area for flow between successive tube passes is at least equal to 1.3 times the flo. area through the tubes of one pass. For single pass floating head covers the depth at nozz Centerline shall be a minimum of one-third the inside diameter of the nozzle. CB-5.11 MINIMUM INSIDE DEPTH OF FLOATING HEAD COVERS For multipass floating head covers the inside depth shall be such thatthe minimum cross-over area for flow between successive tube passes is at least equal to the flow area through the tubes of one pass. For single pass floating head covers the depth at nozzle Centerline shall be a minimum of one-third the inside diameter of the nozzle. RCB-5.12 POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT Fabricated floating head covers shall be postweld heat treated when required by the Code ¢ specified by the purchaser. RCB-5.13 INTERNAL BOLTING ‘The materials of construction for internal bolting for floating heads shall be suitable for the mechanical design and simlarn corrosion resistance o the materials used forthe shell interior. RCB-5.14 FLOATING HEAD BACKING DEVICES ‘The material of construction for split rings or other internal floating head backing devices sh bbe equivalent in corrosion resistance to the material used for the shell interior. RCB-5.141 BACKING DEVICE THICKNESS (TYPE S) The required thickness of floating head backing devices shall be determined by the following formulas or minimum thickness shown in Figure RCB-5.141, using whichev thickness is greatest. BENDING (W)CH)CY)]'? For Style (W)CH)C ay" [ (XS) ] ieee Metiic T =| “TOScsy | x10" sm 2c (HCY) ]? For Style “B, 2WICEYY) 2g vo[2eQeRe)" Feet aie 1 = [2OREOI] 10 me SHEAR “aE Mette = ex x 108 Mas inehes lettlo t= GZS.) _m where A= Ring OD, inches (mm) We peaay oor load (as ref. in Code Appendix ¢ B= Asshown in Fig. Y = From Code Fig, 2-7.1 using K = A/B RCB-5.141, inches (mm) C= Bolt circle, Inches (mm) = Tubesheet OD, inches (mm) H= (C-B)/2, inches (mm) L= Greater of Tor¢, inches (mm) 38 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association1"(25.4) MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R CB SECTION 5 S= Code allowable stressin S,, = Sof backing ring, psi (kPa) tension (using shell design S,, = Sof split key ring, psi (kPa) temperature), psi (kPa) Su, = Sof tubesheet, psi (kPa) S,= 0.85 . psi (kPa) NOTES 1. All references above are to ASME Code Section Vill, Division 1. 2. Caution: For styles "A, "B* & “D" check thickness in shear of the tubesheet it =~ | (ae FF |l tension, si Pa), for pater atm Mn tebeshset materi at or integaly finned tubes, |For integrally finned tubes, | desgn metal feOvermetbeinthe | the Oderinetubeintne | emperaure (Gee Ubesheet shalbe sed | _tuBesheet'shalbeuaed | _ Paragraph ACB-1.42) E c P Shel Side [Tube Side Preseure Preseure @ 10 asker oasket © Design pressure, pi (a), el side tbe sie el sid or tube ide, per graph ACB 132 Seenote1 | Seenote1 _| eoeted for vacuum when present on opposite side oF Eiterental pressure when Specten by customer © 125 Gaskets Gasket Design pressure, pl KPa), shel side tube sie Shel side or tue side, per Paragraph AGB. 132 see note1 | See note 1 | earrected tor vacuum when resent on opposite se Siteronsalpresoue when spectied by customer © ‘See Figure ROB.132 | Gasket & [Ghannel iO | Design pressure, psi kPa), [r= roo(ss)} [eel sise Shel ide or tube side, per pe ectoolie)) AGB. 132 conected or is See note 1 vaca when preset on opposite sie or iret! Note: F Max = 1.0 pressure when speciied by 3 F Min = 08 feetomer, o fxed tubesheet units, dined seagraphs Ros 1e3tu rosy ies SheiliDor port | Gasket G (ere Inside lamater [ID tte forketierype | tubesheet ype fexchangets uni) ee note 1 Shah er pon | Ghannel|O (eel Ifalde canoer |i ned forketie ype |tubeshest ype Sronenges [nid Table RB - 7.132 continued next page 48 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTION 5 TABLE RCB - 7.132 (Continued) F ¢ P Thel Sde [Tube Se Foe’ [Pressure ® ‘ee Fgue AGB7.192 [Gasket [Channel [Deion presur, pl WPa, slr" too(a)) | te sola, cube se rash RB. 12 See note 1 ‘Sorreted for vacuum when frecnt on oppoate sd, Note: Max = 1.28 Stores presur when Win = 100 Specited by customer. ShetiDorpon [Gaskets frae amet [tube sce ° ‘erie fexomanges” [See note 1 Sieh or par [Channel fae dente forketie ype xchenges 70 Design pressure, pl RP), Same Gas used for stasonary | selsie, or tube sie, por Tubesheet Farngraph noo 122 earsbea treats when recat on oppose le Sierendal pressure when species by cusomer 12 Same Gas eed for saionary | See Paragraph ROD-7.182 tubesheet, Aso check using gasket Got the toaing tubestest Seenctet 10 e-1aKcay Design pressure, psi Aa), 2 “Shortest pan measured over | shee, or tube aie, per ‘cto ines of gests Paragraph ROB 132 Eee vata wen cnt on opposite sda Be Stterental preseure when ‘pened by sutom rr Same Gas wed for saionary | Dengn pressure, pal Pa), tubesheot pe dsp pero Roe rseecorected for ‘eww when preset onthe Sella 10 ‘Same © as sed fr satonary — | Defined in Paragraph tubesheet reer Notes: 1. Gasket G =the diameter at the location of the gasket load reaction as defined in the Code. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 49SECTIONS MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B RCB-7.133 TUBESHEET FORMULA - SHEAR 921 (2) at 7 where T= Effective tubesheet thickness, Inches (mm) A Dae Eaualert diameter of the tube center limit perimeter, inches (mn) C= Perimeter of the tube layout measured stepwise in increments of one tube pitch from center-to-center of the outermost tubes, inches (mm). Figure RCB-7.133 shows the application to typical triangular and square tube patterns FIGURE RCB-7.133 XXX ee RAN ay XX 9 * C* (perimeter) is the length of the heavy ine A= Total area enclosed by perimeter C, square inches (mm 2) d.= Outside tube diameter, inches (mm), for integrally finned tubes, the OD of the tube in the tubeshest shall be used. Pitch = Tube center-to-center spacing, inches (mm) For outside packed floating head exchangers (Type P), P shall be as [defined in Paragraph RCB-7.141, psi (kPa). P= |For fixed tubesheet exchangers, P shall be as defined in Paragraphs RCB-7.163, RCB-7.164 or RCB-7.165. psi (kPa). For other type exchangers, P shall be the design pressure, psi (kPa), shell side of tube side, corrected for vacuum when present on the opposite side, or differential pressure when specified by the purchaser. S= Code allowable stress in tension, psi (kPa), for tubesheet material at design metal temperature. (See Paragraph RCB-1.42.) NOTE: Shear will not control when See Table RCB-7.133 for ilustration of the application of the above equations. 50 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B TABLE RCB-7.133 SECTION 5 ‘TUBESHEET THICKNESS FOR SHEAR Note: Must be calculated for shell ide or ‘ube side pressure, whichever fe ‘controling. 9 = Outside tube diameter, inches (mm). For intagcal inred tbe, the OD othe Eben te test eal be Pitch = Tube spacing, gotten, ches S =Code alowabie sess in tension psi kPa). For ‘Ebest matedal a design theta terparture (See puregrepn CB) P Di specified by customer @ Design pressure, psi (kPa), shell side or tube ‘side, corrected for vacuum when present on ‘opposite side, or dferential pressure when specified by customer e Design pressure, psi (kPa), shell side or tube side, corrected for vacuum when present on opposite side, or differential pressure when ry Design pressure, psi (kPa), shell side or tube side, corrected for vacuum when present on opposte side, or differential pressure when specified by customer, of for fixed tubesheet ype uns, as defined in paragraphs RCB-7.163 thru RCB-7.165 o(2) C= Perimeter of tube layout measured stpuase In Increments of one {beosube pith Canterto-oorter ofthe Fehon. Se0 Howe ROB-7.133 : A= ‘total area enclosed by C {a square inches (nm , See Figure ROB? 133 ‘TABLE RCB-7.133 Continued next page Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 51SECTION 5 TABLE RCB-7.133 Continued MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R CB P Design pressure, psi (kPa), shell side or tube side, cofrected for vacuurh when present on ‘opposite side, or differential pressure when specified by customer Design pressure, psi (kPa). Shell side or tube side, corrected for vacuum when present on oppostte side, or differential pressure when specified by customer ce Design pressure, pal (KPa), shel side or tubo side, for vacuum when present on opposite side, or differential pressure when specified by customer Design pressure, psi (kPa), tube side, corrected for vacuum when present on the sheli side Defined in Paragraph RCB-7.1412 poe) Perimeter of tube layout oasued stepaiee in increments ot one tubetosube pitch acter tocerr a the fRepor fm See gure aoe Sas total area enclosed by C in square inches (mm2) igure ACE.7.133 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTIONS RCB-7.134 TUBESHEET FORMULA - TUBESHEET FLANGED EXTENSION ‘This paragraph is applicable only when bolt loads are transmitted, at the bot ciclo, to the extended portion of a tubesheet. ‘The peripheral portion extended to form a flange for bolting to heads or shells with ring type gaskets may differ n thickness from that, portion inside the shel calculated in Paragraph RCB-7.132. The minimum thickness of the extended portion may be calculated from the following paragraphs. RCB-7.1341 FIXED TUBESHEET OR FLOATING TUBESHEET EXCHANGERS M_(r?-1+3.71r?_tn_r)]'? 0.98, Me 1+3.71r2_In_r) oe ef S (A-G)1+1.86 7?) | where T,= Minimum thickness of the extended portion, inthes (mm) A= Outside diameter of the tubesheet, inches (mm) A mG ‘M = the larger of M , or M, as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.162 Note: The moments may differ from the moments acting on the attached flange. Sand Gare defined in Paragraph RCB-7.132 RCB-7.1342 U-TUBE TUBESHEET EXCHANGERS Mt+M+0.39 PG? w]'? reo.so| | where T,= Minimum thickness of the extended portion, inches (mm) 288 wr PG*(1)°- MG-0.39wPG? Te . T = Effective tubesheet thickness calculated from Paragraph RCB-7.132, inches (mm) (A-6) ane Mte c M = the larger of M , or M, as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.162 Note: The moments may differ from the moments acting on the attached flange. F , Gand rare defined in Paragraph ROB-7.132 P= P,orP, or maximum differential pressure, as appl Note: See Paragraph RCB-7.13421 for procedure. le. Standards Of The Tubul: Exchanger Manufacturers Association 53SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B RCB-7.13421 ITERATIVE CALCULATION METHODS Method 1 (1) Calculate M* assuming T, = T. (2) Calculate P , then P from Paragraph RCB-7.132. (8) Calculate T from Paragraph RCB-7.132. (4) Calculate 7 , from Paragraph RCB-7.1342. (6) Compare T and T ,; it Tis greater than T , calculation is terminated. Use T , calculated. Do not proceed to Step (6). . (6) If7,, is greater than T, or ifit is desired to reduce T , below T, select a new ratio of T,,/T that is less than 1 and repeat Steps (1) through (5). (Note: T,/T ratio is calculated using actual corroded thickness of the part). Method 2 - (ALTERNATIVE METHOD) (1) Set M* = —M. (2) Calculate P then P from Paragraph RCB-7.132. (@) Calculate T from Paragraph RCB-7.192. (4) Calculate 7 , from Paragraph RCB-7.1342. (6) Recalculate M* = - Musing values of T and 7, obtained in Steps (3) and (4) and ‘as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.1342. (Note T,/T must be $ 1). (©) If| Af* | obtained in Step (6) is less than | M |from Step (1), calculation is terminated. Use T , calculated in Step (4). Do not proceed to Step (7). (7)If| M= | obtained from Step (6) is greater than | M |from Step (1), repeat Step (2) using M * calculated in Step (6). Then repeat Steps (3) through (6). (@)Ifast calculated | M* | is less than the previous | M* | used to calculate P 5, calculation is terminated. Use last calculated value of 7. (©) Iflast calculated | M* | is greater than the previous | M* | used to calculate P, tepeat Step (2) using last calolted ®, Then repeat ‘Steps (8) through (5) je this process until Step (8) is satisfied. 54 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B SECTION 5 RCB-7.14 PACKED FLOATING TUBESHEET TYPE EXCHANGERS EFFECTIVE PRESSURE RCB-7.141 OUTSIDE PACKED FLOATING HEAD (TYPE P) ‘The thickness of tubesheets in exchangers whose floating heads are packed at the outside diameter ofthe tubesheet ora cyindrical extension thereat sh Ake atatonarytubeshts veing the fornia for Sas defied below. > auoUated RCB-7.1411 EFFECTIVE DESIGN PRESSURE - BENDING ‘The effective design pressure to be used with the formula shown in Paragraph RCB-7.132 is given by: ae paper Pe Je-22] DF?G? where P.= Design pressure, psi (kPa), tube side (For vacuum design, P is negative.) P= Design pressure, pst (kPa), shell side (For vacuum design, P , is negative.) D = Outside diameter of the floating tubesheet, inches (mm) z D.~ 4) *4 Equivalent diameter ofthe tube center limit perimeter, inches (tam), using A as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.133 F and Gare as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.132 RCB-7.1412 EFFECTIVE DESIGN PRESSURE - SHEAR ‘The effective design pressure to be used with the formula shown in Paragraph RCB-7.133 is given by: D?-D.* P=P,+P,| —— on (P53) using terms as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.1411. RCB-7.142 PACKED FLOATING TUBESHEET WITH LANTERN RING (TYPE W) ‘The thickness of floating tubesheets in exchangers whose floating tubesheets are packed at the outside diameter with return bonnet or channel bolted to the shell flange, shall be calculated as for gasketed stationary tubesheet exchangers, using P defined as the tube side design pressure, psi (kPa), corrected for vacuum when. present on the shell side. Its incorrect to utilize the shell side pressure. RCB-7.15 DOUBLE TUBESHEETS Double tubesheets may be used where the operating conditions indicate thelr desirability. ‘The diversity of construction types makes it impractical to specify design rules for all cases. Paragraphs RCB-7.154, RCB-7.185 and RCB-7.156 provide the design rules for determining the thickness of double tubesheets for some of the most commonly used construction types. RCB-7.151 MINIMUM THICKNESS Neither component of a double tubesheet shall have a thickness less than that required by Paragraph RCB-7.131 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 55SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B RCB-7.152 VENTS AND DRAINS Double tubesheets of the edge welded type shall be provided with vent and drain connections at the high and low points of the enclosed space. : RCB.-7.153 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS. When double tubesheets are used, special attention shall be given to the ability of the tubes to withstand, without damage, the mechanical and thermal loads imposed on them by the construction, RCB-7.154 INTEGRAL DOUBLE TUBESHEETS ‘The tubesheets are connected in a manner which distributes axial load and radial thermal expansion loads between tubesheets by means of an interconnecting element capable of preventing individual radial growth of tubesheets. It is assumed that the element is rigid enough to mutually transfer all thetmal and mechanical radial loads between the tubeshests. Additionally, itis understood that the tubes are rigid enough ‘to mutually transfer all mechanical and thermal axial loads between the tubesheets. FIGURE RCB-7.154 RCB 7.1641 TUBESHEET THICKNESS Calculate the total combined tubesheet thickness (T) per Paragraph RCB-7.13. where Greater of the thickness, inches (mm), resulting from Paragraphs RCB-7.132 or RCB-7. 133 using the following variable definitions: Per Paragraph RCB-7.13, inches (mm), using worst case values of shell side or tube side tubesheets at their respective design temperature. Lower of the Code allowable stress, psi (kPa), for either component tubesheet at its respective design temperature. F = Per Paragraph RCB-7.13, using worst case values of shell side or tube side tubesheets at their respective design temperature. ‘All other variables are per Paragraph RCB-7.13. Establish the thickness of each individual tubesheet so that‘, + ¢, 2 T and the ‘minimum individual tubesheet thicknesses (t ,and ¢ 2) shall be the greater of Paragraphs RCB-7.13 ot RCB.7.134, as applicable. where t,= Thickness of tube side tubesheet, inches (mm). t,= Thickness of shell side tubesheet, inches (mm). 56 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B SECTION 5 RCB-7.1842 INTERCONNECTING ELEMENT DESIGN - SHEAR The radial shear stress (c), psi (KPa), at attachment due to differential thermal expansion of tubesheets shall not exceed 80% of the lower Code allowable stress (S) of elther of the tubesheet materials or the interconnecting element at their respective design temperature. The shear is defined as: FE t-<0.85 (Metric) t, = Thickness of interconnecting element, inches (mm). where (a AT ~ a2 AT 2) (tr Ei )(teE 2) (Ei) + CaF) (a, BT. ~a2AT2) (tr Es )Ut2E 2) GEV (aE) oS (Metric) F p= where F , = Force per unit measure due to differential radial expansion, Ibf/in (&N/mm), E, = Modulus of Elasticity of tubeshest 1 at mean metal temperature, psi (kPa). F,= Modulus of Elasticity of tubesheet 2 at mean metal temperature, psi (kPa). a, Coefficient of thermal expansion for tubesheet 1 at mean metal temperature, inches/inch/° F (mm/mm/ °C) a,~ Coefficient of thermal expansion for tubesheet 2 at mean metal ‘temperature, inches/inch/ °F (mm/mm/ °C) AT, = Difference in temperature from ambient conditions to mean metal temperature for tubesheet 1, °F (°C). AT, = Difference in temperature from ambient conditions to mean ‘metal temperature for tubesheet 2, °F (°C). RCB-7.1543 INTERCONNECTING ELEMENT DESIGN - BENDING AND TENSILE ‘The combined stresses from bending due to differential thermal expansion of tubesheets and axial tension due to thermal expansion of tubes shall not exceed 1.5 times the Code allowable stress (5) of the interconnecting element. ‘The combined total stress of interconnecting element (6 -), psi (kPa), is given by: 6 p= 094074 $1.58 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 57SECTION 5S MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B The stress due to axial thermal expansion of tubes (Cr) , psi (kPa), is defined as: Fre Ar Fre (Metric) oye= | Orem «10% ae _(@rAT r= be AT )(Er Ar) (Eee) (ErAr)+ (Er Ae) (arATr~aeATe)CErAr)(EeAe) 5 (ErAr)+ (Ee Ag) The stress due to bending caused by differential thermal expansion of tubesheets 6 p, psi (kPa), is defined as: 6Ms te? Fre (Metric) Fre= on 6Me. 6 (Metric) 95 = 3x 10 . ‘The bending moment is defined as: Fag Man Bending moment per unit measure acting on interconnecting element, Inch-pounds per inch (mm-kN/mm). Spacing between tubesheets, inches (mm). The spacing between tubesheets for an integral double tubesheet is left to the discretion of the manufacturer. For other types of double tubesheets, the minimum spacing Is determined in accordance with Paragraphs RCB-7.1552 or RCB-7.1562, as applicable. a, = Coefficient of thermal expansion of tubes at mean metal temperature, inches/inch/ °F (mm/mm/ °C). ., = Coefficient of thermal expansion of interconnecting element at mean metal temperature, inches/inch/ °F (mm/mm/ °C) ‘T= Difference in temperature from ambient conditions to mean metal temperature for tubes, °F (C). ‘ST, = Difference in temperature from ambient conditions to mean metal temperature for interconnecting element, °F (°C). E,, = Modulus of Elasticity of tubes at mean metal temperature, psi (kPa). F , = Modulus of Elasticity of interconnecting element at mean metal ‘temperature, psi (kPa). ‘Ay Tota gona sctonal area of tubes between tubesheets, square inches (nm). Ag Teel grose sectional are of interconnecting element, square inches (mi F y_* Resultant force due to the difference in thermal expansion between tubes and element, bf (kN). 58 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTION 5 RCB-7.1544 TUBE STRESS CONSIDERATION - AXIAL STRESS The axial stresses in the tubes due to thermal expansion and pressure load shall not exceed the Code allowable stress (S) of the tubes at design temperature. ‘The total combined stress of the tubes (¢;), psi (kPa), is given by: Op = op +077 SS ‘The axial stress due to pressure (6 ), psi (KPa), is defined as: _Pm(G?- Nd) : 4A; where = Greater of shell side or tube side design pressure, psi (kPa). G= Per Paragraph RCB-7.13, inches (mm). N= Number of tubes. d= Tube OD between tubesheets, inches (mm). ‘The stress due to axial thermal expansion of tubes (0 72), psi (kPa), is defined by: Frey io (etic) o77= 75x10 RCB-7.155 CONNECTED DOUBLE TUBESHEETS ‘The tubesheets are connected in a manner which distributes axial load between tubesheets by means of an interconnecting cylinder. The effect of the differential radial growth between tubeshests isa major factor in tube stresses and spacing between Tubesheets, tis assumed the iterconnecting cyinder and tubes are rigid enough to ‘mutually transfer all mechanical and thermal axial loads between the tubesheets. t2 | 9 bu FIGURE RCB-7.155 RCB-7.1551 TUBESHEET THICKNESS Calculate the total combined tubesheet thickness (7) per Paragraph RCB-7.13. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 59SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B where T= Greater ofthe thickness, inches (mm). resulting from Paragraphs RCB-7.132 of RCB-7.133 using variabies as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.1541 Establish the thickness of each individual tubesheet so that ¢2 + ¢, 2 T and the minimum individual tubesheet thickness (¢ , and t 2) shall be the greater of Paragraph RCB-7.13 or RCB-7.134, when applicable. where t, = Thickness of tube side tubesheet, inches (mm). t,= Thickness of shell side tubesheet, inches (mm). RCB-7.1552 MINIMUM SPACING BETWEEN TUBESHEETS. ‘The minimum spacing (g). inches (mm), between tubesheets required to avoid overstress of tubes resulting from differential thermal growth of individual tubesheets is given by: where d., = Tube OD between tubesheets, inches (mm). Y y= Yield srengh othe tube materi st maximum met temperature, ps Pa) ‘Ar = Differential radial expansion between adjacent tubesheets, inches (mm). (Measured from center of tubesheet to D r_ ). (B\ceare- a,AT,)I 2 where Dye = Outer tube limit, inches (mm). RCB-7.1553 INTERCONNECTING ELEMENT DESIGN - AXIAL STRESS The interconnecting element axial stress (6-r2). psi (KPa), due to the thermal expansion of the tubes shall not exceed the Code allowable stress (S) of the interconnecting element at design temperature. The axial stress is defined as: Fre Sta eas Freyigs (Metric) ore= ex 10 wore ide (ErAr)* (Erde) tAT~aghTe)(ErAr)(Ee Ae), 9-6 etic) Pye QPP ea eeOTeMErAY EAD, 9 (ErAr)*(EeAe) 60 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B SECTION 5 RCB-7.1554 TUBE STRESS CONSIDERATIONS - AXIAL STRESS The axial stresses in the tubes due to thermal expansion and pressure load shall not exceed the Code allowable stress (S) of the tubes at design temperature. ‘The total combined stress of tubes (0), psi (KPa), is given by: Op=Op+ O77 SS ‘The axial stress due to pressure (6 »), psi (KPa), is defined as: _P(G?-Nd,?) + 4Ay o where P = Greater of shell side or tube side design pressure, psi (kPa). G = Per Paragraph RCB-7.13, inches (mm). N= Number of tubes. d, = Tube OD between tubesheets, inches (mm). ‘The stress due to axial thermal expansion of tubes (o'r), psi (kPa), is determined by: Frey sot Metric) Grr = ZX 10 RCB-7.156 SEPARATE DOUBLE TUBESHEETS ‘The tubesheets are connected only by the interconnecting tubes. The effect of differential radial growth between tubesheets is a major factor in tube stresses and ‘spacing between tubesheets. Itis assumed that no loads are transferred between the tubesheets. FIGURE RCB-7.156 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 61SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B RCB-7.1561 TUBESHEET THICKNESS Calculate tube side tubesheet thickness per Paragraph RCB-7.13. Use all variables as defined per TEMA, neglecting all considerations of shell side design conditions. Calculate shell side tubesheet thickness per Paragraph RCB-7.13. Use all variables as defined per TEMA, neglecting all considerations of tube side design conditions. RCB-7.1562 MINIMUM SPACING BETWEEN TUBESHEETS. The minimum spacing (g), inches (mm), between tubeshests required to avoid overstress of tubes resulting from differential thermal growth of individual tubesheets is given by: 9° 0.2777 RCB-7.16 FIXED TUBESHEET EFFECTIVE PRESSURE This paragraph shall apply to exchangers having tubesheets fixed to both ends of the shell, with or without a shell expansion Joint except as required or permitted by Paragraph RCB-7.3, Both tubesheets of fixed tubesheet exchangers shall have the same thickness, unless the provisions of Paragraph RCB-7.166 are satisfied, For fixed tubesheet exchangers, the mutually interdependent loads exerted on the ubesheets, tubes, and shel are defined in terms of equivalent and effective design pressures in Paragraphs RCB-7. 161 through RCB-7.165 for use in Paragraphs RCB-7.132 and RCB-7.133. These pressures shall also be used (with J = 1) in Paragraphs RCB-7.22, RCB-7.23 and RCB-7.25 to assess the need for an expansion joint. The designer shall gensider the most adverse operating conditions specified by the purchaser. (See Paragraph 3.2) RCB-7.161 EQUIVALENT DIFFERENTIAL EXPANSION PRESSURE ‘The pressure due to differential thermal expansion, psi (kPa), is given by: are. t (#) “(Di=3t) (+ IKF,) Note: Algebraic sign must be retained for use in Paragraphs RCB-7. 163 through RCB-7.166, RCB-7.22 and RCB-7.23, where Pa J= 1.0 for shells without expansion joints Suk S/L+mD, F; for shells with expansion joints. See Note (1) S,= Spring rate of the expansion joint, Ibs /inch (kN/mm) Ey ty (De~ts) Tore 300 te E./G)*]'* F,=0.25+(F-0, 6)[ 222 1 #-(8) ] (Use the calculated value of F , oF 1.0, whichever is greater.) Fand Gare as defined in Paragraph RCB-7.132. ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B SECTIONS T = Tubesheet thickness used, but not less than 98.5% of the greater of the values defined by Paragraph RCB-7. 192 or RCB-7.133. (The value assumed in evalu- ating F . must match the final computed value within a tolerance of = 1.5%) See Note (2). L= Tube length between inner tubesheet faces, inches (mm). AL = Differential thermal growth (shell -tubes), inches (mm) (See Section 7, Paragraph 7-45). 1, = Tube length between outer tubesheet faces, inches (mm). ,= Elastic modulus of the shell material at mean metal temperature, psi (kPa). (See Paragraph RCB-1.431). See Note (9). E, = Elastic modulus of the tube material at mean metal temperature, psi (kPa). (See Paragraph RCB-1.432). E = Elastic modulus of the tubesheet material at mean metal temperature, psi (kPa). (See Paragraph RCB-1.432). Number of tubes in the shell. Outside diameter of the shell or port for kettle type exchangers, inches (mm). Outside diameter of the tubes (for integrally finned tubes, cis root diameter of fin), inches (mm). t,= Tube wall thickness (for integrally finned tubes, tis wall thickness under fin), Inches (mm). t, = Shell wall thickness, inches (mr). Notes: (1) J'can be assumed equal to zero for shells with expansion joints where 5 |: |: | tee Bs [1270[ 133 | 317| 18 | e754] 2046 [aio] 2106 | 2007 | 1008 [ize [ters] | | tee 1340] 142 | 326] 18 5:7a6 |8:023| 20s | 2704 | 200 | 287 | 2302 |2.is0| 1920 | 1505 27 }saa| 125] 218 | 18 [12958] 2026 [225i] 2159 [2085 | 2007 | 1990] 1753| 1600] - | see Weer] 131 | 39r| 18 S716 |30s8| 2072 | 2870 | 2700 | 2718 | 248s | 2585 | 2295 | 1805 irae] 137 | 276| 18 506 |3835| 8709 | S683 | Sor | 5.505 | 5.363 | 5200| S003 | 2286 752 |ieeal 125 ]so8 | 15 |16%29) 2711 [20x] 2700 | 2652 | 216 | 2565 | 2408 | 2am | 2180 | 1.905 3564] 130 | 476 | 14 4511 |3e0r| S66 | S480 | 3428 | 3353 | Szas | See | Zara | 2288 z2s| sao | 635| 14 801 [5207 8.131 | soso | 800s | 4953 | 4201 | 4era| asa7 | S00 7a |2aei| 125] 476| 13 [19304] 4506 |aes2] ser] asx [3420 | 3420 | ss02 | 3.200| s00| 2.206 sao] 133) os6 | 12 Sibu |5.202| S182 | 8105 | 05s | S08 | 402 | 4801 | ars | Soma s00| 12 | Foe | 2 788 |880r| 6758 | 6705 | 8855 | Sans | 6.77 | esrs| e2ra] S10 z.sa| 150 | o83| 12 8.276 |840r| 8357 | 8.260 | 8.250 | &.170 | Borr | 7a76| rave | 4.600 wa fara] 125 [sss] 12 [eaara] sa0r [esas] aoe | 424s | 4318] 4207 | 4168] 4064] acne | 2.67 2058) 130 | 635] 12 Bir |5:202| S207 | S160 | 8.105 | 8085 | 4053 | 4877 | 4775 | S008 $016] 136 |733| 10 Fes |8.35| 6722 | 6731 | 68e0 | sess | oses |ease| ears | 3.310 Sirs| 13 | os2| 10 271 [84or| 8.382 | 8.331 | 8.200 | 8.250 | Btzs | Bose | 7950 | 4.600 Bs [3175] 125 | 635] 10 [25708] 6045 |5207) 5.156 [5.191 | soso | 5.028 | 405s | a7 | aor] 3.048 338] 131 | 732] 8 7828 | 8 re2| s7a8 | 6703 | 8480 | 6020 | 68s | carr | ears | 3810 ses5| 133 |953| 8 328 [8.502 | 8301 | 6.00 | 8.2ss | 8.208 | 8.128 | Bose | 7878 ais [2060] 125] 794 | 0 |=2105] 7.586 [6.766] 6751 | es00 | ess | 6679 | 683 | es02|6425| 3610 32.1 [47s] 125 [953 | 6 _|sass7| e073 [8.255] 2.290 | e204 | 6.179 [6.159 | err | aces | 7976 | 4572 308 [es.s0| 1.25 [1270] 6 [51.80] 12141] - [11-320] 11.903] 11.276] 1.252[ 1.207] 11.176| 19.125] 6.350 Notes; Tho above fable of minimum sender iganeniss based of parent lance not xeeedog te an of te thee tit tolerance plus 0.51mm for tubes less than 15.9mm OD and O.7emm for tube holes 1 Smm OD anc large. Dl drift tolerance = 0.041 (thickness of tubesheet in tube diameters), mm. RCB-7.512 CONTOUR OF THE EXPANDED TUBE ‘The expanding procedure shall be such as to provide substantially uniform expansion throughout the expanded portion of the tube, without a sharp transition to the unexpanded portion. RB-7.513 TUBE PROJECTION ‘Tubes shall be fiush with or extend by no more than one half of a tube diameter beyond the face of each tubesheet, except that tubes shall be flush with the top tubesheet in vertical exchangers to facilitate drainage unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. RCB-7.52 WELDED TUBE-TO-TUBESHEET JOINTS When both tubes and tubesheets, or tubesheet facing, are of suitable materials, the tube joints may be welded. RCB-7.521 SEAL WELDED JOINTS When welded tube joints are used for addtional leak tightness only. and tube leads are carried by the expanded joint, the tube joints shall be subject to the rules of Paragraphs RCB-7.4 through RCB-7.51. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 73SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B RCB-7.522 STRENGTH WELDED JOINTS When welded tube joints are used to carry the longitudinal tube loads, consideration may be given to modification ofthe requirements of Paragraphs RCB-7.4 through RCB-7.51., Minimum tubesheet thicknesses shown in Paragraphs R-7,131, C-7.131 and B-7.131 do not apply. RCB-7.523 FABRICATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES Welding procedures and testing techniques for either seal welded or strength welded tube joints shall be by agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser. RCB-7.53 EXPLOSIVE BONDED TUBE-TO-TUBESHEET JOINTS Explosive bonding and/or explosive expanding may be used to attach tubes to the tubesheets where appropriate. Consideration should be given to modifying the relevant parameters (e.g., tube-to-tubesheet hole clearances and ligament widths) to obtain an effective joint. R-7.6 TUBESHEET PASS PARTITION GROOVES: Tubeshests shall be provided with approximately 8/16" (8 mm) deep grooves fr pass parition gaskets. CB-7.6 TUBESHEET PASS PARTITION GROOVES For design pressures over 300 psi (2068 kPa), tubesheets shall be provided with pass partition grooves approximately 3/16" (4.8 mm) deep, or other sutable means for retaining the gaskets in place. RCB-7.7 TUBESHEET PULLING EYES tn exchangers with removable tube bundles having a nominal diameter exceeding 12" (305 mm) ‘and/or a tube length exceeding 96" (2438 mm), the stationary tubesheet shall be provided with two tapped holes in its face for pulling eyes. These holes shall be protected in service by plugs of ‘compatible material. Provision for means of pulling may have to be modified or waived for special construction, such as clad tubesheets or manufacturer's standard, by agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser. RB-7.8 CLAD AND FACED TUBESHEETS The nominal cladding thickness at the tube side face of a tubesheet shall not be less than 5/16" (7.8 mm) when tubes are expanded only, and 1/8" (3.2 mm) when tubes are welded fo the tubesheet. The nominal cladding thickness on the shell side face shall not be less than 3/8" (9.5 mm). Clad surfaces, other than in the area into which tubes are expanded, shall have at least 1/8" (8.2. mm) nominal thickness of cladding, C-7.8 CLAD AND FACED TUBESHEETS ‘The nominal cladding thickness at the tube side face of a tubesheet shall not be less than 3/16" (4.8 mm) when tubes are expanded only, and 1/8" (3.2 mm) when tubes are welded to the tubesheet. The nominal cladding thickness on the shell side face shall not be less than 3/8" (9.5 mm). Clad surfaces, other than in the area into which tubes are expanded, shail have at least 1/8" 8.2 mm) nominal thickness of cladding. 74 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTION 5 RCB-8 FLEXIBLE SHELL ELEMENTS This paragraph shall apply to fixed tubesheet exchangers which require flexible elements to reduce shell and tube longitudinal stresses and/or tube-to-tubesheet joint loads. Light gauge bellows type expansion sein fe scone of ihe SianierGe of he Expansion loin Narufasuutrs kesocition (eaMA) are not included within the purview of this paragraph. The analysis contained within these paragraphs is based Upon the equivalent geometry used in "Expansion Joints for Heat Exchangers" by S. Kopp and M. F. Sayer: Abwever, tie formulde have Deen derived based upon the use of plate and shel theory modffied to account for the stiffness of the knuckle radii, when used. Flanged-only and flanged-and-flued types of expansion joints are examples of flexible shell element combinations. The designer shall consider the most adverse Operating condhions spectfied by the purchaser. (See Paragraph E-3.2.) RCB-8.1 APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS AND LIMITATIONS ‘The formulae contained in the following paragraphs are applicable based upon the following assumptions: Applied loadings are axial Torsional loads are negligible. The flexible elements are suliciently thick to avoid instability. The flexible elements are axisymmetric. ‘All dimensions are in inches (mm) and all forces are in pounds (KN). Poisson's ratio is 0.3, RCB-8.11 CALCULATION SEQUENCE ‘The sequence of calculation shall be as follows: (1) Select a geometry for the flexible element per Paragraph RCB-8.21, (2) Determine the effective geometry constants per Paragraph RCB-8.22. (@) Calculate the element flexibiity factors per Paragraph RCB-8.3. (4) Calculate the element geometry factors per Paragraph RCB-8.4. (6) Calculate the stifiness multiplier per Paragraph RCB-8.5 (© Calculate the equivalent flexible element stiffness per Paragraph ROB-86. (7) Calculate the induced axial force per Paragraph RCB-8.7 for each condition as shown in Table RCB-8.7. (8) Calculate the flexible element moments and stresses per Paragraph RCB-8.8. (®) Compare the flexible element stresses to the appropriate allowable stresses per the Code, for the load conditions as noted in step 7. (10) Repeat steps 1 through 9 as necessary. RCB-8.12 CORROSION ALLOWANCE The shell flexible elements shall be analyzed in both the corroded and uncorroded conditions. RCB-8.13 HYDROSTATIC TEST CONDITIONS ‘The shell flexible elements shall be evaluated for the hydros RCB-8,2 GEOMETRY DEFINITION ‘The geometry may be made up of any combination of cylinders and annular plates with or without knuckle radi at their junctions. RCB-8.21 PHYSICAL GEOMETRY CONSTANTS Figure RCB-8.21 defines the nomenclature used in the following paragraphs based upon ‘nominal dimensions of the flexible elements. ic test conditions. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 75SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B FIGURE RCB-8.21 . a) ©) ® where 44 and /,are the lengths of the cylinders welded to single flexible shell elements. When two fiexible shell elements are joined with a cylinder, the applicable cylinder length, 2, or 1, used for calculation with the FSE shall be half the actual cylinder length. The applicable cylinder length, 2, and J, shall be 0 when a cylinder is not attached, NOTE: All dimensions shown in Figure RCB-8.21 are in inches (mm). RCB-8.22 EFFECTIVE GEOMETRY CONSTANTS Figure RCB-8.22 defines the nomenclature used in the following paragraphs based upon the ‘equivalent flexible element model. FIGURE RCB-8.22 eee +r 76 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B SECTION 5 where |* «the flexible element has a knuckle radius at the inside junction, inches (mm) Ifthe flexible element does not have a knuckle radius at th thohes (rim /e a knuckle radius at the inside junction, |¢ ifthe flexible element has a knuckle radius at the outside junction, inches (mm) of the flexible element does not have a knuckle radius at the outside junction, inches (mm) Crt. «inches (mm) » inches (mm) «Inches (mm) » inches (mm) + inches (mm) rae ret0.Ste » inches (mm) ryt ryt0.Ste «Inches (mm) K = Stiffener multiplier (See Paragraph RCB 8.5) Yer lath s inches (mm) Note: Cylindrical sections beyond th Ya 2Vat, , need only meet the Code tequirements for cylinders. Yor let le , inches (mm) Note: Cylindrical sections beyond the limit, Y¥» = 2\'bt,, need only meet the Code requirements for cylinders. G,OD,tesra:Torfarfes ti and L, are indicated in Figure RCB-8.21 RCB-8.3 ELEMENT FLEXIBILITY FACTORS. ‘The effective flexibility factors are given by: 1.285 _radians/inch (radians/mm) Eancwore radians/inch (radians/mm) D,.~0.0916£ ata ®, inch-pounds Metric, Dq=0.0916E ote *x 107%, mm-KN Dy=0.0916E oty ®, inch-pounds Metric, Dy=0.0916E yt, °x 107%, mm-kN Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 7SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B D,=0.0916£ ete *, inch-pounds Metric, Dp =0.0916E ete *x10°%, mmkN De=Bava for the inner cylinder, radians 2,=Byy» forthe outer cylinder, radians j,=sinQsinha Jja=cosQcoshO eae These values must be « k.= sinh + sing calculated for 0, at the cosh + cos inner cylinder as well as his cneaen ars | ,at the outer cylinder. sinhQ-sing ke, Sangre cosh 2- cos kr, - See Modulus of elasticity of the inner cylinder, psi (kPa) Modulus of elasticity-of the outer cylinder, psi (kPa) ‘Modulus of elasticity of the flexible shell element, psi (kPa) = [Eeifthe flexible element has a knuckle radius atthe inside junction, psi (kPa) on le, ae element does not have a knuckle radius at the inside junction, pal (kPa| E; ifthe flexible element has a knuckle radius at the outside junction, psi (KPa) E «ifthe flexible element does not have a knuckle radius at the outside junction, ppsi (kPa) 2b, tar te tery eand y» are defined in Paragraph RCB-8.22. RCB-8.31 CYLINDER-TO-CYLINDER FLEXIBILITY FACTORS The cylinder-to-cylinder flexibility factors, ¢ ,and e, are given by the following: Note: at the inside junction atthe outside junction _Ifthere is no outer cylinder ene ene en] Calculate C,,Cs,Ce.Crand Ce with the appropriate values of C,, C2 and Cs for the inside and ‘outside junction. 78 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTION 5 when Cis less than 1.0 0.338172 _0.0366351 Ce Ce? 1.01164 _ 0.122627 iz Ce? C4*-0.364661+ C= 1.06871 + C4= 0.0696709 + 1.76415C,~5.46103C, * C= -0.142734 + 0.918656C,~2.00749C, ° when Cis greater than or equal to 1.0 3.97310 ~ 1.707962C2 + 0.226216C2? 1000 C," 0.403287 + 0.320037 C, - 0.0307508C, * C4 = 0.684978 + 0.582549C, - 0.0547812C, * 0.201334 + 0.168201, -0.0157280C, e= 2.718" Notes: (1) When C is less than 0:4, C shall be set equal to 0.4 (2) When C; and Care both equal to 1.0, e shall be set equal to 1.0. RCB-8.4 ELEMENT GEOMETRY FACTORS Calculations for the stiffness and stresses are dependent upon the flexible element geometry factors given by: ka (ts - ) Note: kvalues are evaluated using ©, for the inner cylinder. Y'" DB. 2 2) Note: kvalues are evaluated using © , for the outer cylinder. gee a ~ac(0,769+ 1.428d*) x, EEO TERS NAB De -2:2acd* x2" De Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 79SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B 7 a7L1.538 + In(d)(2+6(2+3.714d2))] * 4De vpn 22.2bE oF bc(0.769d? + 1.428) De xe, = 22PUS38 + 5,7 14e1n(a)) ce 4D, X= (x1 YM X st 2) XaX6 _XaXerXaxs7 aye x; 3 XakaT XiXet Xe xer a gq: = 0.385a?+1.429cb7In(d) 2 (-0.385~ 1.429cIn(d))b* 1.269 cd? as~0.28a0%{ +3. 7iaecincay)*} a gt- 25 ing) @ i m,=0.51-0.6359?+g* mz" 0.635(1-9*)+g* m= 2.357g97+3.7149* where and b are defined in Paragraph RCB-8.22 andB,.B,.De,Dy.Derear@y ky kKeandks are defined in Paragraph RCB-8.3. 80 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTION 5 RCB-8.5 STIFFNESS MULTIPLIER Ya Ye Ta 7 Compute the ratios ss te RCB-8.51 Ify./G20.075,y.~1. If¥e/G<0.075, calculate y, per the formula given below. Ity4/G 20.075, y,= 1. Ify,/G < 0.075, calculate y ,per the formula given below. Y¥, = 0.961 -11,293(y,/G)* 450.903(y ./G)? - 5647(¥./G)*? + 231 40(y,/G)* RCB-8.52 If both .and r, are present, Fig. RCB-8.21 (a) andr, = rp, determine value of m from Figure RCB-8.51 and calculate the term, « , according to the following equations: ce For= < 160,«=4.30(G/te) 7 . ¢ For2 160, «=2.92(G/t,) 0 a ‘The final stiffness multiplier is represented by the product, K = =m. Ve. RCB-8.53 If both r .and r, are present, Fig. RCB-8.21 (a), but not equal, determine rr.,, from Fig RCB-8.52 using r”,, m from Fig. RCB-8.51 using r”, , and m2 from Figure RCB-8.52 using rq. Calculate = as shown in Paragraph RCB-8.52 above. ‘The final stiiness multiplier is represented by the product, emmerVaYe Me RCB-8.54 Ifonlyr, Is present, Fig. RCB-8.21 (b) , determine m from Figure RCB-8.52 and calculate the term, A , according to the following equations: ce For <160,A=2.13(G/te) t e For 2 160,A=1.86(G/te) E ‘The final stifness multiplier is represented by the product, K= AmYeY» RCB-8.85 If only r ais present, Fig. RCB-8.21 (c) determine m from Figure RCB-8.51 using“, and calculate « , rom Paragraph ROB-8.52. Determine m .from Figure RCB-8.62 using“, = 1“. and calculate, 4 , from Paragraph ROB-€.54. ‘The final stiffness multiplier is represented by the product, eM MoVaYo ante ly t= tofor(ye-x)> le t=smaller oft,or t, for(ya-x) = ly smaller of t, or t, for Orr x) le E-E, E-E, M=M, M=M, (2 \a( baaas ee Fin F(2)-(S ene, ene, D=D, D=D, B-B 8-8, y-%e yn Note (1) Semp * Sm Calculated for the shell side pressure only condition. (2) Sema ™ Sm calculated for the differential expansion only or tube side pressure only condition. (8) S emps = Sim Caloulated for the combined pressure and differential expansion ‘condition. (4) The maximum value of S ,, will be located where x = ¥ 40° x = Lafor the inner cylinder and where x = ys oF x = 1, for the outer cylinder. RCB-8.84 MAXIMUM CYLINDER STRESS FOR CYCLE LIFE CALCULATIONS The maximum stress, psi (KPa), for a particular set of conditions, for use in the evaluation of cycle life is given by: eM | ee fo t | where F 2 is defined in Paragraph RCB-8.83 and : For the inner junction M=My t=the smaller oft: oF ta For the outer junction M=M, he smaller of zor ty Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 87SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B Note: (1) A postive value of M establishes a compressive stress in the outer fiber of the cylinder under consideration. (2) S.:is a possible outer limit for establishing a stress range. (9) S.forthe cylindrical element is equal to S-., RCB-8.9 ALLOWABLE STRESSES ‘The allowable flexible element stresses shall be as defined by the Code, using an appropriate stress, concentration factor for the geometry under consideration. RCB-8.10 MINIMUM THICKNESS: ‘The minimum thickness of flexible shell elements shall be as determined by the rules of Paragraphs FCB-8.1 through RCB-8.9. However, in no case shall te thickness in the uncorroded condition be fess than 1/8" (3.2 mm) for nominal diameters 18" (457 mm) and smaller, 3/16" (4.8 mm) for nominal lamers 18 (488 ‘mim) through 30" (762 mm), or 1/4" (6.4 mm) for nominal diameters greater than 30" (762 mm RCB-9 CHANNELS, COVERS, AND BONNETS: RCB-9.1 CHANNELS AND BONNETS: R-9.11 MINIMUM THICKNESS OF CHANNELS AND BONNETS ‘Channel and bonnet thickness is determined by the Code design formulae, plus corrosion allowance, but in no case shall the nominal thickness of channels and bonnets be less than the minimum shell thicknesses shown in Table R-3.13. The nominal total thickness for clad channels and bonnets shall bbe the same as for carbon steel channels. CB-9.11 MINIMUM THICKNESS OF CHANNELS AND BONNETS ‘Channel and bonnet thickness Is determined by the Code design formulae, plus corrosion allowance put inno case shall the nominal thickness of channels and bonnets be less than the minimum shell thicknesses shown in Table CB-3.13, The nominal total thickness for clad channels and bonnets shall be the same as for carbon steel channels. RCB-9.12 MINIMUM INSIDE DEPTH For multipass channels and bonnets the inside depth shall be such that the minimum cross-over are: for flow between successive tube passes Is at least equal to 1.3 times the flow area through the tube: ‘of one pass. When an axial nozzle is used, the depth at the nozzle centerline shall be a minimum of ‘one-third the inside diameter of the nozzle. RCB-9.13 PASS PARTITION PLATES RCB-9.131 MINIMUM THICKNESS The thickness of pass partitions shall not be less than the greater of that shown in Table RCB-9.131 or calculated in Paragraph RCB-9.132. Pass partition plates may be tapered to gasket width at the contact surface. TABLE RCB-9.131 NOMINAL PASS PARTITION PLATE THICKNESS Dimensions are in Inches (mm) Nominal Size Carbon Stee! ‘Alloy Material Less than 24 3/8 1/4 (610) @5) (6.4) 24 10 60 4/2 3/8 (610-1824) (12.7) @5) 61 to 100 5/8 4/2 (1549-2540) (59) (by 88 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTION 5 RCB-9.132 PASS PARTITION PLATE FORMULA Minimum pass partition plate thickness, inches (mm) B= Table value (inear interpolation may be used) @=_ Pressure drop across plate, psi (kPa) Code allowable stress in tension, at design metal temperature, psi (kPa) Plate dimension. See Table RCB-9.132, inches (mm) TABLE RCB-9.132 PASS PARTITION DIMENSION FACTORS. Ted Te Three sides fixed Long sides fixed Short sides fixed ‘One side simply supported Short sides simply Long sides simply supported supported, arb B a/b B a/b B 0.25 020 1.0 0.4182 10 o.4ig2 0.50 081 12 0.4626 12 0.5208 0.75 173 14 0.4860 14 0.5988 1.0 307 16 0.4968 16 0.6540 15 539 18 0.4971 18 0.6912 20 657 2.0 0.4973 20 0.7146 3.0 718 = 05000 ° 0.7500 RCB-9.133 PASS PARTITION WELD SIZE ‘The pass partition plate shall be attached with filet welds on each side with a minimum leg of 3/42 from Paragraph RCB-9. 132. Other types of attachments are allowed but shall be of equivalent strength. RCB-9.134 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS ‘Special consideration must be given to reinforcement or thickness requirements for internal partitions subjected to pulsating fluids, extreme differential pressures and/or temperatures, undue restraints or detrimental deflections under specified operating conditions or unusual start-up or maintenance conditions specified by the purchaser. Consideration may also be given to special design configurations and/or methods of analysis which may justify reduction of pass partition plate thickness requirements. iso, consideration should be given to potential bypass of tubeside fluid where the pass partition might pull away from the gasket due to deflection. RCB-9.14 POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT Fabricated channels and bonnets shell be postweld heat treated when required by the Code or specified by the purchaser. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 89SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B RCB-9.2 FLAT.CHANNEL COVER *RCB-9.21 FLAT CHANNEL COVER DEFLECTION - MULTIPASS UNITS The effective thickness of a fiat channel cover shall be the thickness at the bottom of the pass barton ardove (or he face thers ne groove) mus carosionalonancein excess of Groove de 128s is to be at least that required by the appropriate Code formula * nd thicker if required to meet proper deflection crtana, "> “PproPrate Code formula ‘The recommended limit for channel cover deflection is: 0.03" (0.8 mm) for nominal diameters thru 24" (610 mm) 0.125% of nominal diameter (nominal diameter /800) for larger sizes ‘A method for calculation of channel cover deflection is: G a : ¥ = Fj(0.04386°P + 0.55 ,A phy) where Y= Channel cover deflection at the center, inches (mm) G= Gasket load reaction diameter as defined by the Code, inches (mm) E= Modulus of elasticity at design temperature, psi (kPa) T= Thickness under consideration, inches (mm) = Design pressure, psi (kPa) Sa Allowable bolting stress at design temperature, psi (kPa) A= Actual total cross-sectional root area of bolts, square inches (mm2) hg = Radial distance from diameter G to bolt circle, inches (mm) Ifthe calculated deflection is greater than the recommended limit, the deflection may be reduced by acceptable methods such as: Increase channel cover thickness by the Cube root of the ratio of calculated deflection to the recommended limit. Use of strong backs. Change type of construction. Note: For single pass channels, or others in which there fs no pass partion gasket seal against the channel cover, no deflection criteria need be consider R-9.22 CHANNEL COVER PASS PARTITION GROOVES Channel covers shall be provided with approximately 3/16" (4.8 mm) deep grooves for pass partitions. In clad or applied facings, all surfaces exposed to the fluid, including gasket seating surfaces, shall have at least 4 /8" (8.2 mm) nominal thickness of cladding. ©B-9.22 CHANNEL COVER PASS PARTITION GROOVES For design pressures over 300 psi (2068 kPa), channel covers shall be provided with ‘approximately 3/16" (4.8 mm) deep grooves for pass partitions, or other suitable means for holding the gasket in place. In dad or applied facings. ll surfaces exposed fou, includ gasket seating surfaces, shall have at least 1/8" (8.2mm) nominal thickness of cladding, 90 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B SECTION 5 RCB-10 NOZZLES RCB-10.1 NOZZLE CONSTRUCTION Nozzle construction shall be in accordance with Code requirements. Shell nozzles shall not protrude beyond the inside contour of the shell f they interfere with bundle insertion or removal. Shell or channel nozzles which protrude beyond the inside Confour ofthe main eine wall must be att venting oF draining by notching at their intersection with the high or low point of the cylinder. If Separate vent and drain connections are used, they shall be flush with the inside contour of the shel or channel wal, Flange dimensions and facing shall comply with ASME B16,5. Bott holes shal sural natural center ines. Flanges outside the scope of ASME B16.5 shall be In accordance wth fe. RCB-10.2 NOZZLE INSTALLATION Radial nozzles shall be considered as standard. Other types of ngzzles may be used, by agreement between manufacturer and purchaser. 7 R-10.3 PIPE TAP CONNECTIONS Al pipe tap connections shall be a minimum of 6000 psi standard couplings or equivalent. Each ‘connection shall be fitted with a round head bar stock plug conforming to ASME B16.11 of the same material as the connection. Alternate plug materials may be used when galling is anticipated, except cast iron plugs shall not be used. C-10.3 PIPE TAP CONNECTIONS All pipe tap connections shall be a minimum of 3000 psi standard couplings or equivalent. B-10.3 PIPE TAP CONNECTIONS ‘Al pipe tap connections shall be a minimum of 3000 psi standard couplings or equivalent, Each connection shall be fitted with a bar stock plug of the same material as the connection. Alternate plug materials may be used when galling is anticipated, except cast iron plugs shall not be used. RCB-10.31 VENT AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS ‘All high and low points on shell and tube sides of an exchanger not otherwise vented or drained by nozzles shall be provided with 3/4” minimum NPS connections for vent and drain. R-10.32 PRESSURE GAGE CONNECTIONS All flanged nozzles 2" NPS or larger shall be provided with one connection of 3/4" minimum NPS for a pressure gage unless special considerations allow it to be omitted. See Paragraph RB-10.4. C-10.32 PRESSURE GAGE CONNECTIONS Pressure gage connections shall be as specified by the purchaser. See Paragraph C-10.4. B-10.32 PRESSURE GAGE CONNECTIONS Alllanged nozzles 2" NPS or larger shall be provided with one connection of 1/2" minimum NPS for a pressure gage unless special considerations allow it to be omitted. See Paragraph RB-10.4. RB-10.33 THERMOMETER CONNECTIONS: Allflanged nozzles 4" NPS or larger shall be provided with one connection of 1" minimum NPS for a thermometer unless special considerations allow it to be omitted. See Paragraph RB-10.4. C-10.33 THERMOMETER CONNECTIONS ‘Thermometer connections shall be as specified by the purchaser. See Paragraph C-10.4. FB-10.4 STACKED UNITS Intermediate nozzles between units shall have flat or raised face flanges. Pressure gage and thermometer connections may be omitted in one of the two mating connections of units connected in series. Bolting in flanges of mating connections between stacked exchangers shall be removable without moving the exchangers. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association ciSECTION 5. MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B C-10.4 STACKED UNITS Intermediate nozzles between units shall have flat or raised face flanges. Pressure gage and ore ‘connections may be omitted in one of the two mating connections of units connected in seri RCB-10.5 SPLIT FLANGE DESIGN Circumstances of fabrication, instalation, or maintenance may preclude the use of the normal integral or loose full ring nozzle flanges. Under these conditions, double split ring flanges may be used in accordance with the Code. *RCB-10.6 NOZZLES LOADINGS Heat exchangers are not intended to serve as anchor points for piping; therefore, for purposes of design, nozzle loads are assumed o be negligible, untess the purchaser specially deals such loads in his inquiry as indicated in Figure RGP-RCB-10.6. The ahalysis and any modifications in the design or construction of the exchanger to cope with these loads ll be to the purchaser's account. ‘The ‘Recommended Good Practice” section of these standards provides the designer with additional information regarding imposed piping loads. 92 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS R C B SECTION 5 RCB-11 END FLANGES AND BOLTING Flanges and botting for external joints shall be in accordance with Code design rules, subject to the limitations set forth in the following paragraphs R-11.1 MINIMUM BOLT SIZE The minimum permissible bot diameter i 3/4: (M20). Sizes 1" and smaller shall be Coarse Thread Series, and larger sizes shall be 8-Pitch Thread Series. Dimensional standards are included in Section 9, Table D-5. Metric thread pitch is shown in Section 9, Table D-5M. C-11.1 MINIMUM BOLT SIZE The minimum recommended bolt diameter is 1/2" (M14). If bolting smaller than 1/2" (M14) is used, precautions shall be taken to avoid overstessin the bolting, Dimensional standards are included in fection 9, Table D-5. Metric bolting is shown in Section 9, Table D-5M. B-11.1 MINIMUM BOLT SIZE The minimum permissible bolt diameter shall be 5/8" (M16). Dimensional standards are included in Section 9, Table D-5. Metric bolting is shown in Section 9, Table D-5M. RCB-11.2 BOLT CIRCLE LAYOUT RCB-11.21 MINIMUM RECOMMENDED BOLT SPACING. The minimum recommended spacing between bolt centers is given In Section 9, Table D5 or RCB-11.22 MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED BOLT SPACING ‘The maximum recommended spacing between bolt centers is: 6t +05) Bra 209+ where B = Bolt spacing, centerline to centerline, inches (mm) y= Nominal bolt diameter, inches (mm) t= Flange thickness, inches (mm) m= Gasket factor used in Code flange calculations RCB-11.23 LOAD CONCENTRATION FACTOR When the distance between bolt centerlines exceeds recommended B ma» the total flange moment determined by Code design methods shall be muttiplied by a correction factor equal to: B Baax where B is the actual bolt spacing as defined by Paragraph RCB-11.22. RCB-11.24 BOLT ORIENTATION Bolts shall be evenly spaced and normally shall straddle both natural centertines of the ‘exchanger. For horizontal units, the natural centerlines shall be considered to be the horizontal and vertical centerlines of the exchanger. In special cases, the bolt count may be ‘changed from a multiple of four. RCB-11,3 MINIMUM RECOMMENDED WRENCH AND NUT CLEARANCES Minimum recommended wrench and nut clearances are giver Table D-5M. Section 9, Table D-5 and Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 93SECTION 5 MECHANICAL STANDARDS TEMA CLASS RC B RCB-11.4 BOLT TYPE Except for special design considerations, flanges shall be through-bolted with stud bolts, threaded full length with a removable nut on each end. One full stud thread shall extend! beyond each nut to indicate full engagement, *RCB-11.5 LARGE DIAMETER LOW PRESSURE FLANGES ‘See “Recommended Good Practice" section. *RCB-11.6 BOLTING-ASSEMBLY AND MAINTENANCE ‘See “Recommended Good Practice" section. 94 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION 6 (Note: This section is not metricated.) V-1 SCOPE AND GENERAL V-1.1 SCOPE Fluid flow, inter-related with heat exchanger geometry, can cause heat exchanger tubes to vibrate. his phenomenon is Righly complex and the present state-of the-a is such thatthe solution to this problem is dificult to define. This section defines the basic data which should be considered when evaluating potential flow induced vibration problems associated with heat exchangers, When potential flow induced vibration problems are requested to be evaluated, the relationships presented in this section and/or other methods may be used. Due to the complexity of the problem, the TEMA ‘guarantee does not cover vibration damage. V-1.2 GENERAL ‘Damaging tube vibration can occur under certain conditions of shell side flow relative to baffle ‘configuration and unsupported tube span. The maximum unsupported tube spans in Table RGB-4.52 do not consider potential low induced vibration problems. In those cases, where the analysis indicates the probability of destructive vibration, the user should refer to Paragraph V-13. \V-2 VIBRATION DAMAGE PATTERNS. ‘Mechanical fallure of tubes resulting from flow induced vibration may occur in various forms. Damage can result from any of the following independent conditions, or combinations thereof. V-2.1 COLLISION DAMAGE Impact of the tubes against each other or against the vessel wall, due to large amplitudes of the vibrating tube, can result in falure. The impacted area of the tube develops the characteristic, flattened, boat shape spot, generally at the mid-span of the unsupported length. The tube wail eventually wears thin, causing failure, V-2.2 BAFFLE DAMAGE Baffle tube holes require a manufacturing clearance (see Paragraph RCB-4.2) over the tube outer diameter to facilitate fabrication. When large fluid forces are present, the tube can impact the baffle hhole causing thinning of the tube wall in a circumferential, uneven manner, usually the width of the baffle thickness. Continuous thinning over a period of time results in tube failure. \V-2.3 TUBESHEET CLAMPING EFFECT Tubes may be ext ied into the tubesheet to minimize the crevice between the outer tube wall and the tubesheet hole. The natural frequency of the tube span adjacent to the tubesheet is increased by the clamping effect. However, he stresses due to any lateral deflection of the tube are also ae at the location where the tube emerges from the tubesheet, contributing to possible tube 3. \V-2.4 MATERIAL DEFECT PROPAGATION Designs which were determined to be free of harmful vibrations will contain tubes that vibrate with very small amplitude due to the baffle tube hole clearances and the flexibly of the tube span. Such ow level stress fluctuations are harmless in homogeneous material. Flaws contained within the ‘material and strategically oriented with to the stress field, can readily propagate and actuate tube falure. Corrosion and erosion can add to such fallure mechanisms. \V-2.6 ACOUSTIC VIBRATION ‘Acoustic resonance is due to gas column oscillation and is excited by phased vortex shedding. The oscillation creates an acoustic vibration of a standing wave type. The generated sound wave will not affect the tube bundle unless the acoustic resonant frequency approaches the tube natural frequency, although the hest exchanger shel andthe atached piping may vibrate, accompanied with oud noise. When the acoustic resonant frequency approaches the tube natural frequency, any tendency toward tube vibration will be accentuated with possible tube fallure. V-3 FAILURE REGIONS ‘Tube failures have been reported in nearly all locations within a heat exchanger. Locations of relatively flexible tube spans and/or high flow veloctties are regions of primary concern. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 95SECTION 6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION V-3.1 U-BENDS. Outer rows of U-bends have a lower natural frequency of vibration and, therefore, are more susceptible to flow induced vibration failures than the inner rows. \V-3.2 NOZZLE ENTRANCE AND EXIT AREA Impingement plates, large outer tube limits and small nozzle diameters can contribute to restricted entrance and exit areas. These restricted areas usually create high local velocities which can result in producing damaging flow induced vibration. \V-3.3 TUBESHEET REGION Unsupported tube spans adjacent to the tubesheet are frequently longer than those in the baffled region of the heat exchanger, and result in lower natural frequencies. Entrance and exit areas are common to this region. The possible high local velocities, in conjunction with the lower natural frequency, make this @ region of primary concern in preventing damaging vibrations. V-3.4 BAFFLE REGION Tubes located in batfle windows have unsupported spans equal to multiples of the baffle spacing. Long unsupported tube spans result in reduced natura frequency of vision and have a greeter jency to vibrate. V-3.5 OBSTRUCTIONS ‘Any obstruction to flow such as tie rod, sealing strips and ip fe jement plates may cause high localized velocities which can initiate vibration in the immedi inty of the obstruction. \-4 DIMENSIONLESS NUMBERS \V-4.1 STROUHAL NUMBER: Shedding of vortices from isolated tubes in a fluid medium is correlated by the Strouhal Number, which is given by: Fedo 12V where f.= Vortex shedding frequency, cycles/sec = V = Crossflow velocity of the fluid relative to the tube, ft/sec y= Outside diameter of tube, Inches For integrally finned tubes: l= Fin root diameter, inches Note: In closely spaced tube arrays, the rhythmic shedding of vortices degenerates into a broad turbulence and a correlation based on Strouhal Number alone is inadequate. -4.2 FLUID ELASTIC PARAMETER ‘A dimensionless parameter used in the correlations to predict flow induced vibration is given by: 144wobr xo Pode? ‘96 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTIONG where wo = Effective weight of the tube per unit length, defined in Paragraph V-7.1, lb/ft 6, = Logarithmic decrement in the tube unsupported span (see Paragraph V-8) po= Density of the shell side fluid at its local bulk temperature, lb/ft? lo = Outside diameter of tube, inches For integrally finned tubes: dg= Fin root diameter, inches \V-5 NATURAL FREQUENCY : V-5.1 GENERAL Most heat exchangers have multiple baffle supports and vari par Calculation of the natural frequency of the heat exchanger tube is an essential step in estimating its potential for flow induced vibration failure. The current state-of-the-art flow induced vibration. Correlations are not sophisticated enough to warrant treating the multi-span tube vibration problem (or mode shapes other than the fundamental) in one comprehensive analysis. Therefore, the ‘tential for vibration Is evaluated for each individual unsupported span, with the velocity and natural requency considered being that of the unsupported span under examination. For more complex mode shapes and multi-spans of unequal lengths, see Paragraph V-14 Reference (10) \V.5.2 FACTORS AFFECTING NATURAL FREQUENCY ‘The individual unsupported span natural frequency is affected by: (1) Tube elastic and inertial properties and tube geometry. (2) Span shape. (8) Type of support at each end of the unsupported span. (4) Axial loading on the tube unsupported span. (see Paragraph V-6) V-5.21 SPAN SHAPES 2 ‘The basic span shapes are the straight span and the U-bend span. V-8.22 SPAN SUPPORTS ‘The common support conditions are: (1) Fixed at the tubesheet and simply supported at the baffle. (2) Simply supported at each batt. ‘The baffle supports have clearances which render them non-iinear when analyzed as a support. The tubesheet is not rigid and, therefore, the “bull-in’ assumption is only ‘approximate. These approximations are known to have minor effects on the calculated natural frequency. \V-5.3 FUNDAMENTAL NATURAL FREQUENCY CALCULATION The value of the fundamental natural frequency of a tube unsupported span can be calculated for the combinations of span shape and end support conditions using Table V-5.3 where ‘fa = Fundamental natural frequency of the tube unsupported span, cycles/sec L= Tube unsupported span as shown in Table V-5.3, inches = Elastic modulus of tube material at the tube metal temperature, psi (ses Paragraph RCB-1.43) wo = Effective weight of the tube per unit length, defined in Paragraph V-7.1, lb/ft Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 7SECTION 6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION = Moment of inertia of the tube cross section, inches * is given by: x T= (a, *a,* aa ) d,= Tube inside diameter, inches dy= Outside diameter of tube, inches. For integrally finned tubes: do= Fin root diameter, inches 98 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION 6 TABLE V-5.3 FUNDAMENTAL NATURAL FREQUENCY Span Geometry Equation Nomenclature @ antes Ly] q BS A= Tube axial stress multiplier. See Paragraph V-6 Ls ge condor both ends ‘imply supponed @ Constant depending on edge Tubesheet condition geometry. = cated fav vo.sae4g] 1) i tlie Edge condton: one end fxd, other n Geomet é _end simply supported Spar te 8) a 99 Tubesheete depres 2 15.42 i S| eee ge condton: both ends xed @ r= Mean bend radius, inches ¥ r C..= Mode constant of U-bend i) ge condton: bot ends simply suppored 6) A i> 5 c.f ery? Edge condition: both ends simply | f, = 68.06-2] — supported ere © ‘Span Geometry Cy Figure r ix 4 Vas 5 vss Edge condition: both ends simply 6 V-6.3.2 supported a 7 V53.3 Ls 4H Edge conton: bth ends simaly suppared Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 99SECTION 6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION FIGURE V-5.3 U-BEND MODE CONSTANT, C 5.0 3.0 BAFFLE spactne/Aantus (Lb/r ) 2.0 ole 0.25 0.05 0.00 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION FIGURE V-5.3.1 U-BEND MODE CONSTANT, C 0.25 0.20 45 10 0.05 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Associ: 2 8 3 SECTION 6 3.0 4 5.0 6.0 aarFLe spactne/pantus (Lb/r ) 2.0 1 0.0 101SECTION 6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION FIGURE V-5.3.2 U-BEND MODE CONSTANT, C 0.80 102 0.20 0.00 5.0 2.0 0.0 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association BAFFLE SPAcING/AaDIUS (Lb/r )FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION6 FIGURE V- 3 U-BEND MODE CONSTANT, C , RS SS to 0.80 0.60 0.20 Cu 0.40 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 0.00 6.0 5.0 4 3.0 2.0 1.0 0.0 | parrte spactno/aaorus (Lb/r } 103SECTION 6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION \V-6 AXIAL TUBE STRESS V-6.1 AXIAL TUBE STRESS MULTIPLIER By the very function of a heat exchanger, the tubes are subjected to axial loads. Compressive axial loads decrease the tube natural frequency, and tensile loads tend to increase it. The resulting tube axl stress mutipier or a gven tube unsupported spans determined bythe tube end support conditions. S, = Tube longitudinal stress, ps! (for fixed tubesheet exchanger, S,may be calculated from Paragraph RCB-7.23) ‘A, = Tube metal cross sectional area, inches ° (see Table D-7) K = SUforboth ends simply supported = 4.49 for one end fixed, other end simply supported K = 27Lfor both ends fixed E = _ Elastic modulus of tube material at the tube metal temperature, psi (see Paragraph RCB-1.43) 1= Tube unsupported span, inches T= Moment of inertia of the tube cross-section, inches * (see Paragraph V-6.3 and Table D-7) V-6.2 U-TUBES For some applications U-tubes may develop high levels of axial stress. A method to compute the {ube axial stresses in the legs of U-tube exchangers is given in Paragraph V-14, Reference (1). \V-7 EFFECTIVE TUBE MASS To simplify the application of the formulae, the constants have been modified to enable the use of weight instead of mass. \V-7.1 EFFECTIVE TUBE WEIGHT Effective tube weight is defined as: wer w, tw ptHn where w,, = Total metal weight per unit length of tube, lb/ft (see Table D-7) wp. = 0.00545 p ,Cl; ? = Weight of fluid inside the tube per unit length of tube, Ib/tt Hq. = Hydrodynamic mass from Paragraph V-7.11 104 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION 6 where P= Density of fluid inside the tube at the local tube side fluid bulk temperature, lb/ft? di, = Inside diameter of tube, inches V-7.11 HYDRODYNAMIC MASS Hydrodynamic mass is an effect which increases the apparent weight of the vibrating body due to the displacement of the shell side fluid resulting from: (1), Motion of the vibrating tube (2) The proximity of other tubes within the bundle (@) The relative location of the shell wall Hydrodynamic mass is defined as: Hm Cm Wyo where Cm ™ Added mass coefficient from Figure V-7.11 Wyo = 0.00545 P od, * = Weight of fluid displaced by the tube per unit length of tube, Ib/ft where Po = Density of fluid outside the tube at the local shell side fluid bulk temperature, It? (For two phase fluids, use two phase density.) do = Outside diameter of tube, inches For integrally finned tubes: do = Finrootdiameter, inches Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 105SECTION 6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION FIGURE V-7.11 Ran ry : 2.0) |] ADDED MASS COEFFICIENT -Cu!_ t it Tp Er To) tt 7 of po 1.81 | i | z Bt | Pep yy Zz Fee eal T st ——— | E feet |.aa) cai) a atelal °° T + al! H { I t | gt] | t = ~ i { a | FESS el =fope| 3 i t | a 1 ‘TRIANGULAR PITCH |e 4 | (30°, 605) — | a a SO] To (lie aS feel | V2 LES [ey cel TF fa ef tote | r r 4 + - i 4 oe | | Lio| | fee sale 11.0! 4 1.6. fel Ts ‘TUBE PITCH TUBE OD ' Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION 6 \V-8 DAMPING ‘The mechanisms involved in damping are numerous, and the various effects are not readily measured or quantified. The following expressions for logarithmic decrement, 6 7, are based strictly on experimental ‘observations and idealized models. For shell side liquids, 6 ; is equal to the greater of 8 or 6 2 3.41 do 8 2012 pan | ar ara ee ermsaelire Zh wee 1 = Shel side liquid viscosity, at the local shell side liquid bulk temperature, centipoise do = Outside diameter of tube, inches. For integrally finned tubes, do = Fin root diameter, inches Density of shell side fluid at the local bulk temperature, Ib/ft? f n= Fundamental natural frequency of the tube span, cycles/sec Effective weight of the tube as defined in Paragraph V-7.1, Ib/ft w, For shell side vapors 6 = 6 as follows: N-1(te\ sy -oa1 (4) where N= Number of spans ty = Baffle or support plate thickness, inches 1 =Tube unsupported span, inches For two phase shell side media bee o.o02atsten)4¢s( where #(€,) = Void fraction function = for ¢,<0.4 e207 V,, = Volume flowrate of gas, ft°/sec V.= Volume flowrate of liquid, ft?/sec #(s,)= Surface tension function Sr * Siro Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 107SECTION 6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION Surface tension of shell side liquid at the local bulk temperature. (See Paragraph V-14, Reference (20)) Srro = Surface tension of shell side liquid at ambient temperature. (See Paragraph V-14, Reference (20)) 1 Density of shell side liquid at the local bulk temperature, Ib/ft® ©, ~ Density of shell side gas at the local bulk temperature, Ib/ft? dq = Outside diameter of tube, inches. For integrally finned tubes, do = Fin root, diameter, inches w,= Effective tube weight as defined in Paragraph V-7.1, Ib/ft Note: Use two phase density in the calculation for hydrodynamic mass ® re Two phase density at local bulk temperature lb/ft? = Pil €,)* Poe, Cy = Confinement function, see Table V-8 Total two phase damping 6, = Oy, +5, +6, Note: Use two phase properties for density and hydrodynamic mass. TABLE V-8 CONFINEMENT FUNCTION Cru ‘Tube Pitch ‘Triangular Pitch ‘Square Pitch Tube OD Cw Cw 1.20 225 1.87 125 2.03 172 133 178 156 150 147 1.35 108 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION 6 \V-9 SHELL SIDE VELOCITY DISTRIBUTION V-9.1 GENERAL One of the most important and least predictable parameters of flow induced vibration is fluid velocity, To calculate the local ui velocty at a parila point inthe heat exchanger isa dificult task. Very complex flow patterns are present ina heat exchanger shell. Various amounts of fluid bypass the tube bundle of leak through clearances between baifies and shell, or tube and baffle tube holes. Until methods are developed to accurately calculate local fluid veiocttes, the designer may use average crossfiow velocities based on available empirical methods. \V-9.2 REFERENCE CROSSFLOW VELOCITY The crossfiow velocity in the bundle varies from span to span, from row to row within a span, and {from tube to tube within a row. The reference crossfiow veloctty Is calculated for each region of rferest Be Paragraph V-) and ls based onthe average veloc across a representative tube row in that region. : ‘The presence of pass partition lanes aligned in the crossfiow direction, clearance between the bundle ‘and the shell, tube-to-baffie hole annular clearances, etc. reduce the net flow rate of the shell side fluid in crosstlow. This should be considered in computing the reference crossfiow velocity. V-9.21 REFERENCE CROSSFLOW VELOCITY CALCULATIONS The following method of calculating a reference crossflow velocity takes into account fluid bypass and leakage which are related to heat exchanger geometry. The method is valid for single phase shell side fluid with single segmental baffles in TEMA E shells. Other methods may be used to evaluate reference crosstiow velocities, Reference crossflow velocity is given by: FW) i THYCa,) ()(600) * > \V-9.211 CALCULATION OF CONSTANTS: ‘The constants used in the calculation of the reference crossfiow velocity are given by: v Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manutacturers Association 109SECTION 6 110 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION TABLE V-9.211A TUBE PATTERN (See Figure ROB-2.4) 30° oo 0 a Cs 1.26 108 126 0.90 Ce 0.82 ot 0.66 056 Ce 148 128 138 17 [ m 0.85 oar | 093 0.80 TABLE V-9.211B as Co vecuttodiameter ratio D, h 0.10 | 015 ] 020] 025 | 090 | 025 | 040 | 04s | 050 Di Cc. | 098 | 090 | 00s | oxo | 07s | 00s | 062 | 054 | 049 Linear interpolation is permitted sooo( BIS) rela) NawCFi0C7)* (Fa AD* CaF) 1 rowley? My=(m)(C,)'? a,=(ls)(Ds)(Ca) where Fr D, = Shell inside diameter, inches D2 = Baffle diameter, inches D4 = Outer tube limit (OTL), inches , = Tube hole diameter in baffle, inches Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION6 y= Outside diameter of tube, inche: For integrally finned tubes: lo™ Fin outside diameter, inches P = Tube pitch, inches 15 = Baffle spacing, inches ®o™ Density of shell side fluid at the local bulk temperature, Ib/t? W = Shell fluid flow rate, Ib/hr ‘1h = Height from baffle cut to shell inside diameter, ir V-9.3 SEAL STRIPS Q ‘Seal strips are often used to help block the circumferential bypass space between a tube bundle and shell, of other bypass lanes, Seal strips force fluid from the bypass stream back into the bundle. This increases the reference crossflow velocity and should be considered in a vibration analysis. Local fluid velocity in the vicinity of seal strips may be significantly higher than the average crossfiow velocity. (See Paragraph V-14, Reference 6.) \V-9.31 REFERENCE CROSSFLOW VELOCITY WITH SEAL STRIPS ‘The reference crossfiow velocity is calculated by using a modified value for C , in the ‘equations in Paragraph V-9.211. ente{@-*]-0 5)(C3) 4 hes V-9.4 PASS LANES PARALLEL TO FLOW ‘When pass lanes are oriented parallel to flow (at 90° to the baffle cut) they create a relatively low resistance path for fluid to follow. The net effect is for less fluid to cross the tube bundle, resulting in a lower average crossflow velocity. However, tubes adjacent to these lanes may be subjected to high local velocities. The number and width of these lanes should be considered when the reference crossfiow velocity is calculated. \V-9.41 REFERENCE CROSSFLOW VELOCITY WITH PASS LANES PARALLEL TO FLOW ‘To account for pass lanes parallel to flow, if they are not blocked by some type of special bafile, a modified value of D 5 can be used where D.3 = Outer tube limit minus (number of parallel pass lanes x width of pass lanes), inches \V-9.5 BUNDLE ENTRANCE REGION AND IMPINGEMENT PLATES Tubes directly beneath inlet nozzles and impingement plates can be subjected to local fluid velocities eater than those in other parts of the bundle. A number of documented vibration problems have Been caused by high net fuld velocities, These standards provide guidelines for maximum velocty in this region and set criteria for the use of impingement plates. The p V “limits in Paragraph RCB-4.6 are furnished for protection against tube erosion, but do not necessarily prevent vibration damage. \V-9.6 INTEGRALLY FINNED TUBES In computing the reference crossfiow velocity, the presence of fins shall be taken into account. For the purposes of using the equations in Paragraph V-2.2 to calculate a reference crosslow veloc, the fin diameter should be used in place of the nominal tube OD for integrally finned tubes. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association m1SECTION6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION \V-10 ESTIMATE OF CRITICAL FLOW VELOCITY The critical flow velocity, V’¢ , for a tube span is the minimum cross-flow velocity at which that span may vibrate with unacceptably large amplitudes. The critical flow velocity for tube spans in the window, overiap, inlet and outlet regions, U-bends, and all atypical locations should be calculated. The cr I velocity, Vc, is defined by: =Dfate ft/sec Weal where Value obtained from Table V-10.1 fat Fundamental natural frequency, cycles/sec (see Paragraph V-5.3) p= Outside diameter of tube, inches For integrally finned tubes: do= Finroot diameter, inches ‘The user should ensure that the reference crossfiow velocity Vat every location, is less than V’¢ for that location. 112 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION6 TABLE V-10.1 FORMULAE FOR CRITICAL FLOW VELOCITY FACTOR, D Tube Pattern Parameter (See Figure RCB-2.4) Range for Dimensionless Critical Flow Velocity Factor, D x 0.1 tot 30° 2.6 F-0.9) x0 ‘over 1 to 300 i 8, e6(F-0.9)x°* a 0.01 tot 2.80%°!7 60° over 1 to 300 2.80x°* 0.03 to 0.7 ect ee ter 90° over 0.7 to 300 2.35x°% 0.1 to 300 45° ais{2-o.5)x°* P = Tube pitch, inches x do = Tube OD or fin root diameter for integrally finned tubes, inches 144w987 : x= Jog, 7 = Fluid elastic parameter where P.o™ Shell side ud density at the corresponding local shell side bulk temperature, Ib/tt® 5, = Logarithmic decrement (See Paragraph V-8) ‘Wo ™ Effective weight of the tube per unit length, Ib/ft (See Paragraph V-7.1) Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 113SECTION 6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION V-11 VIBRATION AMPLITUDE V-11.1 GENERAL There are four basic flow induced vibration mechanisms that can occur in a tube bundle, These are the fluidelastic instability, vortex shedding, turbulent buffeting, and acoustic resonance. The first three mechanisms are accompanied by a tube vibration amplitude while acoustic resonance causes a loud acoustic noise with virtually no increase in tube amplitude. Fluidelastic instability is the most damaging in that it results in extremely large amplitudes of vibration with ultimate damage pattems as described in Paragraph V-2. The design approach In this case is to avoid the fluidelastic instabllty situation thereby avoiding the accompanying large amplitude of vibration (see Paragraph V-10). Vortex shedding may be a problem when there is a frequency match with the natural frequency of the tube. Vibration due to vortex shedding is expected when fa<2f ve, where f,, = 12SV /d, (see Paragraph V-12.2). Only then should the amplitude be calculated. This frequency match may resutt in a vibration amplitude which can be damaging to ‘tubes in the vicinity of the shell inlet and outlet connections. Vortex shedding degenerates into broad band turbulence and both mechanisms are intertwined deep inside the bundle. Vortex shedding and turbulent buffeting vibration amplitudes are tolerable within specified limits. Estimation of amplitude and respective limits are shown below. \V-11.2 VORTEX SHEDDING AMPLITUDE CipodeV* 20767 faWe where Yue Peak amplitude of vibration at midspan for the first mode, for single phase fluids, inches, C= Uitcooticient for vortex shedding, (see Table V-11.2) poe Density of fluid outside the tube atthe local shell side Mud bulk temperature, 1b /t® y= Outside diameter of tube, inches For integrally finned tubes, a» = fin root diameter, inches V = _ Reference crossfiow velocity, ft/sec (see Paragraph V-9.2) 8, = Logarithmic decrement (see Paragraph V-8) f= Fundamental natural frequency of the tube span, cycies/sec (see Paragraph V-6.3) w= Effective tube weight per unit length of tube, Ib/tt (see Paragraph V-7.1) \V-11.21 RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM AMPLITUDE Yor $ 0.024, , inches V-11.3 TURBULENT BUFFETING AMPLITUDE CrpodeV? Yu" Bag, iP, where Yyig = Maximum amplitude of vibration for single phase fluids, inches C,= Force coefficient (see Table V-11.3) ‘V-11.31 RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM AMPLITUDE. Yip $ 0.02d, , inches 114 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION6 ‘TABLE V-11.2 LIFT COEFFICIENTS Cy TUBE PATTERN (See Figure RCB-2.4) ee 30° 60 90° 45° a, 1.20 0.090 0.090 (0.070 (0.070 125 0.091 0.091 0.070 0.070 133 0.065 0.017 0.070 0.010 150 0.025 0.047, 0.068 0.049 TABLE V-11.3, FORCE COEFFIGENTS Cr Location ta ice Bundle Entrance Tubes $40 0.022, >40<88 -0,00045f,+0.04 288 ° Interior Tubes <40 0.012 >40<88 - 0.00025 f,+ 0.022 288 0 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 115SECTION6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION \V-12 ACOUSTIC VIBRATION ‘Acoustic resonance is due to a gas column oscillation. Gas column oscillation can be excited by phased vortex shedding or turbulent buffeting. Oscilation normally occurs perpendicular to both the {ube axis and flow direction. When the natural acoustic frequency of the shell approaches the exciting frequency of the tubes, a coupling may occur and kinetic energy in the flow stream Is Converted into acoustic pressure waves. Acoustic resonance may occur independently of mechanical tube vibration. \V-12.1 ACOUSTIC FREQUENCY OF SHELL Acoustic frequency is given by: rye foo | eo(1+22)) | ,cyces/sec where w = Distance between reflecting walls measured parallel to segmental baffle cut, inches P,, = Operating shell side pressure, psia ‘= Specific heat ratio of shell side gas, dimensionless ‘2 = Shell side fluid density at local fluid bilk temperature, Ib/ft? x= Pt a, Pe xin B ‘p= Longitudinal pitch, inches (see Figures V-12.2A and V-12.2B) _p, = Transverse pitch, inches (see Figures V-12.2A and V-12.28) do = Outside diameter of tube, inches. For integrally finned tubes, cl, = Fin outer diameter, inches i= mode (1, 2,3, 4) \V-12.2 VORTEX SHEDDING FREQUENCY The vortex shedding frequency is given by: 12sv ap d, + cYeles/sec where V = Reference crossflow velocity, ft/sec (see Paragraph V-9.2) = Strouhal number (see Figures V-12.2A and V-12.2B) lo = Outside diameter of tube, inches For integrally finned tubes: do™ Fin outer diameter, inches 116 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTIONG V-12.3 TURBULENT BUFFETING FREQUENCY ‘The turbulent butfeting frequency is given by: 12v. aoe fo 2 [o0s(1-2 +0. 25] oycles/sec where d= Outside diameter of tube, inches For integrally finned tubes: do= Fin outer diameter, inches P.= Longitudinal pitch, inches (see Figures V-12.2A and V-12.2B) P.= Transverse pitch, inches (see Figures V-12.2A and V-12.2B) V= Reference crossfiow velocity, ft/sec (see Paragraph V-9.2) V-12.4 ACOUSTIC RESONANCE Incidence of acoustic resonance is possible if any one of the following conditions satisfied at any operating condition. V-12.41 CONDITION A PARAMETER: OB F< faS 12h on or OBfe2000 eal =) . where Xo= x1 for 90°tube patterns Xe= 2x, for 30", 45°, and 60° tube patterns Te™ Acoustic frequency, cycles/sec (see Paragraph V-12.1) S = Strouhal number (see Figures V-12.2A and V-12.2B) ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 17SECTION 6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION R= Reynolds number, evaluated at the reference cross flow velocity 124.13doV po R= 2a doll Pe 7 = Sheliside fluid viscosity, centipoise \V-12.5 CORRECTIVE ACTION ‘There are several means available to correct a resonant condition, but most could have some effect on exchanger petformance. The simplest method is to install deresonating baffle(s) in the exchanger bundle to break the wave(s) at or near the antinode(s). This can be done without significantly affecting the shell side flow patter. In shell and tube exchangers, the standing wave forms are limited to the first or the second mode. Failure to check both modes can result in acoustic. resonance, even with deresonating baffles. 118 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manutacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION6 FIGURE V-12.20 ‘STROUHAL NUMBER FOR 90° TUBE PATTERNS, FLOW Loot Pe C_ Py x Bs ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 19SECTION 6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION ‘STROUHAL NUMBER FOR 30°, 45° AND 60° TUBE PATTERNS FIGURE V-12.2B 0.625 FLOW 0.3 4.97 1.315 2.625 Py /do = 3.95 Pe /dy 120 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 2PyFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION 6 \V-13 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS Many parameters acting independently or in conjunction with each other can affect the flow induced Moran anasis, One must be cogrlzart of these peramotors and tay esas rons to accounted fof in the overall heat exchanger design. \V-13.1 TUBE DIAMETER Use of the largest reasonable tube diameter consistent with practical thermal and hydraulic design economics is desirable. Larger diameters increase the moment of inertia, thereby ‘effectively increasing the stifiness of the tube for a given length. \V-13.2 UNSUPPORTED TUBE SPAN ‘The unsupported tube span is the most significant factor affecting induced vibrations. The shorter the tube span, the greater its resistance to vibration. The thermal and hydraulic design of an exchanger is significant in determining the type of shell, baffle design and the unsupported tube length. For example, compared to single pass shells, a divided fiow shell will result in approximately one-half the span length for an equal crossfiow velocity. TEMA type X shells provide the opportunity to use multiple support plates to reduce the unsupported tube epan, without appreciably affecting the croseflow veloctt. Compared tothe conventional segmental bale low arrangement, mult-segmenta baffles sgnicantly reduce the tube unsupported span forthe same shel side flow rate and pressure op. “No tubes in window flow arrangement baffles provide support to all tubes at all batfle locations and also permit the use of multiple intermediate supports without affecting the crossfiow velocity while reducing the unsupported tube span. V-13.3 TUBE PITCH Larger pitch-to-tube diameter ratios provide increased ligament areas which result in a reduced crossfiow velocity for a glven unsupported tube span, or a reduced unsupported tube span for a glven crossflow velocity. ‘The increased tube to tube spacing reduces the likelihood of mid-span collision damage and also decreases the hydrodynamic mass coefficient given in Figure V-7.11. \V-13.4 ENTRANCE/EXIT AREAS Entrance and exit areas are generally recognized to bé particularly susceptibie to damage in vibration prone exchangers. Entrance and exit velocities should be calculated and compared to ertical velocities to avoid vibration of the spans in question. It should be noted that compliance with Paragraph RCB-4.62 alone is not enough to insure protection from flow induced vibration at the entrance /exit regions of the bundle. Consideration may be given to the use of partial supports to reduce unsupported tube s} inthe entrance/extt regions. Sufficient untubed space may have to be provided at the shell. inlet/outlet connections to reduce entrance/ext veloctles, Impingement plates shoud be sized and positioned so as not to overly restrict the area avallable for flow. The use of distribution belts can be an effective means of lowering entrance exit velocities by allowing the shell side fluid to enter/ext the bundle at several locations. \V-13.5 U-BEND REGIONS Suscopilty of U-bends to damaging vibration may be reduced by gptimum location of adjacent baffles in the straight tube legs and/or use of a special bend support device. Consideration may also be given to protecting the bends from flow induced vibration by ‘appropriately locating the shell connection and/or adjacent baffles. \V-13,6 TUBING MATERIAL AND THICKNESS ‘The natural frequency of an unsupported tube span is affected by the elastic modulus of the [Uber ‘righ values of eastc modal innerent in ferrc steels and austentic stainless alloys provide greater resistance to vibratory flexing than materials such as aluminum and brass {ith reletvely low elastic modul. Tube metalurgy and wall thiokness also affect the damping characteristic of the tube. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 121SECTION 6 FLOW INDUCED VIBRATION 122 \V-13.7 BAFFLE THICKNESS AND TUBE HOLE SIZE eenae: ed Pe thickness: avon the tube-to-baffle hole clearance increases the system damping (see Paragraph V-8) and reduces the magnitude ofthe ft tube-to-baffle hole interface, : ee Cece The formulae in this section do not quantitatively account for the effects of increasing the baffle thickness, or tightening of the baffie hole deerancs aes ‘V-13.8 OMISSION OF TUBES ‘Omission of tubes at predetermined critical locations within the bundle may be employed to reduce vibration potential. For instance, tubes located on baffle cut lines sometimes. ‘experience excessive damage in vibration prone units; therefore, selective removal of tubes along baffle cut lines may be advantageous, ‘V-13.9 TUBE AXIAL LOADING ‘The heat exchanger designer must recognize the potential adverse impact on vibration by ‘compressive axial loading of tubes due to pressure and/or temperature conditions. This is partoulary significant for tubes in single pass, fixed tubesheet exchangers where the hot fuid in the tube side, and in all multiple tube pass fixed tubesheet exchangers. The use of an expansion joint in such cases may result in reduction ofthe tube compressive stress. (See Paragraph V-6,) V-14 SELECTED REFERENCES, (1) Singh, K. P., and Soler, A. I., “Mechanical Design Of Heat Exchangers And Pressure Vessel Components’, Arcturus Publishers, Cherry Hil, N.J., (1984) (2) Paidoussis, M. P., "Flow Induced Vibration Of Cylindrical Structures: A Review Of The State-OF-The-Art', McGill University, Merl Report No. 82-1 (1982) Barrington, E, A., "Experience With Acoustic Vibrations in Tubular Exchangers", Chemical © Bagingering Progress Vol 62, No. 7 (1879) ae (4) Barrington, E. A., “Cure Exchanger Acoustic Vibration’, Hydrocarbon Processing, (July, 1978) (6) Chen, S. S., and Chung, Ho, “Design Guide For Calculating Hydrodynamic Mass, Part I: Circular Cylindrical Structures", Argonne National Laboratory, Report No. ANL-CT-76-45 hung, H. and Chen, S.S. “Design Guide For Calculating Hydrodynamic Mass, Part I: Noneircular Cylindrical Structures*, Ibid, Report No. ANL-CT-78-49, (© Kase JH, "Flow Induced Vibration In A Heat Exchanger ‘With Seal Strips’, ASME HTD, Vol. 9 (7) Chen, S. S., "Flow Induced Vibration Of Circular Cylindrical Structures", Argonne National Laboratory, Report No. ANL-CT-8551 (8) Tinker, T., "General Discussion Of Heat Transfer’, Institution Of Mechanical Engineers, pp 97-116, London (1951) (9) Gorman, Daniel J., "Free Vibration Analysis Of Beams & Shafts", John Wiley & Sons, (1975) (10) Pettigrew, M.J., Goyder, H.G.D., Qiao, ZL. Axisa, F. “Damping of Muitispan Heat Exchanger Tubes’, Part 1: In Gases, Fiow-Induced Vibration (1986), ASME PVP Vol. 104, (1986), pp 81-87 (11) Pettigrew, M.J., Taylor, C. E., Kim, B.S., "Vibration of Tube Bundles In Two-Phase Cross Flow: Part Hydrodh ‘Mass and Damping’, 1988 International Symposium on Flow-Induced Vibration and Noise - Volume 2, The Pressure Vessel and Piping Division - ASME, pp 79-103 (12) Connors, H.J., "Fluidelastic Vibration Of Tube Arrays Excited By Crossflow’, Flow Induced Vibration in Feat Exchangers, ASME, New York (1970) (13) Chen, S.S., "Design Guide For Calculating The Instability Flow Velocity Of Tube Arrays In Crossflow", Argonne National Laboratory, ANL-CT-81-40 (1981) (14) Kissel, Joseph H., "Flow Induced Vibrations In Heat Exchangers - A Practical Look’, Presented at the 13th National Heat Transfer Conference, Denver (1972) (15) Moretti, P.M., And Lowery, R.L., "Hydrodynamic Inertia Coefficients For A Tube Surrounded By Rigid Tubes", ASME paper No. 75-PVR 47, Second National Congress On Pressure Vessel And Piping, San Francisco (16) WRC Bulletin 389, dated February 1994 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationFLOW INDUCED VIBRATION SECTION 6 (17) Qwen, P.R,, "Buffeting Excitation Of Boiler Tube Vibration’, Journal Of Mechanical Engineering Science, Vol. 7, 1965 (18) Byrce, W.B., Wharmsby, J.S. and Fitzpatrick, J., "Duct Acoustic Resonances Induced By Flow Over Coiled And Rectangular Heat Exchanger fest Banks Of Plain And Finned Tubes’, Pr BNES International Conference On Vibration In Nuclear Plants, Keswick, U.K. (1978) (19) Chen, Y.NV., "Flow Induced Vibration And Noise In Tube Bank Heat Exchangers Due To Von Karman Streets," Journal Of Engineering For Industry (20) API, "Technical Data Book - Petroleum Refining, 1996 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 123SECTION7 THERMAL RELATIONS (Note: This section is not metricated.) T-1 SCOPE AND BASIC RELATIONS T-1.1 SCOPE ‘This section outlines the basic thermal relationships common to most tubular heat transfer equipment. Included are calculation procedures for determining mean temperature difference an overall heat transfer coefficient, and discussions of the cause and effect of fouling, and procedure for determining mean metal temperatures of shell and tubes. Rlecommendations for the calculatic of shell side and tube side heat transfer film coefficients and pressure losses are considered to be outside the scope of these Standards. It should be noted, however, that many of the standard de and clearances can significantly affect thermal-hydraulic performance, especially on the shell side Particularly relevant in this respect is the research conducted by the University of Delaware Engineering Experiment Station under the joint sponsorship of ASME, API, TEMA, and other interested organizations. The results are summarized in their “Bulletin No.’ (1963) Final Report o the Cooperative Research Program on Shell and Tube Exchangers." T-1.2 BASIC HEAT TRANSFER RELATION =e ATA, where A= Required effective outside heat transfer surface, f2 Q= Total heat to be transferred, BTU/hr - U= Overall heat transfer coefficient, referred to tube outside surface BTU/hr ft2° F Atm = Corrected mean temperature difference, °F T-1.3 DETERMINATION OF OVERALL HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT ‘The overall heat transfer coefficient U, including fouling, shall be calculated as follows: ee 1 [err )z)+ren)-z(F)] U= Overall heat transfer coefficient (fouled) h,= Film coefficient of shell side fluid Film coefficient of tube side fluid Fouling resistance on outside surface of tubes. Fouling resistance on inside surface of tubes Resistance of tube wall referred to outside surface of tube wall, including extended surfac Present U= 124 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationTHERMAL RELATIONS SECTION7 Ae Ratio of outside to inside surace of tubing E,= Finefficiency (where applicable) The units of U', h, and h,are BTU/hr ft2 °F and the units of r...r,and ry are hr ft2°F/BTU T-1.4 TUBE WALL RESISTANCE -1.41 BARE TUBES al (aea)] " 24k d-2t ‘T-1.42 INTEGRALLY FINNED TUBES _t [d+2Nw(d+w)} Tak (a=) where = OD of bare tube oF root diameter if integrally finned, inches w= Fin height, inches t= Tube wall thickness, inches = Number of fins per inch k= Thermal conductivity, BTU/hr f° F ‘T-1.8 SELECTED REFERENCE BOOKS (1) AP. Fraas and M. N. Ozisik, "Heat Exchanger Design’, John Wiley & Sons, 1965. (2) M. Jacob, "Heat Transfer’, Vol. 1, John Wiley & Sons, 1949. (8) D. Q. Kern, “Process Heat Transfer’, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1950. (4) J. G. Knudsen and D. L. Katz, "Fluid Dynamics and Heat Transfer’, MeGraw-Hill Book Co,, 1958. (6) W.H. McAdams, "Heat Transmission’, McGraw-Hill Book Co,, Third Ed., 1954. (6) Chemical Engineers’ Handbook, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Fifth Ed., 1973. -2 FOULING 7-2.1 TYPES OF FOULING ‘Several unique types of fouling mechanisms are currently recognized. They are individually complex, can occur independently of simuaneously, and the rates of dovelopment are governed by physical and chemical relationships dependent on operating conditions. The major fouling mechanisms are: Precipitation fouling Particulate fouling ‘Chemical reaction fouling Corrosion fouling Biological fouling Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 125SECTION7 THERMAL RELATIONS ‘1-2.2 EFFECTS OF FOULING The calculation of the overall heat transfer coefficient (see Paragraph T-1.3) contains the terms to account for the thermal resistances of the fouling layers on the inside and outside heat transfer surfaces. These fouling layers are known to increase in thickness with time as the heat exchanger is. operated, Fouling layers normally havea lower thermal conductvty than th fluids or the tube Material, thereby increasing the overall thermal resistance. In order that heat exchangers shall have sufficient surface to maintain satisfactory performance in normal operation, with reasonable service time between cleanings, it is important in design to provide a fouling allowance appropriate to the expected operating and maintenance condition. T-2.3 CONSIDERATIONS IN EVALUATING FOULING RESISTANCE, The determination of appropriate fouling resistance values involves both physical and economic factors, many of which vary from user to user, even for identical services. When these factors are known, they can be used to adjust typical base values tabulated inthe GP section ofthese ndards. 1-2.31 PHYSICAL CONSIDERATIONS ‘Typical physical factors influencing the determination of fouling resistances are: Fluid properties and the propensity for fouling Heat exchanger geometry and orientation Surface and fluid bulk temperatures, Local fluid velocities Heat transfer process Fluid treatment Cathodic protection 1-232 ECONOMIC CONSIDERATIONS Typical economic factors influencing the determination of appropriate fouling resistances are: Frequency and amount of cleaning costs Maintenance costs Operating and production costs Longer periods oftime on steam = Fluid pumping costs Depreciation rates Tax rates Initial cost and variation with size ‘Shut down costs Out-of-service costs 1-24 DESIGN FOULING RESISTANCES ‘The best design fouling resistances, chosen with all physical and economic factors properly evaluated, il result na minimum cost baged on fixed charges ofthe inal investment (which increase with added fouling resistance) and on cleaning and down-time expenses (which decrease with added fouling resistance). By the very nature of the factors involved, the manufacturer is seldom in a postion to determine optimum fouling resistanogs. The user, therefore, onthe basis of past experience and current or projected costs, should specify the design fouling resistances for his particular services and operating conditions. In the absence of specific data for setting proper resistances as described in the previous paragraphs, the user may be guided by the values tabulated in the RGP section of these standards. In the case of inside surface fouling, these values must be muttiplied by the outside /inside surface ratio, as indicated in Equation T-1.3. 7-3 FLUID TEMPERATURE RELATIONS -3.1 LOGARITHMIC MEAN TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE For cases of true countercurrent or cocurrent flow, the logarithmic mean temperature difference should be used if the following conditions substantially apply: 126 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationTHERMAL RELATIONS SECTION 7 Gonstart overall heet iraneter coeticient mplete mixing within any : cross pass or tube pass ‘The number of cross baffles is large Me deme Constant flow rate and specific heat Enthalpy is a linear function of temperature Equal surface in each shell pass or tube pass Negligible heat loss to surroundings or internally between passes ‘The following references contain relevant information on the above items: (1) K. Gardner and J. Taborek, “Mean Temperature Difference - A Reappraisal", AIChE Journal, December, 1977 (2) A.N. Caglayan and P. Buthod, "Factors Correct Air-Cooler and $ & T Exchanger LMTD", The Oil Oncaea ‘September 6, 1976 a. - Melee For cases where the above conditions do not apply, a stepwise calculation of temperature difference and heat vansfer suriace may bo necessary. an Excessive fluid leakage through the clearance between the cross baffles and the shell or between a longitudinal baffle and the shell can significantly alter the axial temperature profile. This condition may result in significant degradation of the effective mean temperature difference. The following references may be used for further information on this subject: (1) J. Fisher and R. O. Parker, "New Ideas on Heat Exchanger Design", Hydrocarbon Processing, Vol. 48, No. 7, July 1969 (2) J. W. Palen and J. Taborek, "Solution of Shellside Flow Pressure Drop.and Heat Transfer by Stream Analysis", CEP Symposium No. $2, Vol. 65, 1969, T-3.2 CORRECTION FOR MULTIPASS FLOW Jn multipass heat exchangers, where there is a combination of cocurrent and countercurrent flow in alternate passes, the mean temperature difference Is less than the logarithmic mean calculated for Countercurrent flow and greater than that based on cocurrent flow. The correct mean temperature difference may be evaluated as the product of the logarithmic mean for countercurrent flow and an LMTD correction factor, F. Figures T-3.2A to T-3.2M inclusive give values for F as a function of the heat capacity rate ratio R and the required temperature effectiveness P. These charts are based on the assumption that the conditions listed in Paragraph T-3.1 are applicable. Caution should be ‘observed when applying F factors from these charts which lie on the steeply sloped portions of the curves. Such a situation indicates that thermal performance will be extremely sensitive to small ‘changes in operating conditions and that performance prediction may be unreliable. Pass configurations for Figures T-3.2A through T-3.2H are stream symmetric: therefore, t and T ma be taken as the cold and hot fluid temperatures, respectively, regardless of passage through the tu side or shell side. For non-stream symmetric configurations represented by Figures T-3.21 through -3.2M, tand T must be taken as the tube side and the shell side fluid temperatures, respectively. The following references may be useful in determining values of F for various configurations and conditions. ‘Configuration Reference (1) General W. M, Rohsenow and J. P. Hartnett, “Handbook of Heat Transfer’, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1972 (2) Three tube passes per shell pass _F. K. Fischer, “ind. Engr. Chem.*, Vol. 30, 377 (1938) (8) Unequal size tube passes K.A Gardiner, “Ind. Engr. Chem.", Vol. 33, 1215 (1941) (4) Weighted MTD D.L. Gulley, "Hydrocarbon Proc.', Vol. 45, 116 (1966) 1-3.3 TEMPERATURE EFFECTIVENESS: ‘The temperature effectiveness of a heat exchanger is customarily defined as the ratio of the temperature change of the tube side stream to the difference between the two fluid inlet temperatures, thus: Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 127SECTION7 THERMAL RELATIONS where Pis the effectiveness. Figures T-3.3A, T-3.98, and T-3.3C show the temperature effectiveness of counterfiow, single-pass shell and two-pass tube, and two-pass shell and four-pass tube exchangers respectively, in terms of overall heat transfer coefficient, surface, fluid flow rates, and specific heats. Inall cases, the lower case symbols (¢, .t2. w and c)refer to the tube side fluid, and upper case (T1.T2,W and C)to the shell side fluid. (This distinction is not necessary in the case of counterflow exchangers, but confusion will be avoided if is observed.) These charts are based on the same conditions listed in Paragraph T-3.1 a T-4 MEAN METAL TEMPERATURES OF SHELL AND TUBES SCOPE This paragraph outlines the basic method for determination of mean shell and tube metal ‘temperatures. These temperatures have a pronounced influence in the design of fixed tubesheet exchangers. Knowledge of mean metal temperatures is necessary for determining tubesheet thickness, shell and tube axial stress levels, and flexible shell element requirements. This paragraph provides the basis for determining the differential thermal expansion term, 4, required for the calculation of equivalent differential expansion pressure, P « (see Paragraph RCB-7.161). ‘-4.2 DEFINITIONS -4.21 MEAN METAL TEMPERATURE ‘The mean metal temperature of either the shell or tubes is the temperature taken at the metal thickness midpoint averaged with respect to the exchanger tube length. For the case of Integral fined tubes, the temperature at tho prime tube metal hicknoss midpoint apples. The fin metal temperature should not be weighted with the prime tube metal temperature. -4.22 FLUID AVERAGE TEMPERATURE. ‘The shell or tube fluid average temperature-is the bulk shell or tube fluid temperature averaged with respect to the exchanger tube length. ~ - T-4.3 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MEAN METAL TEMPERATURES AND FLUID AVERAGE ‘TEMPERATURES -4.31 SHELL MEAN METAL TEMPERATURE ‘The shell mean metal temperature, generally assumed to be equal to the shell fluid average temperature, is given by: TysT where Ty = Shell mean metal temperature, °F T =Shell fluid average temperature, °F This assumption is valid for cases without abnormal rates of heat transfer between the shell and its surroundings. If significant heat transfer to or from the shell could occur, determination of the effect on the shell metal temperature should be made. in general, most high or low temperature externally Insulated exchangers and moderate temperature nor-insulated exchangers meet the above assumption. 128 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationTHERMAL RELATIONS SECTION 7 ‘-4.32 TUBE MEAN METAL TEMPERATURE The tube mean metal temperature is dependent not only on the tube fluid average temperature, but also the shell fuid average temperature, the shell and tube heat transfer ficients, shell and tube fouling resistances, and tube metal resistance to heat transfer, according to the following relationship: . where ty = Tube mean metal temperature, °F f= Tube side fluid average temperature, °F (see Paragraph T-4.4) All other terms are as defined by Paragraphs T-1.9 and T-4.31 -4.33 TUBESHEET MEAN METAL TEMPERATURE Untubed portion of tubesheet Tr+Ts = 2 Tubed portion of tubesheet: Treo Tye Ty*(Ts-T— (avay(1+n%) where: T , = Tubeside fluid temperature, °F T = Shollside fluid temperature, °F hy, = Tubeside heat transfer coefficient, BTU/Hr-t2 -° F iis = Shellside heat transfer coefficient, BTU/Hr-ft2 -°F af l+dtanh(Ky ""GR| Ze tann(K) where k =tubesheet metal thermal conductivity, BTU/Hrt® F = tubesheet thickness, inches 1 Fe cosh(K) sinh(K) Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 129SECTION7 THERMAL RELATIONS for triangular pitch Aandl/2 a= 0.433 P*-nd?/8 for square pitch Awndl an Pe nd?/4 : where a tube ID, inches P = tube pitch, inches T-4.4 ESTIMATION OF SHELL AND TUBE FLUID AVERAGE TEMPERATURES ‘The methods presented in this paragraph are baséd on equipment operating under steady-state conditions. -4.41 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS Fluid average temperatures in shell and tube heat exchangers are affected by the following (1) Shell and tube fluid terminal temperatures (2) Shell and tube fluid temperature profiles with respect to enthalpy (the following ‘methods assume linear profiles) (8) _ Variable heat transfer rates with respect to exchanger length (the following methods ‘assume a constant heat transfer rate through the length of the unit) (@) Heat exchanger geometry, spectcaly pass configuration, of the shel as well asthe tul -4.42 ISOTHERMAL SHELL FLUID/ISOTHERMAL TUBE FLUID, ALL PASS ARRANGEMENTS where T , = Shell side fluid inlet temperature, ° F T= Shell side fluid outlet temperature, °F t, =Tube side fluid inlet temperature, °F tz = Tube side fluid outlet temperature, °F T-4.43 ISOTHERMAL SHELL FLUID/LINEAR NONISOTHERMAL TUBE FLUID, ALL PASS. ARRANGEMENTS: T=T,=T2 t=TsLMTD 130 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationTHERMAL RELATIONS SECTION7 -4.44 LINEAR NONISOTHERMAL SHELL FLUID/I 4 LINEAR NONISO /ISOTHERMAL TUBE FLUID, ALL PASS iety=ty TetsLMTD -4.45 LINEAR NONISOTHERMAL SHELL AND TUBE FLUIDS, TYPE "E* SHELL ‘The average shell fluid temperature may be determined from the following equation: = 1 = Fer,-( Jerr ge The value of cedepends on tube pass geometry and flow direction as given below: Single pass tubes - cocurrent flow _MartifTinTa O°" TMTD el tah Single pass tubes - countercurrent flow _ia-tifTi=Ta_) O° MTD eal t= % Reece as: For cases where 0.99 < <1.01 useT=0.5(T,+T2) Even number of tube passes Ita-tiifTinTe iba Te | where LMT D = Cocurrent flow LMT D = LMT D. = Uncorrected countercurrent flow LMT D t1stesT 1, T2, are defined in Paragraph T-4.42 ‘The average tube fluid temperature may then be determined from the following equati i=TsLMTD(F) where F =LMT D Correction Factor ‘T-4.46 OTHER CASES For cases involving nonlinear temperature-enthalpy profiles and/or pass geometries other than those given above, other methods must be used to establish mean metal temperatures. However, with the assumption of constant overall heat transfer rate, the following relationship always applies: T-t=+LMTD(F) Ione fluid average temperature can be established accurately, knowing the effective mean temperature difference allows the other to be determined. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 131SECTION 7 THERMAL RELATIONS T-4.5 SELECTION OF THE DESIGN CASE All foreseeable modes of operation should be considered when specifying the metal temperatures to ‘be used for calculation of the equivalent differential expansion pressure. Consideration should be given to the following: (1) Normal operation, as specified by purchaser, under fouled conditions at the design flow rates, and terminal temperatures (2) Operation at less than the design fouling allowance (under such conditions, the purchaser should supply details in regard to anticipated operating parameters) Other operating conditions to which the equipment may be subjected, as specified by the purchaser, ‘may include, but are not necessarily limited to: e Cees (1) Alternate flow rates and/or terminal temperatures as may bé the case during start-up, shutdown, variable plant loads, etc. (2) Flow of a process fluid or clean fluid through one side, but not the other The largest posttive and negative values of equivalent differential expansion pressure generally correspond with the cases under which the largest positive and negative differential thermal growths ‘occur, an exception being if varying values of material modi lastioty alter the comparison. ‘The differential thermal growth between the shell and tubes is determined as follows: AL=L(a,(Ty~70}~ arty -70)) where AL = Differential thermal growth between the shell and tubes, inches L, = Tube length, face-to-face of tubesheets, inches 1, Coefficient of thermal expansion of the shell, inches/inch/ °F (see Table D-11) .y = Coefficient of thermal expansion of the tubes, inches/inch/ ° F (see Table D-11) T-4.6 ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS -4.61 SERIES ARRANGEMENTS Individual exchangers in series arrangements are generally subjected to different temperature conditions. Each individual exchanger should be evaluated separately. Alternately, all could bbe designed for the most severe conditions in the series. ‘-4.62 OTHER MODES OF OPERATION If fixed tubesheet heat exchangers are to be operated under conditions differing from those for which the initial design was checked, it is the purchaser's responsibility to determine that ‘such operation will not lead to a condition of overstress, This requires a full re-evaluation of required tubesheet thickness, shell and tube longitudinal stresses, tube-to-tubesheet joint loads, and flexible shell elements based on the new operating conditions. 132 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationTHERMAL RELATIONS SECTION 7 FIGURE T-3.1 CHART FOR SOLVING LMTD FORMULA Lup = (GTTD = LTT) reater Terminal Temperature Difference . esser Terminal Temperature Difference. 6 883883 é & 1 w 230-4080 60 70 80 90100 200300400300 600 800 1000, Greater Terminal Temperature Difference tar Terminal Temoera ‘Conedines By se Difference ang Lesser Terminal Temperature Oiferene NOTEAfor points not included on this sheet multity 6 Ey shy" tultpie ot 10 and give resulting value Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 133SECTION 7 THERMAL RELATIONS FIGURE T-3.2A 10 09 0.8 or EVEN NUMBER OF TUBE PASSES 06 LMTD CORRECTION FACTOR 04 05 P = TEMPERATURE EFFICIENCY 1 SHELL PASS 03 Ol 10; io 2 a 5 2 3 @ ° ° ° o YOLOVS NOILIZYHOD GLWT = 4 134 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationTHERMAL RELATIONS SECTION 7 FIGURE T-3.28 10 0.9 og o7 4 OR MULTIPLE OF 4 TUBE PASSES 06 LMTD CORRECTION FACTOR 04 0S P+ TEMPERATURE EFFICIENCY 02 03 2 SHELL PASSES on 2 a 2 5 ° 3 3 YOLOVS NOILO3HNOO OLN 4 io 2 2 ° 3 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 13SECTION7 THERMAL RELATIONS FIGURE T-3.2C g g 3 z a ¥ s 2 5 ae ea of << 3 z2 zz 18 § 3|8 & ajo v 0 812 & cle = Ele oo goo P/O e e| 9 es o) = BLS s| g z 5 a 0.59 10 o Q & os ° ° 3 YOLOVS NOILIZYYOD OLNT #3 136 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationTHERMAL RELATIONS SECTION 7 FIGURE T-3.2D 2 a a i: a | é we 2 2 3 |S 0 gs 5 (ee 8 |jz# 65 52 ae soa 5 Zo oO 2 Fo eas B a= 8 a = ul a4 oe a al + O3 0.2 On 10 a @ 5 ° 3 3 YOLOVS NOILOZHYOD OLN = 4 os 0.55 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 137seb uopelossy siesmoejnueyy seBueyoxg seINGNL euL JO SP1epUES F*LMTD CORRECTION FACTOR 06 Ol 02 03 04 P+ TEMPERATURE EFFICIENCY. LMTD CORRECTION FACTOR 5 SHELL PASSES 05 06 or 0.8 09 10 10 OR MORE EVEN NUMBER OF TUBE PASSES av'e-u auNOL 2NOLLOAS ‘SNOILV1SY TWNYSHLTHERMAL RELATIONS FIGURE T-3.2F o7 0.8 0.9 0.6 P = TEMPERATURE EFFICIENCY 12 OR MORE EVEN NUMBER OF TUBE PASSES 05 ; LMTO CORRECTION FACTOR 04 6 SHELL PASSES SECTION 7 03 0.2 Ol g e 2 & 3° 3 3 YOLDVS NOILOZHYOS GLNT=4 lo o e ° ° Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 139SECTION7 THERMAL RELATIONS FIGURE T-3.2G, 09 08 o7 08 ‘3 TUBE PASSES’ (2 COUNTER AND 1 COCURRENT) os [MTD CORRECTION FACTOR 4 P= TEMPERATURE EFFECTIVENESS 9, 1 SHELL PASS 03 hs on 02 ao t21¢ 17 1.00 8 g 8 g g 3 S S woLovs NOUDTUOD LWT #4 140 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationTHERMAL RELATIONS SECTION 7 FIGURE T-3.2H g = o a 3 2 oe S Ua 2 zc " z « 2 & = a{e 3 le 2 elie Z10 we 5\° fe 2 ae £ lo v Ble a Slz a 5/78 a4 2g 3 < rt = g == 2 8 5 +1 + TT tc 4 1 {pao LH wOLDVa NOILIIUY s a oe 5 S in - ° o ° ° o Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 141SECTION7 THERMAL RELATIONS 142 a 8 g = u 8 2 lg io ie oO ez a z |e So & Ble = z|a = |e SIS o Ele gia ee e/E gd] é 2/3 3 g|7- = 2 oj | # o 2 ' Q 2 - a —— ir & i R= 20.0 = =f oe WOLIVS NOTLI3YYOD GIWT = J=— SS ¢ % = in ee - o ° ° ° Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationTHERMAL RELATIONS FIGURE T-3.2J 2 105 06 04 Pp = TEMPERATURE. EFFICIENCY g o 2 = = 3 3 3 YOLOVS NOILOZHYOD OLN1=4 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association @ 2 2 2 = w 3 ze ‘ a lac SB 5 = io 5 atz Ju = = Be Fas iO aed lt 8 3 a io = es SB = a 8 2 2 a eee SECTION7 143vol uonelossy sienjoesnuew se6ueyoxg seIngn, SUL JO SPAEPUEIS F+LMTD CORRECTION FACTOR os 06 O7 0.8 09 on 02 03 : o4 os Ps TEMPERATURE EFFICIENCY qr LMTD CORRECTION FACTOR E t, | SPLIT FLOW SHELL 2 TUBE PASSES fee Ey tet Ik J eee ieee 0, e ° ° ° - o 146 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationTHERMAL RELATIONS SECTION7 FIGURE T-3.38 TEMPERATURE EFFICIENCY, COUNTERFLOW EXCHANGERS me ‘S00 Par. 7-33 LU ~ Overall heat transtorcoetticient os A= Total Surface w= Flow rate of tube fluid W = Flow rate of shel fuid c= Specific heat of tube fluid a C= Soc atten 07) TW , 7 4 is “| La au yo Test TT ea 7 i ic 2 C ea Cerri i — aan berth oF fees imi ea oni ee UA/we Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 147SECTION7 THERMAL RELATIONS FIGURE T-3.3B 10 TEMPERATURE EFFICIENCY EVEN NUMBER OF TUBE PASSES os! LU = Overall heat transfer costicient A Total Surface w= Flow rate of tube fluid = Flow rate of shel uid 03 = Specitic heat of tube fluié C= Specific heat of shell uid 07; ry 05} 03| | oa OF Cr 2 a 4s 6 8 VAruc 148 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association07 oa] os| | 03 02| Or THERMAL RELATIONS SECTION 7 FIGURE T-3.3C 19) TEMPERATURE EFFICIENCY ‘2 SHELL PASSES. ‘4.0R MULTIPLE OF 4 TUBE PASSES Patents 24 spore 133 Tit akg. 13.28 os| R= woWC LU = Overall heat wansfer coeticent A= Total Surface w= Flow rate of tube fuld 7 = Flow rate of shell lua = Specific heat of tube fluid C= Specific heat of shell ic a 2 34 6 VA/we Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 149SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS (Note: This ction is not metricated) P-1 FLUID DENSITY P-1.1 SPECIFIC GRAVITY OF LIQUID PETROLEUM FRACTIONS petroleum fractions and saturated light hydrocarbons are shown P-1.2 DENSITY OF ORGANIC LIQUIDS ‘The general density nomograph Fig. P-1.2 permits the approximation of the density of organic liquids at temperatures between -150° F and +500°F, if densities at two temperatures are known. Table P-1.2 lists the coordinates on the center grid for locating the reference points for 6 compounds. The reference point for a substance may be determined if the density is known for two different temperatures, The intersection point of he two straight lines joining the corresponding values ofthe known temperatures and densities is the desired reference point of the substance. P-1.3 COMPRESSIBILITY FACTORS FOR GASES AND VAPORS ‘The P- v - T relationships for gases and vapors may conveniently be expressed by the equation Pu= ZRT, where Pis the absolute pressure, vis the specific volume, T is the absolute temperature, Ris a constant which may be found by dividing the universal gas constant F by the molecular weight of the gas, and Z is the compressibility factor. Z has the value of unity for an ideal gas under all conditions and, therefore, is a measure of the extent of the deviation of a real gas or vapor from the ideal state. Figures P-1.3A, P-1.3B, P-1.9C are generalized plots of compressibility factor as a function of reduced pressure, P/P., and reduced temperature, T/T .. The dotted curves represent constant values of the pseudo-reduced volume uv,” = u/ (RT ./P..) where the subseript crefers to the critical value. These may be used to calculate pressure (or temperature) when the temperature (or pressure) and specific volume are known. If Pis expressed in pounds per square‘inch, vin cubic feet per pound, and T in degrees Rankine, the numerical value of FIs 10.73. For critical property data, see Paragraph P-6. P-2 SPECIFIC HEAT - 7 ~ P-2.1 LIQUID PETROLEUM FRACTIONS = ee ‘The speotc heats of guid ptrleum factions of various AP graviies ave shown as functions of temperature in Figure P-2.1. The specific heat versus temperature lines shown apply to virgin mid-continent stock and must be corrected for other stocks. An inset curve of this correction factor versus characterization factor is provided. P-2.2 PETROLEUM VAPORS ‘The specific heats of petroleum vapors of various characterization factors are shown as functions of temperature in Figure P-2.2. P-2.3 PURE HYDROCARBON GASES ‘The low pressure specific heats of a number of pure hydrocarbons are shown as functions of temperature in Figures P-2.3A, P-2.9B and P-2.3C. P-2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LIQUIDS AND GASES The specfc heats of miscellaneous liquide and gases at various temperatures may be ree from the alignment charts, Figures P-2.4A and P-2.48. P-2.5 GASES AND VAPORS AT ELEVATED PRESSURES Spectfic heat data in Figures P-2.2,P-2.3A, P-2.3C and P-2.48 apply only at pressures low enough so ‘that the specific heats are not significantly affected by pressure ‘Changes. At higher pressures, spectfic heats may be substantially higher than the low pressure values. Figure P-2.5 is a generalizec Chart which may be used to calculate the approximate correction to the low pressure specific heat 150 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationPHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS SECTIONS for any gas at high pressure. The isothermal change in molal specific heat, AC »= C.-C »%, is plotted against reduced pressure, P, , with reduced temperature, 7 , , as a parameter. Outside the range of the char, the following empirical equations are accurate enough for most practical purposes. For7,> 1.2andC,<2,4C,-5.03P,/T, °, for, <1.2and AC,<2.5,4C,=9P,/T, * For crtical property data, see Paragraph P-6.1 and P-6.2 P-3 HEAT CONTENT Heat content of petroleum fractions, including the effect of pressure, are shown as functions of temperature and API gravity for various UOP K values in Figure P-3.1. The latent heats of vaporization of various liquids may be estimated by the use of Figure P-3.2, The recommended range of use is indicated for the compounds listed. * ‘See Table P-3.3 for heat capacity ratios for various gases. P.4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY P-4.1 CONVERSION OF UNITS Table P-4.1 gives factors for converting thermal conductivity values from one set of units to another. 4.2 HYDROCARBON LIQUIDS ‘The thermal conductivities of liquid normal paraffinic hydrocarbons are shown in Figure P-4.2. P-4.3 MISCELLANEOUS LIQUIDS AND GASES Tables P-4.3A and P-4.3B give tabulated values of thermal conductivity for a number of liquids and ‘gases at atmospheric pressure. P-4.4 GASES AND LIQUIDS AT ELEVATED PRESSURES Thermal conductivity for gases at elevated pressure can be corrected by the use of Figure P-4.4A. Thermal conductivity for iquids at elevated pressure can be corrected by the use of Figure P-4.4B. ‘This chart is intended for use above 500 psia and when T/T is less than 0.95. P-5 VISCOSITY P-5.1 VISCOSITY CONVERSION ‘viscosity conversion plot, Figure P-5.1, provides a means of converting viscosity from Saybolt, Redwood or Engler time to kinematic viscostty in centistokes. The absolute viscosity in centipoises may be determined by muttiplying the kinematic viscosity in centistokes by the specific gravity. ‘Table P-5.1 gives factors for converting viscosity values to various systems of units. P.5.2 PETROLEUM OILS The viscosities of petroleum oils having Watson and Nelson (UOP) characterization factors of 10.0, 11.0, 11.8 and 12.5 are shown plotted against temperatures in Figures P-5.2A, P-5.2B, P-5.2C and P4520. P.5.3 LIQUID PETROLEUM FRACTIONS Figures P-5.3A and P-5.3B give viscosity data for a number of typical petroleum fractions plotted as straight lines on ASTM viscosity charts. ‘These charts are so constructed that for any given petroleum oil the viscosity-temperature points lie on a straight line. They are, therefore, a convenient fneans for determining the viscosity of a petroleum oil at any temperature, provided viscosities at two temperatures are known. Streams of similar API gravity may have widely different viscosities; therefore, values of viscosity shown here should be considered as typical only. P-5.4 MISCELLANEOUS LIQUIDS AND GASES ‘The viscosities of certain liquids are shown as functions of temperature in Figure P-5.4A, The viscosities of certain gases and vapors at one atmosphere pressure are given by Figure P-5.4B. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 151SECTIONS PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS P-5,5 EFFECT OF PRESSURE ON GAS VISCOSITY Figure P-5.5 is a generalized chart which may be used to estimate the viscosities of gases and vapors at elevated pressure if the critical temperature and pressure and the viscosity at low pressure are known. ‘The Viscosity ratio, i p/ Haim. IS plotted against reduced pressure, ? , with reduced temperature, 7. , as a parameter, where, arm and i» are respectively the viscosities at atmospheric pressure and at pressure P. For critical property data, see Paragraph P-6. P-6 CRITICAL PROPERTIES P.6.1 PURE SUBSTANCES, Table P-6.1 gives values of the molecular weights, critical temperatures, and critical pressures for a variety of pure compounds. For the calculation of compressibility factor, itis recommended that the Sigal pressures gn temperatures of hydrogen, helum, and neon be inereased by 118 psi and P-6.2 GAS AND VAPOR MIXTURES Figures P-1.3, P-2.5, and P-5.5 may be used to estimate the properties of gas mixtures as well as, pure substances if pseudo-oritical properties are used in place of the critical values. The pseudo-critical temperature and pressure are defined as follows: ea eon ee a ot YT en Peet Y Pat YaPeat int YaPen where Y , ¥ 2, etc. are the mole fractions of the individual components and 7) 7-2, etc., and. Pes P 2, @tc. are their critical temperatures and pressures. P-7 PROPERTIES OF GAS AND VAPOR MIXTURES, To estimate properties of a gas or vapor mixture for which the individual component fractions and properties are known, the folowing formulas may be Used: P-7.1 SPECIFIC HEAT Come = XC op * X26 p rt Xu Cow P-7.2 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY KiY (M+ Ka¥2(Ma)' 8+ ¥i(Mi) + (Ma)? oot Ku ¥ CM)? +¥n(My)® K nie P-7.3 VISCOSITY eM "2+ we (M2)? + HnY nC My)! YM)? + Ya Ma)" 2 + ooo # Ye M ye) where, for component "N* Xx" Weight Fraction Mole Fraction Molecular Weight Specific Heat ‘Thermal Conductivity Viscosity 152 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationPHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS SECTION 8 P-8 SELECTED REFERENCES (1) Reid, R. C. and Sherwood, T. K., "Properties of Gases and Liquids", 2nd Ed., McGraw-Hill Book Company, inc., New York, 1968. (2) Comings, €. W., "High Pressure Technology", McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1956. (8) Hougen, 0. A., Watson, K.M., Ragatz, R. A., “Chemical Process Principles’, Part 1, 2nd Ed., John Wiley & Sons, inc., New York, 1956, (4) Tsederberg, N. V.,. “Thermal Conductivities of Gases and Liquids", The M.LT. Press, Massachusetts, Institute of Technology, Cambridge, Massachusetts, 1965. (6) Yaws, C. L, "Physical Properties, Chemical Engineering’, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 197. (©) Galtant, R. W., "Physical Properties of Hydrocarbons", Vol. 1 & 2, Gulf Publishing Co., Houston, Texas, 1968. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 153sh uonepossy sseunjoesnue; JeBueyoxg Jeingn euL 10 SPIEPUEIS srecirie cavity e_100 200 x wo. 00 700 100 1000 "TenrenaTune OF Oil — BEGREES 7: APPROXIMATE SPECIFIC GRAVITY 1.00 oF 1.00 PETROLEUM FRACTIONS at HIGH TEMPERATURES 0.00) 0.00 (Accuracy, +10%) vor x 0.00 ifo.00 0.70 | E 0.80 oe 0.40 700 wo ‘0 700 ‘900 1000 ‘TENPERATURE OF O1L— DEGREES Fe bd auNDId 8 NOILOAS ‘SGINT4 4O SALLYAdOUd TWOISAHdPHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS SECTION 8 FIGURE P-1.2 7 7 ‘ : 92-B-1a § 200-4 2 z z 9.0 @ é & 3 =e g a 4 £ 2 . : B 20 °F ee tbs. per U.S. Gallon 2 5 7s Density ‘Temperature 70 6s 60 55 5.0 ae ‘40.50 x vane Paz =o XC AND ¥ VALUES FOR DENSITY NOMOGRAPH So eee hee, 8 BE Bate "i wee et Bi gyms gg ge panes Be wu i ue ee oe oe OB Oe HB Be ae Ind. Engr. Chem. Vol 40,5,883°5 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 155gst uonejossy sieunjoesnuew seBueyord Jeinqn eUL 10 SPAePUEIS FACTOR, Z=B% COMPRESSIBILITY 1.00] 0.90] 0.80) 0.70} 0.60} 0.50} 0.40} 0.30] 0.0 Tee Tx 152 7,23.00 == =DEVI 1.0% | NELSON — OBERT GENERALIZED COMPRESSIBILITY CHARTS ‘RepuceD PRESSUR ot eoucen Tewrenarume, +f psevoo neouceo voLUME, Ym CHART No 1 LOW PRESSURE RANGE Or 02 05 0.6 PRESSURE, p_ 0.7 0.8 1.0 Ve'l-d aUNDI 8 NOLLOAS SGIN14 4O S3LLH3dOd TWOISAHdPHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-1.38, ‘GENERALIZED COMPRESSIBILITY CHARTS NELSON — [NTERMEDUTE PRESSURE RANGE ane unis vom. rig] 2 semen semen, 1%, Ber bez ‘wolowa survetsssuanoo Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association SECTIONS 187esh uonepossy sieunjoesnue; JeBueyoxg JejNgn{ SUL 10 SPePUEIS COMPRESSIBLITY FACTOR, 2+ NELSON— OBERT GENERALIZED COMPRESSIBILITY CHARTS oh estes vere 1%, race neve vot, Ym, HIGH PRESSURE RANGE CHART No 3 20 REDUCED |PRESSURE, 98'l-d 3HNDIS 8 NOILOaS ‘SIN14 40 S3ILYAdOUd IWOISAHdPHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-2.1 SPECIFIC HEATS OF PETROLEUM FRACTIONS LIQUID STATE fer = tae 0308s + 10.0008'5-0 000045) x (988K +035) 8, AY 60" F./40" = CHARACTERIZATION FACTOR NOTE FOR MIDCONTINENT STOCKS (WHERE 'USE WITHOUT CORRECTION FACTOR, BTU/LB.X DEGREE F. G s rr er i ee ‘TEMPERATURE - DEGREES F. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association SECTION 8 159SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-2.2 90 ca SPECIFIC HEATS OF PETROLEUM FRACTIONS VAPOR PHASE 080 SPECIFIC HEAT - BTU/LB. X DEGREE F. oas uo 03s LUNES OF CONSTANT WATSON CHARACTERIZATION FACTOR = ——"——__FAILON & WATEON, 02s ‘SF ORG 60". —NATIONAL PETROLEUM NEWS ‘Tu = MEAN BOILING POINT, DEG, RANKINE JUNE 7, 1944 POS. R372, R375 (06. R= DEC. f+ 460) 0% ed ‘TEMPERATURE - DEGREES F. 160 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationPHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS. SECTIONS FIGURE P.2.38 nora | NAUTANE NPENTANE NHERANE BTU/LB. XDEGREE F. °, ‘SPECIFIC HEATS oF N-PARAFFINIC GASES Apt poster 44 NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS a a ee) TEMPERATURE DEGREES F. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 161SECTION 8 os 070 4s = BTU/LB. X DEGREE F. a c e & 4s 400 oa 162 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-2.38 ferent frente etorent reorehe © Eile SPECIFIC HEATS oF N-MONO-OLEFINIC GASES NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS. a TT TEMPERATURE DEGREES F. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 1700= BTU/LB. XDEGREE F. G PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS SECTION 8 FIGURE P-2.30 0800 EYCLOEXANE 070 GYCLOPENTANE 0680 Enya, Benzene 0400 BENZENE 000 ‘SPECIFIC HEAT oF ome AROMATIC. AND CYCLO-PARAFFINIC. GASES cae APL prosser 4 [NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS 020 0.200 a a a ‘TEMPERATURE DEGREES F. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 163SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-2.44 SPECIFIC HEATS OF LIQUIDS ra wae SPECIFIC Slee Rac mar ig oor | 400 ~y | 33/88 ig ae B18 xa 2 i & i 4° O4n 3 03 4 00 4 | BABE ee nye ‘Es. BE ena 2 [Baume oy tee 8 LEE ao SL EROAS mo HIRRAE BR noo 4 | FIRE Bin “ ENCE oS . SERED re 3 as 160 3 . ° 08 100 09 5330 wo By permission trom Heat Transmission, by W. H. McAdams. Copyrighied 1954. McGraw Hill Book Company, Inc. 164 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationDeg F 0 200 400 600 800 4000 4200 1400 400 \600 2000 2200 2400 2600 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-2.48 SPECIFIC HEATS-GASES 1 ATM. C= Specific heot = Btu/ILb) (Deg F) = Peu/(Lb) (deg) TAS AEFYLENE, AMnonia ‘Anson DIOXIDE CARBON MONOXIDE CHLORINE ETHANE ETHYLENE maaoee ee FRBROREN [aae" FYBRBSEN SULPhioe mettiane nergic oxioe itaagen! Deven SULBIRE vont water Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association orSECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS. FIGURE P-2.5 c, —6,(BTU/MOL x *R) 02 oe Generalized Isothermal Pressure Correction to Molal Heat Capacity ‘of Gases Cp Melal Hest Copeciy ot High Presure ° 3 Ba es Oe 18 7 4 Aeprinted by permicson from Inéustial and Ensineeing Chemistry, vol. 49, p. 12, 187, A. H. Weiss and J. foe 166 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationPHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS SECTION 8 FIGURE P-3.1 HEAT CONTENT OF PETROLEUM FRACTIONS INCLUDING THE EFFECT OF PRESSURE HEAT CONTENT, Btu/b _, febattction racton 8 gs 8g 3] 3 a ‘TEMPERATURE, *F Aeprined by permiian of Shell Development Comseny.Copyisht 194. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 167SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS 168 Sg ee tsa 6 8 s 3838 poatititit pdivtiidit det n Luustuul FIGURE P-3.2 LATENT HEATS OF VAPORIZATION OF VARIOUS LIQUIDS t. | Range LguID elite x] ¥ Testo nos os [212392 [ss | nn 488 | faces | £9 | 108 22 | irease | 32 | 38 S52 | “soa72 |e [125 507 | 1048198 | 26 | re iseag2 | [117 aya | teraas [34 | 12 : aus | Serre | 20 508 | 3oza92 | 17 ri 393819 | 63 Bul steanel seep | $08 | 387.817 [Se But seanot ctor) | 435 | 302392 | 39 Earben costco i | s0z12 [33 Saroon suites | 522 | anesay | 33 EXioon tetrachoriae | S42 | -s0572 | 36 Shirin 231 | aizage | 1s Chloroform 506 | 3as.s06 Brehlroetnylene ele) | 88 | 392872 amine $29 | 280302 Bipnens! 382 | “$0.90 3 i 3 BSESeeSsstesssseseess: Freonaitenckr — | a8 | 76437 Freon22(GHelFs) | 208 Freon iia ecircoies | 427 | 196-482 Freon itd (CIF) | 293 Heptane Bie | "eosny [34 esane (=) 456 | gee [34 [133 Methane fis | Soase [8 ora ss 67 8 FTO x Frichoroetnytene | $20 | 355-882 at peebbosbehsissiacacess! Example:—For water at 212°F, t.—t = 707-21: latent’heat per Ib is 970 Btu 495 and the (Latent hest accurate within + 10 per cent) From “Process Heat Transfer” Ist Ed, Donald Q. Kern: MeGraw.till Book Company, reprinted by permission. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association ce Latent heat, Btu/IbPHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS TABLE P-3.3 HEAT CAPACITY RATIOS (C,/Cv) Acetylene 1.26 Air 1.403 ‘Ammonia 1.310 ‘Argon 1.688 Benzene 41.10 (200° F) Carbon Dioxide 1.904 Chlorine 1.355 Dichlorodiffouromethane 1.199 (77°F) Ethane 1.22 Ethyl Alcohol 4.13 (200°F) Ethyl Ether 1.08 (95°F) Ethylene 1.255 Helium 41,660 (-292° F) Hexane (n-) 1.08 (176°F) Hydrogen 1.410 Methane 1.31 Methyl Alcohol 1.203 (171° F) Nitrogen 1.404 Oxygen 1.401 Pentane (1) 1.086 (189° F) Sulfur Dioxide 129 > {All values at 60 ° F and one atmosphere unless otherwise noted) TABLE P-4.1 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY CONVERSION FACTORS To convert the numerical value of a property expressed in one of the unite in the left-hand column of the table to the pumerical Value expressed in one of the unite in the lop row of the table, multiply the former value by the factor in the Block common to both unite SECTION 8 [— Bu Be = = wate angie Fev | Rominas Fit baceecanan@mrca|iaae-ao Crm | aemnae Chee taf Sra 1 0.08333 9.445 X 107 0.1240 1422 X 10° rae a per fe 12.00 1 4.194 10% 1.488 0.01731 nemo | 2008 mis 1 20 aae7 | 8064 0.6720 2.778 X 10 * 0.01163 Sai OR 6934 5778 02388 85.98 1 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 169SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-4,2 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF NORMAL PARAFFINIC HYDROCARBON LIQUIDS £2 lant, Robert W. “Physical Properties of Hydrocarbons” Gulf Publishing Company (1968) ‘Michaelian, M. S. & Lockhart, F. J. “Uquid’ thermal Conductivities™ Univ. of Southern California (1968) BTU THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY 170 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationPHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-~ 3A THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF LIQUIDS Ali the date are recommended = Bi thedteg °F. /) raion with temperature may be assumed, The extreme values given conaiule also the tempersure linite over which SECTION 8 Liquid K Liquid ner] Acetic Acid 68 | .092|| Formaldehyde =o | as 300 | 78) 0 | se Acetone 0 | 83 68 | us 170 | 076|} Glycerine . 68 | 161 Acetylene m0 | 137 30 | “181 =110 | 088]] Heptane (N) so | 74 2 | 957] 300 | 050 Aerylie Acid 32 | -144|| Hexene (mt) so | o7 100 | 124 300 | 048 320 | (096|] Heptyi Alcohol 68 | 077 Allyl Alcohol 6a | 95} 280 | 071 212 | 092|| Hexyt Alcohol 8 | o77 Amyl Alcohol 8 | aa] 250 | ‘074 212 | 085|] Methylethyl-Ketone (MEK) 0 | 089 Aniline 68 | 139 2s0 | 087 300 | (089|| Mothy! Alcohol (Methanol) 2 | sz Benzene 68 | 08s 300 | ‘096 058|] Nonane (N) so | o7 Bromobenzene 5 300 | ‘056 1058] Octane so | 076 Butyl Acetate (N) 082} 00 | 054 056 |} Para Xylene se | 075 Butyl Alcohol (150) 100 176 | 065 87 320 | 07 107|| Pentene 0 | 068 ‘ors 20 | ‘048 Butyl Alcohol (N) 104] Propyl Alcohol (N) —40 | 108, 064 300 | ‘07 Carbon Disullide 1084} Propyl Alcohol (180) 40 | 092 072 uo | 075 Carbon Tetrachloride on 300 | 072 iz | 052] Toluene 32 | 088 Chlorobenzene 32 | 075) 390 | 080 380 | 068] trichloroethylene ~40 | o8¢ (Chloroform 100 | ‘oes 6 | 085 iz | .0s6| 300 | 046 Cumene 32 | ‘075]| viny! Acetate 32 | 088 390 | 050 220 | 08s Cyclohexane 40 | -089|| Water a2 | 340 100 | ‘o8i 10 | 369 so | 060 200 | 389 Dichlorodifluoromethene 20 | 068 300 | 39s so | ‘oss ao | 376 40 | 058 620 | 275 Ethyl Acetate ..... 32 | .086|! Xylene (Ortho) 32 | 087 230 | 06s] 176 | 058 Ethyl Alcohol =o | 10 3s0 | 048 300 | ‘080 ] Xylene (Meta) 32 | 080 Ethyl Benzene 32 | 080 176 | 062 390 | 045] 300 | ote Extacted from "Physical Properties of Hydrocarbons" BY RW. Gallet, Copyright 198, Galf Publihing Co, ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 171SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-4.38, THERMAL CONDUCTIVITIES OF GASES AND VAPORS (k = BTU/(hrl(sq t1)(deg. F per ft)] TEMPERATURE “F. Substance se | — 18 32 iz2_[_2i2 382 S72 w Acetone 007 | 0076 | 0033 | 0187 Acetylene ooss | 0108 | ‘0140 | 0172 Air 0040 | 0081 | 0140 soled | 0224 | 0260 ‘Ammonia ‘o0s7* | ‘0126 sois2 | ‘0280 | 0385 | 05 Argon ‘9063 | ‘0095 0123, o14s_| ‘oi Benzene 0052 | 0075 | 0103 | 0166, Butane (n-) 0078 (0135 Butane (iso-) 0080 (0138 Carbon dioxide ~0064* | 0084 0128) 0177_—*| 0229 Carbon disulfide “0040 ‘Carbon monoxide 0037 | 0088 | ‘0134 0176 Carbon tetrachloride 0042 | ‘0052 | 0068 Chlorine 0043 Chloroform ‘0038 | 0087 0081 Gyclohexane Dichlorodifluoromethane| 0048 __[ 0064 “ous Ethane “0055 | 0106 Ethyl acetate 0074 0150 Ethyl alcohol 2081 Ethyl chloride -0055 014s, Ethyl ether (0077 | 9101 ‘0200 Ethylene 0051 oi01_| ‘0131 Helium 0338 | 0612 | 0818 Heptane (n.) oz Hexane (n-) 0072 | 0080+ Hexene ‘9061 Hydrogen 0233 | 0652 | 0966 s4e4 | 1705, Hydrogen sulfide 078 Mercury “0187 Methane ois | 0109 | 0176 .o2ss | ‘0358 | 0490 Methyl acetate ‘0088 | .ov6s¢ Methyl alcohol 0083 0128 Methyl chloride ‘0053 | 0074 | -oos4 | 0140 ‘Methylene chloride ‘oo3s_| ‘0050 | ‘006s __| ‘0091 Neon 0026 Nitric oxide 003 | (0138 | 0161 Nitrogen oogo | 0081 | 0139 ois. | .0220 | oss | 0: Nitrous oxide :0047_| 9088 20138 Oxygen ooss_| oor | 142 | oes | 0188 Pentane (a) 0074 | 00837 Pentane (iso-) 0072 0127 Propane ‘0087 ‘0151 ‘Sulfur dioxide 0050 0088 Water vapor, zero presse oi36_| orga _| 0290 + Value at — 56°F 1 Value at 68° F. [Adapted {rom Hea! Transmission, by W. H, McAdams, Copyrighiod 19S4, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Incorporated. 172 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationSECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-4.4A “4 eunsseid paonpay oé6éee9 s 4 € z or 80 90 vo 0 zo “a wouenuenia 4 = 44 a 2 visa ‘enmead you9 = "4 ‘ainsiag = (set) zre-6ts'6r ‘008d “ONS “WAHD ‘SONIWOD ANN "BIONST “49H NOUYIRIOD GHZIIVEINIO-NOUDIWOD zUNSSHNE ‘SISYO"AUAU2NGNOD TWH oF AG 173 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationTHERMAL CONDUCTIVITY FACTOR e, & 6, SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS 174 FIGURE P-4.4B THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY-tIQUIDS PRESSURE CORRECTION—GENERALIZED CORRELATION REF. LENOIR, J. M, PET, REF, 26, 162-164 (1957) "Note: To find themel conducticy fa at presure Py nd lemperoie T, row valve by nie (: J aS own thermal conductivity et any prenore Pi and temperctore T Deve Herel cond a and Thermal sR(= 460 + °F) Ciel temperoiure, "R 7, dimansonless REDUCED PRESSURE, P, 20203 4 5 6 7 8 9 ww ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 12PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS SECTION 8 TABLE P-5.1 VISCOSITY CONVERSION FACTORS ‘centipoises. potnes = ae = oe a ® ie = 1 a1 00872 noo208 242 soot 100 1 87a aos ma 102 te ee 4g 1 wu 3600 1si7 ee 47900 a m2 1 18000 408 = 413 0413 00278 ‘0000864 t ‘s000421 639 008 2370 1 it 'SPEGFIC GRAVITY ‘ABSOLUTE viscosity KINEMATIC VISCOSITY-CENTISTOKES = ‘expressed in one of the FIGURE P-5.1 ie in the lelthand column of the table to the in the top row of the table, multiply the former valus by the factor in the VISCOSITY CONVERSION PLOT ENGLER DEGREES L f SES bales SS onvernenagy q f moe i HORI Trwese cunves ARE ORAWN TO FIT THE roLLOWiNa| EQUATIONS WHiCl MAY Be USED FOR EXTRAPOLATION BEYOND THE nanos PLOTTED, VEOLT UNIVERGAL. FROM EXPERIMENTAL OATA © SAVEBCE ONNEREAE SORE neow000 H0.1 Keaam-S! WHEN tots TO a0 BED (0 EOWOOD NO. 2 t/¥XREDADOO HO TE ston ao2 2) on eae 4 een ca TIME IN SECONDS-SAYBOLT (UNIVERSAL & FUROL!, REDWOOD Nov.1 & 2, ENGLER TIME Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 175SECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-5.24 VISCOSITY TEMPERATURE RELATIONSHIP FOR PETROLEUM OILS ot: Wetton, Wier & Murphy, Indutiel & Eaginezing Chemistry 28,605 (836, SEE reat 5 2 be beaut cP oe ae 1, CENTISTOKES. FIGURE P-5.28 SCOSITY — TEMPERATURE RELATIONSHIP FOR PETROLEUM OIL! ‘GuaRACTENZATION Facto, et: Watton, Wien & Murphy, Indusval & Engineering Chemistry 2.605. (1836) zs .. Bt - » Steet orale al peoe tear ese cetvistoKes ae: I oon op ee L Sane as Tape 176 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationPHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS SECTION 8 FIGURE P-5.2C VISCOSITY — TEMPERATURE RELATIONSHIP FOR PETROLEUM OILS LUNES OF CONSTANT DEGREES A. CHARACTERIZATION FACTOR, K = Retr Watson, Wien § Murphy, Indunvial & Engineering Chemistry 28.98 (1836) TEMPERATURE °F bbe eeRas tof ee eo oe CENTISTOKES Jeavecur yveRsaL sete be ecanoerect SEO RRA SNES os, FIGURE P-5.20 VISCOSITY — TEMPERATURE RELATIONSH FOR PETROLEUM OILS ‘GUABACTIRZATION FACTOR, X= 125 Ral: Watson, Wien & Murphy, Indutit & Enginearing Chemistry 2.6059 (1906) TEMPERATURE °F Doers s moe aa SENTISTOKES fe woot tees tet pct ot Pee) [saveoxt vwegsat see tees SRVEOLT REL SONS aT, Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 7PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-5.3A, SECTION 8 ‘pet abu may prone, LOA Lomaoqussorpiy vo Yom DiOg,, oH “{ °M “wePUTT “9D HuLeeNIbNG PuD yuDeNY OmmE TOUR BP towetaaad Ag Si ee ‘dy aunUveaaNaL, (ae Soe'e2 Ho Aa ON hewn ONY NI “NOI even oro wrstaw ‘aus wna 20 s-ine. suave nunuvNaanOL~auSO9SA OuvONNAS WA Sy 532022024 livHasy * wanaisaa lav 202 WO Tan dv oll (AOL OL a¥S) 10 FN IdY OE 7 3qNYD tav OF 3ONVY HOI ALISODSIA DILWWANDL SNOILDVad WNSTOUI3d GNY SNOBYIOWGAH AUVHD FINLVAIdWAL — ALISODSIA OOF Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 178SECTIONS PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-5.3B oo} ovo] oso} oxo} 90} oso} 0011 ost ozfe of] o»| os| 03| on] sgt 204, May “Azoduop puonsoN wap 1 Ag etaqunc0IpAHE Ho Hoe SIEM, OH “TN “wopuN ‘eo GuNseubuE puP Yoroerey Seed “Teuho bskda® aAt yo. vrnTa Si H o~ gunuessawal i (aeerbgos'as wave “ova Ow icurm on NIK "HOSL¥A (aye 92 wou ‘SOLS woe 30H 6e-1wea sium sunuMiaen3i -AUSOOSA OwOWIS WEY “S3ONEH BIVTUSIG 1a¥ OE 3ONVY MOT ALISODSIA DILYWANDL SNOUDVas WNTOUI3d GNY SNORYIOUGAH AYVHD JYNLVAIdWAL — ALISOISIA i 1s o org ost 9 ems da oz0 loro. lovo joso isjov0 ozo logo joso joo 179 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationPHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-5.4A, VISCOSITIES OF LIQUIDS AT 1 ATM. SECTION 8 ba huodueg 3099 WHADIOOH 6 “oat “Aendeng 4008 MEMEIDON Sst POE swoon rn nora con moe sn 3-1 goonone Su! HOS io x of Of euanaote seis 4 La = oO to a ~ oe to 0 He = o fo 0 09 8 Ste ; oe z os $e ou 2 oa bes oa onto : ost to , ost a : stor $e : ah Fog I BEF oot , se eit on (oF ou oe Bt on a : Bet on ‘et OF or SEF on io ore t OL 7 3 E 5 2 BA on : out : Sido, : 169 aoe : 10 28, fe Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 180SECTIONS: ATM. FIGURE P-5.4B PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS VISCOSITIES OF GASES AND VAPORS AT 1 stesso Wt Pt sede s tePt swore i ova ann eet suet oon benno won oan s000 oe : sa 3B 900-F os Hoe 9 + ZO ost oon ; ane ost = . ‘000 oou : : ‘ovo oot 3 : ‘00 000 2 = : = O08 o « oor : oo. 3 oos : ove 7 wo i oor : : oot t wo : oot : v0 t oot : avo $+ Wa[ : . seo to soo oa too ro oot sat 160 ake Kredi aangousdweL, 181 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationSECTION 8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS FIGURE P-5.5, HIGH PRESSURE GAS VISCOSITY 10 REDUCED TEMPERATURE Te = a uo VISCOSITY RATIO jip/ ptm oa 02 03 04 05 os 2 10 REDUCED PRESSURE — Pr= = eprint by permnson em Chemical Eapinwing Progen Symposiam Sin 81, No, 16; 1855 N-l- Car J.D, Parent, and BLE, Peck. TABLE P-6.1 : CRITICAL PROPERTY DATA. Subetonee ‘weit aa omega $e ~ g & ae a ale) & | e| 2 ele | a |B) 2 a | @ | s a | a |e] & | B | Veto z a | |G [cee el] 2 | 2 | 2 lee. @| 3 Se ge | | gle 2 | o enecne| ee | | Reeth e| # ee eo |e | @ [ess | o Ethylene 208 510 70 Sulfolane ue oe Ethy! Alcohol 461 330 ms Sulfur Dioxide a ug Ethyl Benzene 106.18 au 36 Trichloroethyiene as s Fluorine 3B 260 oe Vinyl Acetate: ae = Formaldehyde 0m, 738 cg Vinyl Chloride 102g a Helium 4003, Jo 332_| Water 18s on 182 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 CONTENTS TABLE TIME PAGE D-1 Dimensions of Welded and Seamless Pipe. 184 D-2 __ Dimensions of Welded Fittings... i 185 D3 Dimensions of ASME Standard Flanges. 186-187 D5 _Bolting Data - Recommended Minimum.. 188 DSM Metric Bolting Data - Recommended 189 D6 Pressure - Temperature Ratings for Valves, Fitings and Flanges, 190-229 0-7 Characteristics of Tubing.. 230 D-7M Characteristics of Tubing (Metrio). 231 D8 Hardness Conversion Table.. é 232 D9 Internal Working Pressures of Tubes At Various Values of Alowable Stress. 233-295 D-10 Modulus of Elasticity... Se 296 D-10M Modulus of Elastictty (Mettio)...nnnmnnmnnnnenn 237 D-11. Mean Coefficients of Thermal Expansion... 238 D-11M_ Mean Coefficients of Thermal Expansion (Metric) 239 D-12 Thermal Conductivity of Metals..... 240 D-12M Thermal Conductivity of Metals (Metric). 241 D-13_ Weights of Circular Rings and Discs... 242-247 D-14 Chord Lengths and Areas of Circular Segments... 248, D5 Conversion Factors.. 249-250 D-16 Conversion Tables for Wie and Sheet Metal Gages. 251 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 183SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION ‘ante Da DIMENSIONS OF WELDED AND SEAMLESS PIPE frommeas] our. (NOMINAL WAIL THICKNESS FOR ted | be |ccnme pcp com cue seme [an |aceo.| acum | Maen ocnan-feneacas acum on SIZE | DIAM. |"5s* | 10s* | 10 20 ‘30 | anot| 40 oO ‘80 oo | 120 | 140 | 160 STRONG 7 pr ome [oors 7 ove [ooee ene % art Joon | 7 eee oe eos - ora [ease on ses th hes [ones Shee aoe : oar aaa a : os [ease oars lesoo| [ozs [ease : oe : ee ete eg be ve acer " eee er emi eg peel a ears] 0a75|oase | oars [ose [o7s0 oss [ar] 1200 | a0 ao ears | 027s eswe | oaseleaoo [ovee |[rost [rave] tase | rave oo aioe | cave osve-| arson vase [taer [ano [s2m0 | howe 220.0. 0.500 | 0.375 0.875] 0.500 | 1.125 | 1.375 | 1.625 | 1.875 | 2.125 foo. t3e: | eave [osas | exes [oreo | tzte [aor [tara | nou | 2aee he esas | 375 eee men oats oars Se tas [oases Hae oe oc oa75 500 ee eee eee ‘ see wrmna yon gn «7 REAE.EB SRL eo OO Sr ns dcr rgmne neo he, warit pe Se 185 Be a at sa haere ed ees ee ety Tides stn seprapery de tony. ae racn “ae 125% unger the ‘Reel uncer the Sesignation Schedule 40: SESO Ucar pe me AEM ceectes guia ere aie tepals nsthler tol nae Sas cee iar gies talon seat Reprinted ty permission of Tube Turs Division of Chemetran Corporation 184 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTIONS Tame D2 DIMENSIONS OF WELDING FITTINGS (All Dimensions in inches) 2 } ~~ it ™% —s ffi 8 Uf I™N a 2 | 3k ong Radius Weld Els BHS|EESS|eone|annn|aacouls 2) Short Radius Weld Ells (Con, & Bee. Rede owe! “A | DL rary a |u| ibe | w | | ag} as es jn | | io sin | x] 2B ie | 2 we [a | i | iv nw | | ux] we wo [2 | ug] ie e fa | 0%] 6 [a2 | ix] ie we | a7 | as’ | ao uj | is | ao 2 |i | is%| 0 wo la | se) ao Reprinted by permission of ‘Taylor Feige & Pipe Works Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 185SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION Tams 09 DIMENSIONS OF ASME STANDARD FLANGES aa ae (All Dimensions in Inches) = mate nae sno nave lo 7 TeX 7S a [hoe Ha_laye| 7 z a per rae TH & oe A E | [eae Be 7 % oy | Bl |e o a 7 % % % y u By Fi : i Bi % 3 i 3 : 1 : eh & 8 i 2h on iy 3 ae iy By B | By Bie 3% Nom. it Be | A | T° [weap tie, & a Kalas E | ae] 1 | Be | de by Para % Hm KM 2 i | am | i bk ty | 34 | i Ey | ia | a 1% | a | 2 6 12% | 1% | Ow e 18 1% | 4% we | ty | ae | | aod | at u |e lay] % & | ay | Be || | bx 20 30% | 2% | 6% a | set || Reprinted by permission of Taylor Forge & Pipe Works leprinted by ps 7 186 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTIONS TABLE 0.3—(Continued) DIMENSIONS OF ASME STANDARD FLANGES _800 LB. FLANGES 1500 LB. FLANGES Nom ® @ om Bie | A | T° [wea] twa [ten A | T® Prag Tara Daa | at| eet | Be Wes [atys, | iam, Rect (sts, | ih Sie alm ™ | | ae sla BT | of y sh | 1% me | we] & fi a |e 1% | ie | ty 1% an wm | me | i | % a | am | 8% 2 34 | 1 2 | 24 | 14 2% wi | 1% 1K |e i »y wa | a | ae | Oe 1 | 2% ae | ae ay $ 1h | of oh | | é | 3% Sy | Sh | 18 B | ay e% | a | 1s ey | mh |e | 2x 2% | 3% 3% | 3 rt By | 10% | iy 1% ae | oe 40% | 30% iB ax | 7 i | BM 2 whe ni" | 49 au (1) Bore to match schedule of attached pipe. Includes 1/16” raised face in 150 pound and 300 pound standard. Does not include raised face in 400, 600, 900, 1500 and 2500 pound standard. Inside pipe diameiers are also pro- vided by this table, @) @ Reprinted by permission of Taylor Forge & Pipe Works WELDING NECK FLANGE BORES® ned Brandard|Sched.| Sched. [sched | Sched. |Sened.| Sched. Fine see met | at |e a Sta tat RS | “tt eg (ERE) | | i | ett reroey ole ees ano "| A te YR 1g [IF] TRS He | Big EE Be Ye PAE 18 | a he Py is i a f He EL ae | sul wend FE 8 |e | FB 1 iw | TE] TEE dno 232] i es EE LER [es ee i it | H38 tees] SR] EE WE i ae tea al ipeat ae Wea Se [is : 3 | Bie [ETS WSs BER ES es i 5 | BS GSI ae ed 38h Ee g ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 187SECTIONS GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE D-5 BOLTING DATA - RECOMMENDED MINIMUM. (All Dimensions in Inches Unless Noted) a ‘Threads natdinenions | Wanen Sie | wisest | avesins | ate | cares | HE rd % | 6 | om | x | om | w% % [1 | om | mus | im % [x [0 | om | im [138 [ om he % [2 | ome | tm | t59 | te Ea 1 [| osa | im | 7% | m [1 m | 8 | ome | | eo | mm | m {8 | ose | 2 | 2m | aml m[ om | m | [im ee es a m | 8 [10s | m | ze | m | 2 ™ | |» [™ m | 8 | tem | mm | 2am | om | ms [im m | @ | ism | am | ams [om | m m | ™ | % mm | # | 2m | av[ see | « he m | % [| z 3 [2m [| awe | m | me 2 | % [2 m | 8 [3x | om | saa [ m [mm m [a | Er Ee ™ | | me | # | soe | om | aoe | om | m | % | m 3 a | sam | om [ sie | om | Ee ee w]e | ve | s | sos om | | 3 | ™ | % {a [we | m% | sm [ mlm m |e | am | @ [rm | om | om | mm | om an | | 4 eo [use [om | e755 [om | mw] s fe Nut dimensions are based on American National Standard B18.2.2 ‘Threads are Natlonal Coarse series Below 1 inch and eightltch thread series I inch and above 188 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE D-5M METRIC BOLTING DATA - RECOMMENDED MINIMUM {All Dimensions in Millimeters Unless Noted) Threads Nat Dimensions Bott Size | Piich | Root Agea | Across Fats Bott Rai Fadia | Edge | Bolt sie dB, (eam Spacing | Distance | Distance | distance | “ap 8 Fh Fe E wiz ts _| 7asee | 2100 | 2425 | ats | 2060 75.88 15.88 m2 Mie. ‘200 | 198.328 | 27.00 | 3118 | «445 | 2658 | 2068 20.64 Mie M20 250 | 2vost_| 9400 | soz | e250 | st7s |, 2381 23.8 Mao Mae 250 | araaio | 3600 | ats7 | 398 | 3334 | 2540 | 2540 Maz Moa 300 | stares | 00 | ase | sera | 3651 2558_| 2658 Maa Mar 300 | e182 | «600 | sat2_| sso | sa10 | 2000 | 2000 wor M30 aso | sozces | sooo | s77e_ | 7s0s | 4608 | ease | 3334 M30) M36 400 | 72015 | e000 | coz | esta | sar | s969 | 2969 M36. maa, 450 | woraare | roo | oss [ 10000 | 6191 4921 Maa was soo | 1342059 | e000 | e238 | tart | 65.26 35.56 MAB M56) sso | tee2725 [0000 | 10aee | ver.00 | 76.20 63.50 M6 Mes 600 | 2467150 | 10000 | 11547 | 19070 | sate 66.68, M64 Mra e00 | seai77s | 11000 | 2702 | 16558 | 6890 00.85, wre Meo 600 | sovees1 | 12000 | 1056 | 16560 | 0366 74st MeO. M00 600 | seer.ces | 13500 | 1558 | tes01 | 107.98 wag ‘M00 M00 eco | o6si.s28 | 15000 | 17a21 | zores | 11908 9366 [M00 oo Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 189SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION D6 ‘TABLES FOR PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE RATINGS. FOR VALVES, FITTINGS, AND FLANGES INTRODUCTORY NOTES 1. Products used within the jurisdiction of the ASME: Boller and Pressure Vessel Code and the ASME Standard for pressure piping are subject to the fraximum temperature and sess intttons upon the material and piping sated rein. 2. The ratings at -20 °F to 100 °F, given for the materials covered on pages 194 to 229 Inclusive, shall also apply at lower temperatures, The ratings for low ‘temperature service of the cast and forged materials listed in ASTM A352 and ‘A350 shall be taken the same as the -20 °F to 100 °F ratings for carbon steel on pages 194 to 229 inclusive. Some of the materials listed in the rating tables undergo a decrease in impact resistance at temperatures lower than -20 °F to such an extent as to be unable to safely resist shock loadings, sudden changes of stress or high stress concentrations. Therefore, products that are to operate at temperatures below -20 °F shall conform to the rules of the applicable Codes under which they are to be used. =" rs 3. The pressure-temperature ratings in the tables apply to all products covered by this ASME Standard. Valves conforming to the requirements of this ASME Standard must, in other respects, merit these ratings. All ratings are the maximum allowable nonshock pressures (psig) at the tabulated temperature (degrees F) and may be interpolated between the temperatures shown. The primary service pressure ratings (150, 300, 400, 600, ‘900, 1500, 2500) are those at the head of the tables and shown in bold face type in — the body of the tables. ‘Temperatures (degrees F) shown in the tables, used in determining these rating tables, were temperatures on the inside of the pressure retaining structure. “The use ofthese ratings requis gaskets conforming tothe requirements of Paragraph 5.4 of ASME B16.5-(1996). The user is responsible for selecting gaskets of dimensions and materials to withstand the required bolt loading without injurious crushing, and suitable for the service conditions in all other respects. Reference: American Society of Mechanical Engineers Standard Steal Pipe Flanges and Flanged Bitnge ROME Standard 816.5-(1909 and 1986) reprintad withthe permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers, United Engineering Center, 8 E. 47th Street, New York, NY. 30017, Al cights reserved. 190 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE 1A _LIST OF MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS Pressure ‘Applicable ASTM Specifications? Material Nominal Temperature Group Designation Rating Table Forgings Castings Plates Grow _{ 1 c-Si 24a A105 ‘A216 Gr. WCB A515 Gr. 70 -Mn-Si ‘4.350 Gr. LF2 A516 Gr. 70 ‘A537 C11 c-Mn-Si-V A350 Gr. LFB CL 12 (c-Mn-Si 242 ‘A216 Gr. WCC. ‘A382 Gr. Loc C-Mn-Si-V ‘A350 Gr. LFB CL2 : 2YNi A352 Gr. LC2 A203 Gr. B 3Y4Ni A350 Gr. LEB ‘A 352 Gr. LC3 A203 Gr. E 13 csi 243 ‘A382 Gr. LoB A515 Gr. 65 C-Mn-si A516 Gr. 65 24Ni ‘A203 Gr. A 34Ni ‘A203 Gr. D 14 csi 214 A515 Gr. 60 C-Mn-Si A380Gr. LET CLT A516 Gr. 60 . 18 c-%4Mo 24s | Are2Gr.Ft ‘A217 Gr. C1 ‘A204 Gr. A ‘A382 Gr. Let A204 Gr. 8 Ww C-Y4Mo 247 A204 Gr. C >| A182 Gr, F2 217 Gr. wes ‘A217 Gr. WCS 19 A182 Gr. FIZCL2 1Cr= Mo A217 Gr, WCE ACr-4Mo-Si A182Gr. FIT CL? A387 Gr 11.2 ato | 2%cr-1Mo 2410 | A182Gr.F22C13 | A217 Gr. WOO A387 Gr. 22.2 ata | scr-t4Mo 23 | A182Gr. FS A182 Gr. Fa A217 Gr. C5 ar4___| 9cr-1Mo zara | A 10260. F9 A217 Gr. Cr2 115 | 9cr-1Mo-V 2415 | A182Gr. Ft A217 Gr. CIA A387 Gr. 9161.2 2a 18Cr-8Ni 221 | Are2Gr.F204 | A351 Gr. CFR ‘A240 Gr. 304 ‘A102 Gr.F304H | A351 Gr. CFB ‘A240 Gr. 304H 22 16Cr-12NI-2Mo 222 | ar2GrFa16 | A351 Gr. CRIM ‘A240 Gr. 316 Ara2Gr.FaiH =| A351Gr. CEM — | A240 Gr. 316H 18Cr-13Ni-3Mo ‘A240 Gr. 317 19Cr—10Ni-3Mo A351 Gr. CGEM 23 18Cr-BNi 223 | A1B2 Gr. F30at ‘A240 Gr. 304t, 16Gr~12NI-2Mo A162 Gr. F316L A240 Gr. 316. 24 18Cr—10Ni 224 | A182Gr. F321 ‘A240 Gr. 321 ‘A182 Gr. F321H, ‘A240 Gr. 321H, ‘Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1996, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. lights reserved ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 191SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE 1A_ LIST OF MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONT’D) Pressure— ‘Applicable ASTM Specifications? Material Nominal Temperature Group Designation Rating Table Forgings Castings Plates 25 18Cr-10Ni-Cb 228 | ArszGr.F«7 | A351.Gr. CFBC ‘A240 Gr. 347 ‘A 182 Gr. F347H ‘A240 Gr. 347H ‘A 182 Gr. F348, ‘A240 Gr. 348, ‘A 182 Gr. F34eH ‘A240 Gr. 348H 26 25Cr-12Ni 226 ‘A351 Gr. CHB ‘A351 Gr. CH20 23Cr=12Ni ‘ ‘A240 Gr. 3098 ‘A240 Gr. 309H 27 25Cr-20Ni 227 A162Gr. F310 | A351 Gr. CK20 ‘A240 Gr. 3108 ‘A240 Gr. 310H 28 20Cr-18Ni-6Mo 228 | A182 Gr. Fas ‘A351 Gr. CKMCUN | A 240 Gr. $31254 22Cr-SNi-3Mo-N A182 Gr. F51 ‘A240 Gr. $31803 ‘A182 Gr. F53 ‘A240 Gr. $32750 24Cr-10Ni=aMo-V ‘A351 Gr. CEBMN 28Cr-SNi-2Mo-3Cu. _ ‘A351 Gr. COaMCu 25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-W-Cb A251 Gr. ‘cosMWeuN. 25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-N-Cu-W A182 Gr. F55 A240 Gr. $3760, 3a 35Ni-35Fe-20Cr-Cb 231 8 462 Gr. NOB020 8463 Gr. NO80Z0 32 99.0Ni 232 2B 160 Gr. Noz200 ~ 8B 162 Gr. NOz200 33 99.0Ni-Low C 233 8-160 Gr. Nozz01 8 162 Gr. NOz201 34 67Ni-20Cu 234 — | 8 564 Gr. Noaaoo 8 127 Gr. Nosa00 67Ni-30Cu-S B 164 Gr. Noados 38, T2Ni-15Cr-8Fe 235 | 8.564 Gr. Nos600" 8 168 Gr. NOS6O0 38 S3Ni~€2Fe-21Cr 236 | 8 564 Gr. Nose00 8 409 Gr. NOB800 37 65Ni-28Mo-2Fe 237 B 335 Gr. N10655, 8.333 Gr. N10665, 38 SANi~16Mo-15Cr 238 18564 Gr. N10276 B 575 Gr. N10276, 6ONi-22Cr-8Mo-3:5Cb 8 564 Gr. NOs625, 443 Gr. NO6625, 62NI-28Mo-5Fe B 335 Gr. N10007 8333 Gr. N10001 TON'~16Mo-7Cr-SFe B 573 Gr. N10003, 8 434 Gr. N10003, 6INI-16Mo-16Cr B 874 Gr. NOGAss 8575 Gr. NOB455, A2Ni-21.5Cr-3Mo-2:3Cu B S64 Gr. NOBB25 424 Gr, NOBB25 39 47Ni-22Cr-9Mo~18Fe 239 B 572 Gr. NoG002 8 435 Gr. NO6002 3.10__| 25Ni-46Fe-21¢r-sMo 23.10 | 8 672 Gr. NoB700 8 599 Gr. NOB700 3.11 | 44Fe-25Ni-21¢r-Mo 23.11 | 8 649 Gr. Nogo0¢ B 625 Gr. NOB904 3.2 23.12 | 8 621 Gr. Nosa20 8 620 Gr. N0B320 B 581 Gr. Nog9e5 B 582 Gr. NOS9e5, (Tabie 1A continues on next page; Notes follow at end of Table) Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1096 and 1998, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Al rights reserved 192 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE 1A _LIST OF MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONT'D) Pressure ‘Applicable ASTM Specifications? Material Nominal Temperature Group Designation Rating Table Forgings: Castings Plates 3.13 | 49Ni-25¢r-18Fe-6Mo 23.13 | 8 581 Gr. Noss75 8 882 Gr. NOSS75 Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Low Cu 8564 Gr. NOBO31 625 Gr. NOBO31 314 __| a7Ni-z2cr-19Fe-6Mo 2.3.14 | 8581 Gr. NOB0O7 8 682 Gr. NOSOO7 3.15 _| asNineaFe-21Cr 2318 |B 564Gr. Nogs10 8 409 Gr. NOBB10 3.16 __| asNint9cr-1%Si 2316 | 8511 Gr. Nogs30 i 8536 Gr. NOB330 317 | zeni-zoscr-ascu-2smo | 23.17 A351 Gr. CN7M (GENERAL NOTES: (2) For temperature limitations, see Notes in Table 2. (b) Plate materials are listed only for use as blind flanges (see para. §.1). Additional plate materials listed in ASME 816.34 ‘may also be used with corresponding B16.34 Standard Class ratings. (c) Material Groups not listed in Table 1A are intended for use in valves. See ASME 816.34. Nore: (1) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section I! mat fications, may also be used. is, which also meet the requirements of the listed ASTM speci- Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1996, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Allights reserved Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 193SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION ‘TABLES 2 PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE RATINGS FOR GROUPS 1.1 THROUGH 3.17 MATERIALS TABLE 2-1.1__ RATINGS FOR GROUP 1.1 MATERIALS ‘Nominal Designation Forgings Castings tos c-Si A108 (1) AzieGr.wea(n | As15Gr.70(1) c-Mn-Si ‘A350 Gr. LF2 (1) “| asiecr. 70cm A537 CL.1 (3) coMn-si-v_| A350 Gr. LF6CI.1 (4) NOTES: (1) Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 800", the carbide phase of steel may be converted to graphite. Permissible, but not recommended for prolonged use above 800°F. (2) Not to be used over 850" (8) Not to be used over 700 (4) Not to be used over 500 WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig Class Temp. "F 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500 20 t0 100 285 740 ‘990 1480 2220 3705 6170 200 260 675 900 1350 2025 3375 5625 +300 230 655 875 1315 1970 3280 5470 400 200 635 845 1270 1900 3170 5280 500 170 600 800 1200 1795 2995 4990 ‘600 140 550 730 1085 1640 2735 4560 650 15 535 75 1075 1610 2685 4075 700 110 536 710 1065 1600 2665 aaao 750 95 505 670 2010 1510 2520 4200 800 80 410 550 825 1238 2060 3430 850 6 270 355 535 805 1340 2230 ‘900 50 170 230 345 515 360 1430 950 35 105 140 205 310 515 860 1000 20 50 70 105 155 260 430 Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1996, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Al rights reserved 194 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE 2-1.2 RATINGS FOR GROUP 1.2 MATERIALS ‘Nominal Designation Forgings: Castings Plates: C-Mn-Si A216 Gr. WCC (1) ‘A362 Gr. LEC (2) c-Mn-si-v | A350.Gr. LFS.Cl.2 (3) 24Ni ‘A352 Gr. Le2 A203 Gr. B (1) 34Ni A350 Gr. LFS A352 Gr. Lc3 A203 Gr. E (1) NoTes: (1) Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 800°F, the carbide phase of steel may be converted to graphite. Permissible, but not recommended for prolonged us (2) Not to be used over 650°F. (3) Not to be used over S00°F. dove BO0"F. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig Class Tom. *F 150 300 400 00, 900 1500 2500 20 to 100 290 750 1000 1500 2250 3750 6250 200 260 750 1000 1500 2250 3750 6250 300 230 730 970 185 2185 3640 6070 400 200 705 940 1410 25 3530 5680 500 70 685 885 1330 1995, 3325 5540 600 140 605 805 1210 1815 3025 5040 650 125 590 785 a5 1765, 2040 4905 700 110 570 755 a3 1705 2840 4730 750 95 505 70 1010 1510 2520 4200 800 20 a10 550 825 1235, 2060 3430 850 65 770 385 535 805 1340 2230 900 50 70 230 345 515 860 1430 950 35 105, 140 208 310 515 60 3000 20 50 70 105 155 260 430 Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1096 and 1996, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers, Allrights reserved ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 195SECTION 9 TABLE 2-1.3_ RATINGS FOR GROUP 1.3 MATERIALS GENERAL INFORMATION Nominal Designation Forgings, Castings te csi A352 Gr.L0B (3) | A515 Gr. 65 (1) Mn-Si ‘A516 Gr. 85 (112) 24Ni A203 Gr. A(1) 34 A203 Gr. D (1) NoTEs: (1) Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 800%, the carbide phase of steel may be converted to graphite, Permissible, but not recommended for prolonged use above 800°F. (2) Not to be used over 850°F. (@) Not to be used over 850°F. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES. psig Class. Temp. 150 200 400 600 900 1500 2500 20 to 100 265 695 925 1380 2085 3470 5785 200 250 855 875 1315 1970 3280 5470 ‘300 230 640 850 1275, 1915, 3190 515 400 200 620 825 1235, 1850 3085 51s 500 170 585 78 1185 1745; 2910 4850 ‘600 140 535 m0 1065 1600 2685 4440 650 15 525 695 1085 1570 2615 4355 700 10 520 680 1038, 1585, 2590 4320 750 95, 415 630 945 1420 2385 3945, 00 80 390 520 780 1975 1955 3280 850 65 270 355 535 805 1340 2230 ‘900 50 170 230 345 515 860 1430 950 35 105 140 205 310 515 ‘860 1000 20 50 70 105, 155 280 430 196 FRoprinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1998, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Alrights reserved Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION TABLE 2-14 RATINGS FOR GROUP 1.4 MATERIALS Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates -Nn-Si A350 Gr. LFY, CL.1 (1) A515 Gr. 60 (1) A516 Gr. 60 (1112) Notes: (() Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 800°, the carbide phase of steel may be converted to graphite, Permissible, but not recommended for prolonged use above 800°F. (2) Not to be used over 850°. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig SECTION 9 Class, Temp. 150 300 400, 600 200 1500 2500 20 to 100 238 620 825 1235 1850 3085 5145, 200 215 560 750: 1125 1685 2810 4680 300 210 550 730 1095, 1640 2735 4560 ‘400 200 530 705 11080 1585 2645, 4405 500 70 ‘500 685, 995 1495 2490 4150 600 140 610 915, 1370 2285 3805 850 125 600 805, 1365 2205, 3740 700 110 600 295 1365 2205 3740 750 95 590 885 1335 2210 3085 800 80 495 740 110 1850 088 850 65 270 355 535 205 1340 2230 900 50 170 230 35, 515 360 1430 950 35 105 140 205 310 518 860 1000 20 50 8 105 155, 260 430 ‘Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1006 and 1998, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Al rights reserved Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 197SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE 2.1.5 RATINGS FOR GROUP 1.5 MATERIALS ‘Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates c-%Mo ArezGrer( | Azi7Grwerin) | A204Gr. Ac) A352 Gr. LC1 (3) ‘A204 Gr. B (1) NoTES: (1) Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 875" denum steel may be converted to graphite, Permis use above 875°F. the carbide phase of carbon-molyb- but not recommended for prolonged (2) Use normalized and tempered material only. (3) Not to be used over 650°F. . WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig Class. Temp. 150 300 400 500 900 1500 2500 20 t0 100 265 695 925, 1390 2085 3670 5785 200 260 680 905, 1360 2038 3395 5660 300 230 655 870 1305 1955, 3260 5435 ‘400 200 640 855 11280 1820 3200 5330 500 170 20 830 1208, 1865, 3105 5180 600 140 605 805 1210 vas 3025 040 850 125 590 785 075 1765 2840 4905 700 110 570 755 1135 1705 2840 4730 750 95 530 70 1065 1595, 2660 4430 800 80 510 675 1015 1825, 2540 4220 850 6 495 650 975 1480 2035, 4080 900 50 480 600 900 1350 2245, 3745 950 35 280 375 560 845 1405 2345, 1000 20 165, 220 330 495 825 1370 Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1986, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. All rights reserved 198 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE 2-1.7_ RATINGS FOR GROUP 1.7 MATERIALS ‘Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates. c-Mo ‘A208 Gr. C(1) YyCr-4Mo A182 Gr. F2 (3) NiCr—Y4Mo A217 Gr. WC4 (213) {YNi-MCr—1Mo A217 Gr. WCS (2) Notes: Z (1) Upon prolonged exposure to temperatures above 875°F, the carbide phase of carbon-molyb- 360 545 B15 1360 2288 1180 235 315 as | 710 1185, 1970 1200 ay 185 245 370 55 925 1545, 1280 : 40 185 220 420 705 1170 1300 es 10 “5 20 330 550 915 1350 85 15 170 285 430 18 11400 65 85 130 195 325 545 +1450 50 0 108 155 255, 430 1500 40 50 75 15 190 315 [Reprinted from ASME 816.5-1998 and 1998, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Al rights reserved 208 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE 2-2.5 RATINGS FOR GROUP 2.5 MATERIALS Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates: cr-10Ni-Cb | A182 Gr. F347 (2) | A351Gr. CFEC (3) | A 240.Gr. 347 (2) ‘A182 Gr, F347H (1) ‘A240 Gr. 347H (1) ‘A182 Gr. F348 (2) ‘A 240 Gr. 348 (2) A182 Gr. FO4BH (1) ‘A240 Gr. 348H (1) NoTes: (1) For temperatures over 1000°F, use only ifthe material is heat treated by heating to a minimum temperature of 2000°F. fl (2) Not to be used over 1000". (3) Attemperatures over 1000°F, use the material only when the carbon contents 0.08% or higher WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig Class. Temp. 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500 20 t0 100, 25 720 960 1440 2160 3600 16000 200 255 60 880 120 1380 3300 5500 300 20 815 820 1230 15, 3070 5120 ‘400 200 575 785 145 1720 2870 4780 500 70 540 720 1080 1620 2700 4500 600 140 515 625 1025 1540. 2570 4280 650 135 505, 670 1010 1510 2520 ‘4200 700 110 495, 660 + 990 1485, 2470 4120 750 95 490 655 985 1478, 2460 4100 00 80 485, 650 975 1460 2435 4060 850 6 485 645 970 1455 2025 4040 ‘900 50 450 ‘600 900 1350 2245 3745 350 35 385, 515 75 1180 1920 3220 1000 2 385, 495 25 1090 vez | 3030 1050 = 360 480 70 1080 1800 ‘3000 1100 325 430 645 965 1610 2585 1150 275 385 550 825 1370 2285 1200 oe 170 230 345 515 855 1430 1250 125 165 245 370 615 1090 1300 or 95 125 185 280 485 770 1350 : 70 0 135 205 345 570 1400 55 8 110 165 275 455 1450 : 40 55 80 125 205 305, 1500 : 35 45 uy 105 170 205 ‘Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1998, by permission of The Amerioan Society of Mechanical Engineers. Al rights reserved Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 209SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE 2-2.6 RATINGS FOR GROUP 2.6 MATERIALS. ‘Nominal Designation | Forgings Castings Plates 23Cr—12Ni ‘A 240 Gr. 3095 (11213) ‘A240 Gr. 300H 25Cr=12Ni A361 Gr. CHE (1) ‘A351 Gr. CH20 (1) Notes: (1) At temperatures over 1000°F, use only when the earbon content is 0.04% or higher. {2} For temperatures above 1000, use only ifthe mat temperature specified in the specification but not lower pidly cooling by other mea (2) This material should be used for service temperatures 1050°F and above only when 1s not finer than ASTM 6, Is provided that grain lution is heat treated tothe minimum an 1900°F, and quenching in water WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500 =20t0 100 260 670 895 1345 2015 3360 5600 200 230 605 805 3210 seis 3025 5040 300 220 570 780 1140 1705 2845, 4740 +400 200 535 70 1065 1600 2665 4440 500 170 505 0 1010 1810 2820 4200 600 140 480 635 955 1435 2390 3980 650 125 485 620 930 1395 2330 3880 700 10 455 610 910 1370 2280 ‘3800 750 95 446 595 895 1340 2230 3720 800 80 435 580 370 1305 2170 3620 50 425 555 850 125 2125 3540 ‘900 415 555 830 1245 2075 ‘3460 950 385 515 75 1160 1930 3220 1000 335 450 670 1010 1680 2800 1050 230 390 585 875 1460 2430 1100 25 300 445 670 ms 1860 1180 170 20 345 515 880 1430 1200 130 5 260 380 650 1085 1250 100 135 200 300 495, 1830 1300 Ey 105 160 235 295 660 1350 60 80 15 5 290 485 1400 8 60 90 135 225 370 1450 30 0 60 95 155 260 1500 2 0 50 0 120 200 210 Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1998, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. lights reserved Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE 2-2.7_ RATINGS FOR GROUP 2.7 MATERIALS Nomina Designation Forgings Cestings: Plates 2scr-2oni | A182 Gr. F310(113) | A351 Gr. CK20(1) | A240 Gr. 3105 (12018), A240 Gr. 310H Notes: (1) At temperatures over 1000°F, use only when the carbon content is 0.04% or higher. (2) For temperatures above 1000°F, use only if the material is hest treated by heating it to 8 temperature of atleast 1900°F end quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means. (3) Service temperatures of 1050°F and above should be used only when assurance is provided that grain size is not finer than ASTM 6. : WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig Class Tomp.,F 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500 20 t0 100 260 670 895 1345, 2015 3360 5600 200 235 605, 810 1218 1820 3035 5060 300 220 570 760 140 1705 205, 4740 +200 200 535 15 1070 1605 2675 4460 500 170 505 os 1015 1820 2530 4220 600 140 480 40 960 140 2400 4000 650 15 470 62s 935, 1405, 2340 3900 700 m0 485 610 910 1370 2280 3600 750 95 450 600 900 1345 2205, 3740 800 80 435, 580 875 1310 2185 3640 850 6 425, 570 855 1280 2135 3860 900 50 420 355 835, 1255, 2080 3480 950 35 385, 515 78 1160 1930 3220 +1000 20 345 480 co 1030 1720 2865 1050 o 335 450 670 1010 1680 +2800 1100 - 260 345 520 780 1305 2170 1150 7 190 250 375 565 945 1570 1200 135 185 25 410 685 1145, 1250 i 105 135 205 310 515 855 1300 - 5 100 150 225 375 630 1350 : 60 80 15 5 290 435 1400 ‘ 45 60 90 135 225 370 1480 35 6 65 100 165 25 1500 a 25 35 50 75 130 215 Reprinted torn ASME B16 5.1066 and 1998, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. All rights reserved a ad Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Associ 211SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE 2.2.8 RATINGS FOR GROUP 2.8 MATERIALS onagnon Forgings costings Petes zocr-teNi-eMe Inse2 cr as [ase cr cxemcun [aaa cr. Sarasa Ja 2. 53 Ja 20 cr. sods J 2 5910 J 20 cr. sa7s0 2-108 AMo-V a 251 or. cena 25Cr-SN-2Mo-2Cu a a1 a. coumcy 25cr-7Ni-3.sMo-W-Co a a1 or. cosmacun 261-TN-ASMo-N-Cu-W)A 182 Gr. FS 20 cr. saae0 Nove: {1 Tie stl may become brie ter serve at modertaly elevated temperatures Nt tobe used over 00°F. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig Class Temp. "F 150 300 400 600. 900 1500 2500 200 100 290 750 1000 1500 2280 3750 6250 200 260 720 960 1440 2160 3600 ‘6000 300 230 685 885 1330 1995 3325 5540 400 200 615 820 1230 1845 3070 5120 500 170 575 70 11860 1730 2880 4800 600 140 555 140 as 1670 2788 4640 650 125, 550 735 1100 1650 2750 4520 700 110 540 75 1085 1625 2710 4520 750 35 530 70 ross | 1595 2660 4430 Feprinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1998, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Enpineers, Al rights reserved 212 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE 2.3.1_RATINGS FOR GROUP 3.1 MATERIALS ‘Nominal Designation Forgi Castings Plates S5Ni-35Fe-20Cr-Cb | 8 462 Gr. NO8020 (1) 463 Gr. NOBO20 (1) NoTE: (1) Use annealed material only. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig as Te 150 300 400 600 soo |, 1500 2500 Boia 290 750 1000 1500 2250 3750 6250 m 260 720 960 1440 2160 3600 ‘6000 x 230 75 950 1425, 240 3565 5940 “ 200 675 900 1348, 2020 3365 3610 Po 170 655 875 1310 1965 3278 5460 om 140 605 805 1210 1815 3025 500 # as 590 785 175 1765 2940 4905 @ a0 510 755 1135 1708 2840 4720 1 98 530 710 1065 1595 2660 4430 cy 80 510 675 1015 1525 2540 4230 Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1996, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Al rights reserved Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 213SECTIONS GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE 2-3.2_ RATINGS FOR GROUP 3.2 MATERIALS ‘Nominal Designation Forgings, Castings Plates 99.0Ni B 160 Gr. NOZ200 (1112) B 162 Gr, NOZ200 (1) Notes: (1) Use annealed material only. al composition, mechani requirements, and grain ication. The manufacturing procedures, tolerances, tests, certification, and markings shall be in accordance with ASTM B 564 WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig as Temp. F 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500 -20 t0 100 140 360 480 m0 1080 1800 +3000 200 140 360 480 no 1080 11800 +3000 300 140 360 480 720 1080 11800 +3000 400 140 360 480 720 1080 +1800 3000 500 140 360 480 70 1080 11800 3000 600 140 360 490 720 1080 1800 3000 ‘Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1998, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Al rights reserved 214 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE 2-3.3 RATINGS FOR GROUP 3.3 MATERIALS ‘Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates s9.0Nictowc |B 160.Gr.NO2Z01 (1112) 8 162 Gr. N02201 (1) NOTES: (1) Use annealed material only. {2} The chemical composition, mechanical properties, heat treating requi size requirements shall conform to the applicable ASTM specification. procedures, tolerances, tests, certification, and markings shall be ments, and grain he manufacturing accordance with ASTM B 564. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig Class Temp. °F 150 300 400 500 900 1500 2500 20 t0 100 90 240 320 480 720 1200 +2000 200 85 230 305 455 685 1140 1900 ‘300 85 225 300 445 670 ams 1860 400 8 215 290 430 650 1080 1800 500 5 28 230 430 650 ‘1080 1600 ‘600 85 218 230 430 650 1080 1800 650 85 215 230 430 650 1080 11800 700 85 215 290 430 650 1080 1800 750 80 210 260 420 635 1055 1760 800 80 205 270 a0 610 1020 1700 880 6 205 270 410 610 1020 3700 300 50 140 185 280 415, 695 1185 950 35 15 150 230 365, 570 950 1000 20 95 125 185 280 465 770 1050 . 8 100 150 220 370 615, 1100 60 80 125 185 310 516 1150 45 60 95 140 230 385 31200 35 50 5 10 185 310. inte rom ASME 165-1996 and 1956, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Erbiners a ghtsexarved lee Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 215SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE 2-3.4 RATINGS FOR GROUP 3.4 MATERIALS Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates 67Ni-30Cu 8 564 Gr. Noaaoo (1) 8 127 Gr. Nosaod (1) e7Ni-socu-s |B 164 Gr. No44as (1112) NoTEs: (1) Use annealed material only. (2) The chemical composition, mechanical properties, heat treating requirements, size requirements shall conform to the applicable ASTM specification. The manufacturing rocedures, tolerances, tests, cenfication, and markings shall be in accordance with ASTM B 564, WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig 7 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500 230 600 800 1200 1800 3000 ‘5000 200 530 705 1055 1585, 2640 4400 180 495 660 990 1485, 2870 4120 185 480, 635 955 1435, 2390 3980 170 475 635 980 1435, 2378 3960 600 140 418 635 950 1435 2378 ‘3960 650 125 45 635 950 1435 2378 3960 700 110 475 635 950 1435, 2375 3960 750 95 470 625 935 1405 2340 3900 800 80 460 610 315 1375 2230 3820 850 6s 340 455 680 1020 1695 2830 900, 50 245 330 495 740, 1235, 2055 inte fram ASME B16.5-1906 and 1698, by permission of The Amarin Society of Mechanical Ergioort Righter em 216 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTIONS TABLE 2.3.5 RATINGS FOR GROUP 3.5 MATERIALS ‘Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates TANiWt5¢r-aFe | 8 S64 Gr. NO6ED0 (1) B 168 Gr. NOB800 (1) NoTE: (1) Use annealed material only. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psi 7 Clase Temp. “F 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500 =20 to 100 230 750 +1000 1600 2260 3750 6250 200 260 750 1000 1800 2260 3750 6250 300 230 730 970 1455, 2185 3640 6070 400 200 705 940 1410 215 3530 5880 500 170 665 885 1330 1995, 3325 5540 600 140 605 805 1210 vei 3028 5040 650 5 590 785 1175 1765, 2940 4905 700 110 570 755 1135 1705 2840 4730 750 95 530 70 1085 1595 2860 4430 ‘800 80 510 675 1015 1520 2540 4230 850 6 495 650 975 1460 2835 4060 900 50 450 600 ‘900 1380 2248, 3745 950 38 325 435 655 960 1635 2725 1000 20 215 290 430 650 1080 11800 1050 se 140 185 280 415 695 1155 1100 95 15 185 280 465 70 1150 cy 90 135 205 340 565 1200 60 80 125 165 310 515 epioted from ASME 616.5-1996 and 1998, by permission of The Amatican Society of Mechanical Engineer. Alright reserved. bye ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 217SECTIONS GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE 2-3.6 RATINGS FOR GROUP 3.6 MATERIALS ‘Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates aNin4zFe-21cr_ | 8 564 Gr. NoBeOO (1) B 409 Gr. NOBBO0 (1) ial only. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psi Clase. Temp. *F 150 300 400 00 900 1500 2500 =20 t0 100 275 720 960 1440 2160 3600 ‘6000 200 256 60 885 1325 1990 3310 5520 +300 230 625 830 1250 1870 3120 5200 400, 200 600 800 1200 1800 3000 +5000 500 70 580 70 1155, 1735 2890 4820 600 140 575 765 105, 1720 2870 4780 650 25 570 780 1140 1705 2805 4740 700 M0 565 750 1130 1690 2820 4700 750 35 530 70 1085 1595 2850 4430 800 80 505 675 1018 1520 2535 4220 850 65 485 650 975 1460 2435 4060 900 50 450 600 900 1350 2245 3745 950 35 385 515 775 1160 1830 3220 11000 20 365 485 725 +1090 1820 3030 1050 oe 360 480 720 1080 1800 3000 1100 - 325 430 045 965 1610 2685 1150 o 25 365 550 825 1370 2285 1200 7 205 270 405 610 1020 1695 1250 7 130 175 260 380 650 1080 1300 7 Cy 80 125 185 310 515 1350 50 6 100 150 245 410 1400 ae 35 5 70 100 170 285 1450 30 0 60 95 185 255 1500 25 5 50 75 125 205. Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1996, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. All rights reserved 218 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTIONS TABLE 2-3.7 RATINGS FOR GROUP 3.7 MATERIALS ‘Nominal Designation Forgings. Castings Plates: 65Ni-20Mo-2Fe | 8 335 Gr. N10685 (1112) 8 333 Gr. N10665 (1) NOTES: (9) Use solution annealed material only. {2} The chemical composition, mechanical properties, heat treating requirements, and grein size requirements shall conform to the applicable ASTM specification. The manufacturing procedures, tolerances, tests, certification, and markings shall be in accordance with ‘ASTM B 564, WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig Clase Temp. °F 150 300, 400 600 900 1500 2500 -20 to 100 230 750 1000 1500 2250 3750 6250 200 260 780 1000 1500 2250 3750 6250 300 230 730 970 1455 2185 3640 6070 400 200 705 940 1410 2s 3530 5880 500 70 665 885 1390 1295, 3325 5540 600 140 605 805 1210 118 3025 040 650 15 530 785, 175 1765 2340 4905 700 110 570 758 1135 1705, 2840 4730 750 5 530 710 1065, 1595, 2660 4430 800 80 510, os 1015 1520 2540 4230 Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1988, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Alrights reserved. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Asso: 219SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE 23.8 RATINGS FOR GROUP 3.8 MATERIALS Forgings Castings Plates B 664 Gr. N10276 (1144) B 575 Gr. N10276 (1)(4) GONi-22Cr-9Mo~3.5Cb | B 564 Gr. NOE625 (315) B 443 Gr. NOS625 (3)(5) 62Ni-28Mo-5Fe 8 995 Gr. N10001 (11(216) B 333 Gr. N10001 (116), TONi~16Mo-7Cr-sFe | B 573 Gr. N10003 (21(3) 8 434 Gr. N10003 (3) 1Ni~16Mo~16Cr 8 574 Gr. NOBASS (111216) B 575 Gr. NOB4SE (1116) 42Ni-21.8Fe-3Cr-2.3Cu | B 564 Gr. NOB825 (3)(7) B 424 Gr. NO8B25 (3)(7) NoTes: (1) Use solution annealed material only QT chemical composition, mechanical properties, heat treating requirements, and grain quirements shall conform to the applicable ASTM specification. The manufacturing procedures, tolerances, tests, certification, and markings shall be in accordance with ASTM B 564. (2) Use annealed material only. (4) Not to be used over 1250°F. (5} Not to be used over 1200F. Alloy NO6625 in the annealed condition is subject to severe loss of impact strength at room temperatures after exposure in the range of 1000°F to 1400°F. {6} Not to be used over 800°F. {7} Not to be used over 1000°F. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig Class Temp. F 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500 =20 to 100 230 750 1000 1500 2280 3750 6250 200 260 750 1000 1500 2250 3750 6250 300 230 730 970 1485 2185 3640 6070 ‘400 200 705 940 1410 25 3590 15880 500 170 665 885 1320 1995, 3325 5540 600 140 605 805 1210 vei 3025 5040 650 125 580 785 1175, 1765 2940 4905 700 10 570 755 1135 1705 2840 4730 750 95 530 70 1065 1595, 2860 4430 1800 80 510 os 1015 1520 2540 4230 850 65 495 650 975 1480 2835 4060 900 50 450 600 300 1350 2245 3745 950 35 385, 515 75 1160 1830 3220 1000 20 365 485 75 1090 1820 3030 1050 ae 360 430 720 1080 1800 +3000 1100 325 430 45 965 1610 2685 1180 275 365 550 825 1370 2285 1200 185 245 370 555 925 1545, 1250 us 195 295 440 735 1220 3300 110 as 218 325 540, 900 220 Reprinted trom ASME B16.5-1996 and 1998, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Allights reserved Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE 2.3.9 RATINGS FOR GROUP 3.9 MATERIALS ‘Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates: 4TNi-220r-2Mo-18Fe_| 8 872 Gr. NO6OO2 (1/2) 8 495 Gr. NO6002 (1), Notes: (1) Use solution annealed material only. (2) The chemical composition, mechanical properties, heat treating requirements, and grain size requirements shall conform to the applicable ASTM specification. The manufacturing proce- dures, tolerances, tess, certification, and markings shall be in accordance with ASTM B 564. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig Clase Temp. °F 150 300 400 500 200 1500 2500 200 100 290 750 1000 1500 2250 3750 6250 200 260 750 1000 1500 2250 3750 6250 300 230 680 905 1380 2000 3395 5660, ‘400 200 600 795 1195 1785 2990 4980 500 170 575 70 1150 1730 2880 4800 600 140 560 745 10 1680 2798, 4880 650 15 560 748 m0 1680 2795 4650 700 10 560 745 120 1680 2795 4660 750 95 530 no 1085 1595, 2860 4430 800 ® 510 675 1015 1525 240 4730 850 6 485 650 975 1460 2435 4960 900 50 450 600, 900 1350 2245 3745 950 35 385 515 7s 1160 1930 3220 1000 20 265 485 75 1090 1820 3030 1050 a 360 480 n0 1080 1800 +3000 1100 7 325 490 45 965 1610 2685 1150 215 385, 550 825 1370 2285 1200 : 205 275 410 620 1030 ms 1250 5 180 245 385 545 910 1515 1300 : 140 185 25 410 085 145 1350 : 105 140 205 310 515 860 1400 : B 100 150 225 380 630 1450 ‘ 6 80 15 15 230 485 1500, a 40 55, 85 125 205 345 Reprinted trom ASME B16.5-1006 and 1998, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. All ights reserved Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 221SECTIONS GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE 2-3.10 RATINGS FOR GROUP 3.10 MATERIALS Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates 18Fo-21Cr-5Mo_| 8 672 Gr. NOB700 (112) £8 599 Gr. NOB700 (1) annealed material only. (2) The chemical composition, mechanical properties, heat treating requirements, and grain sizo roquicements shall conform to the applicable ASTM specification, The manufacturing proce: dures, tolerances, tests, certification, and markings shall be in accordance with ASTM B 564, WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig Class iE Temp.."F 150 300 400 500, ‘900 1500 2500 =20 to 100 275 720 960 1440 2160 3600 ‘6000 200 260 720 960 1440 2160 3600 6000 300 230 620 905 1360 2040 3400 5670 ‘400 200 640, 855 1280 1920 3205 5340 500 170 610 815 1225 1835 3060 5100 600 140 505 790 1190 1780 2970 4950 650 125 570 760 sao 1705 2845 4740 Reprinted trom ASME B16.5-1996 and 1998, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Al ght reserved " 222 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTIONS TABLE 2-3.11__RATINGS FOR GROUP 3.11 MATERIALS ‘Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates 44F0-25Ni-21Cr-Mo_| 8 649 Gr. NOB9O4 (1)'2) B 625 Gr. NOB904 (1) Nore (1) Use annealed material only. (2) The chemical composition, mechanical properties, heat treating requirements, and grain size requirements shall conform to the applicable ASTM specification, The manufacturing proce: dures, tolerances, tosts, certification, and markings shall be in accordance with ASTM B 564. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig Class Tomp. 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500 -20 t0 100 25 640 855 1280 1920 3205 5340 200 230 600 800 1200 1205 3005, 5010 300 210 545 75 1085 1630 2720 4530 400 190 495 660 995 1490 2085, 4140 00 170 455 610 315 1370 2285 3810 00 140 430 515 865 1295 2160 3600 650 1s 420 560 340 1265 2105, 3510 700, u0 410 545 20 1230 2050 3420 Reprinted from ASME 816.5-1996 and 1998, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Al rights reserved Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 223SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION 1.12_ RATINGS FOR GROUP 3.12 MATERIALS Designation Forgings Castings Plates: 26Ni-43Fe-22¢r-5Mo | 8 621 Gr. NOB320 (1)(2) 'B 620 Gr. NOB3zZ0 (1) 47Ni-226r-20Fe-7Mo_| 8 581 Gr. NOB9AS (1)(2) B 582 Gr. NO69B5 (1) NOTE solution annealed material ont {2} The chemical composition, mechanical properties, heat treating requirements, and grain size requirements shall conform to the applicable ASTM specificstion, The manufacturing proce- dures, tolerances, tests, certification, and markings shall be in accordance with ASTM B 584, WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig Class Temp. F 150 300 600 900 1500 2500 =20t0 100 260 670 14s. 2015 3960 15600 200 240 625 1248, 1870 35 5100 300 225 585 v7 1760 2935 4890 400 200 535 1075 1810 2680 4470 00 170 500 11000 1500 2500 4170 600 140 475 635 950 1435, 2375 3960 650 125 465 620 930 1395, 2320 3870 700 110 450 600 200 1350 2250 3750 750 95, 485 590 B85 1330 25 3680 200 80 430 575 265 1295 2160 3600 Beprinted from ASME B16.5-1006 and 1996, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Enginaers. Aight reserved ae “ 224 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE 2.3.13 RATINGS FOR GROUP 3,13 MATERIALS. ‘Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates 49NI-25Cr-18Fe-6Mo |B 581 Gr. NOS7S (1)(2) 18 882 Gr. NOBS75 (1) Ni --Mo-Low Cu | B64 NOBO21 (3) £8 625 Gr, NOBO31 (3) Notes: (1) Use solution annesled material only. (2) The chemical composition, mechanical properties, heat treating requirements, and grain size requirements shall conform to the applicable ASTM specification, The manufacturing proce- dures, tolerances, tests, certification, and markings shall be in accordance with ASTM 8 564. (3) Use annealed material only. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig Temp.."F 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500 20 t0 100 290 750 1000 1500 2250 3750 6250 200 260 705 940 rao 2n15 3530 5880 300 230 680 885 1325 ‘85 3310 3520 400 200 635 845 1265 +1800 3170 5280 500 170 595 790 190 1780 2970 4950 600 140 560 750 125 1685 2810 4680 650 105 555 735 1105 1600, 2765, ‘4605 700 10 545 75 1085 1630 2720 4530 750 5 530 70 1085, 1595, 2860 4430 200 80 510 675 1015, 1525, 2540 4220 Beprnted rom ASME 516.5105 and 198, by permision of The American Society of Mechanical rs. A rights reserved Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 225SECTIONS GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE 2-3.14_ RATINGS FOR GROUP 3.14 MATERIALS Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates 47Ni-2201~19F ‘MoB 581 Gr. NOBOO? (12) 1B 582 Gr. NO6007 (1) Notes: (1) Use solution annealed material only (2) The chemical composition, mechanical properties, heat treating requirements, and grain size requirements shell conform to the applicable ASTM specification, The manufacturing proce. dures, tolerances, tests, certification, and markings shall be in accordance with ASTM B 564, WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig Class Temp. 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500 20 t0 100 275 720 960 1440 2160 3800 ‘6000 200 245 645 860 1290 1935 3230 ‘530 300 230 600 795 1195 1795, 2980 4980 400 200 560 750 1125 1685, 2810 4680 500 170 535 ns 1070 1605 2675 4460 600 140 520 690 1035 1585, 2500 4320 850 125 510 80 1020 1535, 2555 4260 700 10 505 ers 1015 1820 2530 4220 750 95 500 670 1005 1505, 2510 4180 ‘800 80 495 660 995 1490 2485 850 65 435 0 975 1480 2435 4060 900 50 450 600 900 1380 2245 3745 950 35 385 515 75 1180 1930 3220 1000 20 365 485 75 1090 1820 3030 Beptinted trom ASME B16 6-1006 and 1996, by permision of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. All rights reserved me 226 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE 2-3.15_ RATINGS FOR GROUP 3.15 MATERIALS ‘Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates saNi-a2Fe-21cr_| 8 564 Gr. NOBBIO (1) 8 409 Gr. NO8B1O (1) NOTE: (1) Use solution annealed material only. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig Clase Tomp.,"F 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500 -20t0 100 230 600 800 1200 1800 3000 5000 200 205 540 720 1080 1620 2700 4500 300 195 505 7s 1015 1520 2530 4220 400 185 480 40 ‘960 1400 2400 4000 500 170 455, 610 910 1370 2280 3800 ‘600 140 440 585 ‘380 1320 2195 3660 650 125 425, 565 350 1275 2125, 3540 700 10 420 560 840 1260 2100 3500 750 5 a5 550 825 1240 2065 3440 800 0 410 85 as 1228, 2040 ‘3400 850 65 400 530 795 1195 1990 3320 900 50 395 530 730 1190 1980 3300 ‘950 8 385 515 75 1160 1930 3220 1000 20 365 485 75 +1080 1820 3030 1050 325 435 650 975 1625 2710 1100 : 320 430 640 965, 1605 2675 1180 : 275 365 550 925, 1370 2285 1200 : 205 25 410 620 1030 m5 1250 : 180 285 365 545 910 1515 1300 i 140 185 25 410 685, 1145 1350 105 140 205 310 515 860 1400 8 100 150 225 380 630 1450 : 60 80 us 175 290 485 1500 oa 40 55 es 125 205 345 Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1998, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Al rights reserved Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 227SECTIONS GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE 2-3.16_ RATINGS FOR GROUP 3.16 MATERIALS Nominal Designation Forgings, Castings Plates asnintecr-1%si_| 8611 Gr. No8330 (112) B 536 Gr. N08330 (1) Notes: (1) Use solution annealed material only. (2) The chemical composition, mechanical propentes, heat treating requirements, and grain size requirements shall conform to the applicable ASTM specification. The manufacturing procedures, tolerances, tests, certification, and markings shall be in accordance with ASTM B 564, : WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psig Class Temp. "F 150 300 400 500 900 1500 2500 20 t0 100 275 720 960 440 2160 3600 16000 200 245 635 850 1270 1810 3180 5300 ‘300 225 590 785 175 1765 2940 4900 4400 200 550 735 105 1655 2760 4600 500 170 525 700 1080 1878 2630 4380 ‘600 140 500 70 1005 1505 2510 4190 650 125 490 655 980 1470 2850 ‘4080 700, 110 480 es 965 10s, 2410 4020 750 95 470 65 940 1410 2350 3920 800 80 465 620 925 1390 2315 3860 850 65 455 605 905 1360 2270 3780 ‘900 50 48s, 530 865 1330 2215 3690 950 35 385 515 75 1160 ‘830 3220 1000 20 365 485 75 1090 1820 3030 1050 a 310 410 6s 925 1545, 2570 1100 240 320 480 720 1205 2005 1150 85 245 370 555 925 1a 1200 145 195 290 435 125 1210 1250 15 155 235 350 55 975 1300 8 130 190 285 480 795, 1380 6 100 150 220 370 65, +1400 : 55 75 110 165 280 465, 1450 c 6 Cy 95 140 230 385 1500, ae 35 6 70 100 170 285 Reprinted ram ASME B16.5-1006 and 1996, by permission of The American Socetyof Mechanical Engineers. Al gh reserved z a 228 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE 2-3.17_ RATINGS FOR GROUP 3.17 MATERIAL ‘Nominal Designation Forgings. Castings Plates 29Ni-20.8Cr-3.5Cu-2.5Mo ‘A351 Gr, CN7M (1) NoTE: (1) Use solution annealed material only. WORKING PRESSURES BY CLASSES, psi Class Tomp.,"F 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500 =20 t0 100 230 600 ‘800 1200 11800 3000 5000 200 200 520 630 1035 1555 2590 4320 300 180 465 620 930 1395 2330 ‘3880 +400 160 420 565 305, 1285 2m0 3520 500 160 390 520 780 w165, 1945, 3240 600, 140 360 420 720 +1080 1800 3000 Reprinted from ASME B16.5-1996 and 1998, by permission of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Allrights reserved Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 229SSSEEZEEES | SUNIRIZESE | ERRESEREES 5508) 8188 [Tasevere [Meal Are Slee SRHARAESS | REAANRIEE emeggesses ae88 | 8888 Saeed auaanagas| aazaeeetas| = SRRSURDEE| CEYBSTDGE| 222G) BASS SE SESEEEEEES (USES) SES (Copper and Cupre Nigel wenemnne Leb Nickel ween ‘Niekel-Copper| Sessdosed | ENN SHIEH i 44 | ERE EEE aca angaaan) ease sa cenenan anROURGEE| RSEEEENE [200820 sd | 2a) sal 4s] 925532555 aHRHHE0ERE|annmnesas grnngggay| gqueTeRE| a5] fHE8 TABLED? ASS | ABSGRYRNS| QUSUQUSSRN | ABMRGERHGS) SARURSEOND| QSBSOENRES | UURY SQRE GENERAL INFORMATION CHARACTERISTICS OF TUBING Adina nnn OD in fot per we. (Sp. Ge. of Water at OF. = 1.0) Nicke-Chome-Iron woven 1.07 Alemigtm BroR22 ore snes LOE ‘Alvin Brass ann 1.08 95] $08 |Oea4 £822] S2BRNEES|aBRSORDARE aynesedigs 228520589 S254502058 FENH) HEE 1 deny of 02836 Ib Jeu. in. For other meals muliply bythe following factors: SECTIONS 855) SESSA) ON je} | BMS) HEE SEES] SEEBAGES SAAIRAEEAG| ABRAESOUEE UGSEEENGE) SUESHNISE) S985 NES i aT H 9535 | SSE [EBS | SRUSONERE | SRERREGERS| SERAESAERE |EESRANSERG| SS5SSEGERS | EERE ZEEE | ki SE | vane [een ecomzeenea| eorsnzeesg|neorses soe i iu of Ligaid Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association Ibs. Per Tube Hout CxS. 230 ‘+ Ligaid VelocityGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE D-7M CHARACTERISTICS OF TUBING SN] Waar teem | Pert Sure | length Per | Sel Leng | kg Tete op. = Weights ate bated on low carbon steel with a density of 7.85 grc.cm. For other metals multiply by the following factors: Amina... vos O38 Aluminum Bronze, 108 Nickel Tia 038 ‘Aluminum Bras. 196 Nickel-Copper AISI 400 Series §/Stels 099 ‘NickelChrome-tron 107 (Copper and Cupro Nickels. ‘ALSIL 300 Series S/Steels. 102 Admicalty Co 198) kg Per Tube Hour + Liquid Velocity = Gp Gr of Liquid i meters per see. (Sp. Gr. of Waters 15.6 deg C= 1.0) Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 231BERBS BEySH HRANE Bees BERRK SERRE BE ¢ Ejgt | sana sages ansne RRRRE Base $899G SABHA HAHA BARAK REARN AASAN ANAAS RR an SRS SERGE BASU BSESR REBAR ASKER ARRAR RTRET BASSE BASSE Tams 08 HARDNESS CONVERSION TABLE ‘ROCKWELL HARDNESS NUMBER GENERAL INFORMATION ‘BR SREB EARS Uses eAAAR ReARE TAREE eR ‘RR RROBS USVGs BBRER BARES SEES §B3B8 BRGRS BERLE Sees RANA BARRA ARASR TAR 8 SEb88 B3B85 ReEbs BEIas sReRE ze RRRRE RRKK RBSEB ESBS FSTGY SER RREGR SBIR AsanR ReeTE Fe APPROXIMATE RELATION BETWEEN VARIOUS HARDNESS TESTING. SYSTEMS AND TENSILE STRENGTH OF CARBON AND ALLOY STEELS Quang gage crags agece anane eaage R2288 GSERR TBCE SECTIONS Fibs | savas aanan sven sense seees seen anges exane geona ceuca sanee ances oo Bgl. Brnall 62 to 682 with Carbide Bal “Handbook Val 1, Beh Editon Brnell 18 to 495 wit all Beng 12 601 wah Hu Nove ek ‘eriElio'e, ASM Metal Thlarenc ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 232GENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE DS INTERNAL WORKING PRESSURES (PS!) OF TUBES AT VARIOUS VALUES OF ALLOWABLE STRESS: Tike | Tike ‘Code Allowable Stress (PSD) ob. | Gy tnches_| BG | 2000 | 4000 | 6,000 | 8000 | 10000 | 12,000 | 14,000 | 16.000 | 18,000 | 20,000 oy 27 | 269 | sa9 | 909 | 107 | 1949 | 118 | 1908 | 2ise | 2408 | 2000 2 | aos | ott | ote | 122 | 1528 | 1033 | 2190 | 24a | 2750 | 056 2 | sz | 757 | 1195 | 1514 | 1903 | 2271 | 2650 | 2029 | 407 | 706 4x4 | 860 | 1304 | 1790 | 2173 | 250e | 043 | 47a | go19 | 4s47 zz | 492 | 8 | 1476 | 1908 | 2460 | 2052 | 444 | 3095 | 4428 | 4020 at_| sro | a4 | a71 | 221 | zase | s4ze | 062 | sea | siza | 5704 20 | 630 | 1261 | ter | ase | ates | aves | aaa | oss | 5675 | 6906 19 | 775 | 1552 | 2329 | stos | seer | aes | eae | e210 | e987 | 7769 18 | 920 | 1959 | 27eo | s7io | aeaa | seve | e508 | 7438 | ance | 9207 8 2 | 24s | 4o2 | 708 | 004 | 1201 | 477 | 1723 | 1969 | zoe | ate 2 | a7 | os | 962 | 1270 | 1690 | 1005 | 2223 | 25e1 | one | 176 at | 968 | 722 | 1000 | 145 | tex | 210s | 2564 | 2520 | szo7 | sees 20 | 40a | aos | 20 | tes | 2o17.| 2420 | 224 | 227 | 9631 | 04 19 | 492 | 984 | 1476 | 1968 | 2460 | 2062 | 2444 | 9006 | 4428 | 4920 te | 6aa | 1167 | 1751 | 2336 | 2018 | 3502 | 4085 | 4669 | 5250 | se96 17 | 708 | 1412 | atte | 2526 | 3530 | 4oas | 4o42 | seas | 6254 | 7050 te | a04 | to00 | 214 | sao | aoa | aaz0 | eae | 6439 | 720 | eov9 15s | 907 | 1814 | 2722 | 9620 | 4506 | s4ae | e251 | 7258 | ates | s079 4 | tov | 2tst | 3227 | 4503 | ss70 | ets | 7590 | e606 | 9682 | 10758 we ze | eae | aco | 703 | as | ave | s4o7 | tea | 1076 | 2110 | 2045 20 | 206 | sos | seo ] 1108 | 1403 | 1770 | 2076 | za72 | 2609 | 2066 19 | 360 | 720 | 1080 | 1440 | 1001 | 2161 | 2521 | 2aer-| 2s | 2602 18 | 425 | 250 | 1276 | 1701 | 2128 | 25se | 2077 | amoz | seve | 4259 17 | str) 1022 | 1534 | 2045 | 2567 | 2068 | 9580 | oor | 4o0e | sia ts | 00 | 1160 | 741 | 2se1 | 2oot | sas | 4062 | eae | 5220 | se0a 1s | 650 | 1201 | 1952 | 2503 | 3254 | 300s | 458s | s207 | sase | 6509 14 | 7s | 15st | 2207 | 062 | 3628 | aso | aso | e125 | aor | 7056 13 | 06 | 1702 | 2688 | aes | asst | 5377 | 6273 | 7169 | 0c | a0se 12 | tose | 212 | ates | 420s | seer | 6337 | 7393 | exo | 9505 | 10562 58 20 | 2s4 | 460 | 703 | 998 | 172 | 1407 | tes | 1976 | 210 | 2945 19 | 204 | 608 | ose | 1106 | 1420 | 1704 | 1988 | 2272 | asse | 2000 18 | a4 | 669 | 1003 | 1338 | 1672 | 2007 | as42 | 2676 | sor | sas 1 | 400 | aor | 1202 | 1603 | 2004 | 240s | 2806 | 207 | 608 | 4009 te | asa | 007 | 1961 | tors | 2058 | 2722 | s176 | 9630 | oes | 4507 1s | s07 | tots | 522 | 200 | 2597 | 3048 | 583 | 4060 | sea | so7s 14 | 504 | 113 | 1783 | 2377 | 2e71 | 566 | ate0 | 4754 | como | coo 1a | 602 | 1964 | 2076 | 27 | sas | 415s | aes | sso7 | e200 | ovat 12 | aio | tex | 2sse | sete | 4053 | ace | 5674 | o4es | 7206 | at07 11 | o07 | tor | 2722 | 520 | 4505 | ses | dst | 7258 | arcs | o079 to | 10as | 2070 | atos | 4140 | st7s | e210 | 726 | aze1 | sais | 10351 rn Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 233SECTIONS GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE D4—{Continued) INTERNAL WORKING PRESSURES (PS!) OF TUBES AT VARIOUS VALUES OF ALLOWABLE STRESS Be] Bee (Code Allowable Suess SI) laches |B 2,000 [4,000 | 6,000 | 6,000 | 10,000 | 12000 | 14000 | 16,000 | 18,000 | 20,000 a4 2 | 193 | 397 | ser | 775 | 969 | 1163 | 1357 | 1551 | 1745 | 1090 te | 27s | set | ez7 | soz | 1978 | 1654 | 1930 | 2205 | 24ei | 2757 7 | 929 | 659 | 969 | 1318 | te48 | 1978 | 2908 | 2697 | 2067 | 3207 se | 72 | 744 | 1117 | 1499 | 1862 | 2204 | 2607 | 2070 | ase | 704 1s | as | 031 | 1247 | t663 | 2070 | 2405 | 2011 | 927 | ams | 4150 14 | 40s | 971 | 1456 | 1942 | 2428 | 20s | so00 | 3005 | 4970 | 4056 13 | 6a | 1127 | 1601 | 2055 | 21s | sze2 | 3048 | 4510 | cove | seo7 12 | es7 | 1315 | 1073 | 231 | 280 | 04s | 4604 | sze2 | 020 | 6570 1 | 733 | 1467 | 2201 | 2005 | 669 | 44s | sts7 | 5e71 | 660s | 7290 to | 933 | 1667 | 2501 | 335 | 4160 | 5003 | sess | 6670 | 7504 | e309 9 | sar | 1974 | 2a | 3749 | 4608 | 62a | e561 | 7403 | a4as | oo7a 8 | tos | 2195 | 3203 | aan | ssso | e407 | 747s | ass | 611 | 10679 78 20 tes | a0 | 495 | 661 | 26 | 901 | 1157 | 1322 | sar | 1652 te | 2a | 469 | 703 | 8 | 1172 | 1407 | 1641 | 1878 | att | 245 7 | 27 | 559 | e390] 1119 | 1999 | 1679 | 1950 | 2230 | 2sto | 2700 re | os | est | 947 | 1263 | t570 | 1905 | 2211 | 257 | 203 | 3160 1s | 952 | 704 | 1057 | 1409 | rer | aia | ases | oars | ait | 3523 14 | 410 | eat | 121 | sea | 2ose | 24s | zara | 254 | 3605 | 4105 13 | 475 | ost | 1428 | 1002 | 2377 |. 283 | 3329-3004 | 4200 | 4765 12 | 653 | 1106 | 1680 | 2213 | 2767 | azo | ae74 | a4e7 | 4980 | 5536 " ere | 1232 | 1048 | 24s | 080 | 3607 | «ats | 4920 | sts | stat 10 | eos | 1906 | 2004 | 2702 | 40 | aie | 400s | s5e¢ | e282 | 6000 9 | 72 | 1564 | 2347 | s120 | ote | 4eo4 | 477 | 6250 | 7042 | 7024 e | ees | 176 | 2664 | 3562 | 441 | azo | e218 | 7105 | 7004 | seee 1 20 | 144 | 288 | ase | 576 | 720 | 64 | 1008 | 1152 | 1206 | 1440 se | 203 | 407 | or | ets | “G06 | 1223 | 1427 | 1631 | 1695 | 2000 17 | 243 | 408 | 720 | 973 | tate | 1450 | 1703 | 1948 | 219 | 2ase 16 | 27 | sas | e22 | 1097 | 1571 | 1645 | 1010 | 2108 | 2488 | 2742 15 | 905 | ot | 916 | 1222 | 1528 | 1093 | 2190 | asee | 2750 | 3086 14 | 955 | 711 | tose | 1422 | 1772 | 2193 | 2480 | 2044 | 3200 | 3556 13 | ait | 22 | 1203 | 1648 | 2056 | 24e7 | 2878 | 3200 | s7o1 | itz 2 | 477 | 955 | 1432 | to10 | 2303 | 2505 | 3343 | sear | 4200 | 4776 11 | 530 | tos: | 1592 | 2129 | sss | sis | avis | 4247 | 4778 | 5x00 to | 600 | 1200 | 1801 | 24or | 3001 | 602 | 4202 | 4e02 | 540g | 6009 9 | er | 1363 | 201s | 2608 | 3357 | 4029 | 4700 | sa7z | cous | rts 8 | 70 | 1520 | 22a | soar | ga01 | ase2 | 5322 | 6082 | 600s | 7009 234 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 ‘TABLE D-4{Continued) INTERNAL WORKING PRESSURES (PS!) ‘OF TUBES AT VARIOUS VALUES OF ALLOWABLE STRESS = | Re Cais Atowao San FS) SR, | SHE [2000 [| 400 [e000 | apo | 10000 | 12000 | 14000 | 16000 | veo | somo wm | | am | zo | oe | ae | ome | oor |* or | oe | tor | ses wo | ist | aos | aes | cer | ooo | or | vtoa | aos | tase | te10 te | 27 | ce | ost | ooo | soos | toce | toto | zee | tose | otro is | an | ao | ree | oes | taor | two | 600 | tooo | aie | ants te | ao | sot | en | azo | toe | tees | toes | coca | asou | os ts | ss | ee | on | taoe | tote | toe | 2205 | 2500 | ao10 | some 2 | aa | mo | size | tao | tera | cove | aco | ammo | oom | ar | as | ast | te | tea | aro | oes | aon | sear | ama | aiso to | to | ose | taor | tere | zeus | core | ona | arse | azar | do0o © | sea | tows | tsa | zee | asts-| otae | aose | ates | ars | seo & | so | tteo | tr | aset | cost | avez | tee | azo | sore | sooo 7 | eo | toot | 1002 | 2000 | sos | aoos | asco | czar | case | cso waa | wu | an | ao | oo | oo | ver | com | sox | vos | ame | one t2 | m0 | or | 2s | too | isea | test | 2160 | 2400 | 2777 | o0ee ur | a | 603 | 00s | tar | too | ost | 2000 | a7as | 2076 | aaio to | a0 | 60 | tree | too | toca | t200 | 2000 | sore | uaa | sous © | aan | oss | tas | tra | ztez | sro | zoo | seer | soss | cane t | a2 | ccs | tor | oxo | ose | cme | corr | camo | az | 4024 ee | am oe] ae |e rot | wre | tus | ari7 we | zr | as | oa | on | itso eos | tec | zoe| 2270 i | a2 | aoe | 700 | s008 | t2s0 | tere | t7ee | cove | 2260 | 2521 to | 203 | see | emo | tte | tate | tooo | 002 | 2255 | 25es | asst | a | cao | oe | tase | tor | iasr | zave | ast | aan | aus & | ass | 706 | tos | tata | vee | aio | aera | 2505 | are | sss ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 235SECTIONS GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE D-10 MODULUS OF ELASTICITY TEMP. DEG. F. MATERIAL 70 [100 [ 200 ‘900 | 1000] 1100] 1200 © SIL, CWO, HN-WO 292 | 290 | 285 22) 201 [178 |S ‘AUSTENIIC STN STL 203 | 28.1 | 27.6 235] 228 | 22.1 | 21.2 LOW CHROMES THRU 2% 2327 | 295 | 29.0 248] 239 | 230 | 21.8 2-1/4 CR-1 WO & 3.CR-1 MO | 306 | 30.4 | 29.8 256} 248 | 23.7 | 225 INT CR-WO (5-9% CR) 303 | 30.7| 30.1 24.7) 22.27 | 20.4 | 18.2 12, 13, 15 & 17% CR 292 | 290] 285 2] 215 | 19.1 | 166 Low NI STEELS THRU 3-1/2% {27.8 | 27.6 27.1 aia | 19.7 | 175] 153 NCU ALLOY 400 (NO4400) 260 | 258 | 25.4 aia] 212 90-10 CU-Ni (C70600) 179 | 17.6 ALUMINUM too | 99| 96 'NI-OR-FE ALLOY 600 (wos600) | 31.0 [308] 302 BO] 264 | 259 | 23 N-FE-CR (NOBGOO & NoBsI0) | 28.5 | 283 | 27.8 248 | 24.2 | 238 | 232 Ni-NO ALLOY B (N10001) 3t1 | 309} 30.3 271 | 264 | 260 | 25.3 NI-WO-CR ALLOY C-276 (10276) 29.8 | 29.6 | 29.1 259 | 253] 249 | 24.3 NICKEL 200 (N02200) 300 | 298 | 293 26.1 | 255 | 25.1 | 245 ‘COPPER & AL-BRONZE 170 | 169 [166 COMMERCIAL BRASS 150 | 149] 146 AOMRALTY 160 | 159 | 15.6 TAMU 155 | 154] 15.0 70-30 CU-Ni (C71500) 220 | 219| 215 NI-WO ALLOY B-2 (Nt0G6s) | 314 [312] 306 23 | 27 | 262 | 36 Ni-FE-cR-wo-cu (NoB825) | 28.0 | 27.8 | 27.3 244 | 38 WUNTZ (C36500) 150 | 149 | 146 ZIRCONIUM (R6O702) 144 | 139] 134 NI-CR-WO-CB (NO6625) 300 | 293 | 288 255 251 | 245 | 240 7 Wo (832900) 230 | 288 | 280 7_Mo PWS (532950) 230 17-19 CR SIN STL 23.0 ‘AL-BXN STN STL (NOB367) 283 | 28.1 | 27.4 | 268 | 26.1| 255 | 248 }24.1 | 234 228] 22.1 N-29-4-2 23.0 ‘SEA-CURE 310 22085 (831803) 29.0 | 288 | 28.2 | 276 | 27.0} 266 | 262 ‘3RE6O (531500) 29.0 | 28:7 | 275 | 268 | 26.0] 25. | 24.5] 238] 230 REFERENCES: ‘ASME SECTION 1, 0, 1998 EDITION RA. MOEN (COLLECTED PAPERS, LETTERS & DATA) HUNTINGTON ALLOYS, INC. BULLETIN f15M1~761~42 ‘ALLEGHENY LUDLUM ‘STEEL CORP. CABOT-STELLITE TELEDYNE WAH CHANG ALBANY INTERNATIONAL NICKEL CO. ASTM SPECIAL TECHNICAL PUBLICATION f 181 CARPENTER TECHNOLOGY TRENT TUBE ‘AIRCO, INC. SANDVIK TUBE 236 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE D-10 M MODULUS OF ELASTICITY 315.6] 371.1]426.7] 482.2] 537.8] 593.3 | 648.9 1820 ]174.4] 164.8) 153.1138 | 122.7 [1055 € Sil, C-MO, MN-MO AUSTENTIC STN STL 195.1] 193.7] 190.3] 186.2| 174.4]171.0 166.2] 162.0]157.2 [152-4 [146.2 LOW CHROMES THRU 2% 204.8|203.4] 199.9] 196.5 185.5 |181.3]175.8]171.0]164.8 |1586 | 150.3 2-1/4 CR-1 MO & 3 CR-1 MO | 211.0]209.6] 205.5] 202.7 191.0]186.8] 181.3]176.5| 169.6 |163.4 ]155.1 INT CR-MO (5-8% CR) 213.0|211.7| 207.5] 204.8) 193.1 [188.2 180.0]170.3]156.5 |140.7 [1255 12, 13, 15 & 17% CR '201.3)199.9 196.5 | 192.4 [188.2 184.1 |180.0]176.5]170.3]160.0 [148.2 [131.7 [1145 Low NI STEELS THRU 3-1/22 | 191.7]190.3 | 186.8] 184.1 180.0] 177.2 | 173.7 |169.6]158.6|147.5}135.8 | 120.7 | 1055 NI-CU ALLOY 400 (NO4400) 179.3|177.9 |175.1 {1724 | 170.3] 167.5 | 166.2 |163.4]159.3]195.8 152.4 |] 149.6 | 146.2 90-10 CU-N! (C70600) 124.1}123.4|121.3 119.3 | 116.5] 1145 [110.3 1062 ALUMINUM 683] 68.3 | 66.2] 634] 60.0] 55.8 7903] 186.2|162.0| 1786 | 1744 175.1]171.0] 166.9 | 164.1 | 160.0 NI-CR-FE ALLOY 600 (NO66O0) | 213.7]212.4]208.2|206.2)203.4) 199.9 NI-FE-CR (NOB#O0 & Nogei0) | 196.5] 195.1] 191.7] 1889] 186.5] 183.4 NI-WO ALLOY B (610001). 214.4) 213.0|208.9 |206.2| 203.4] 200.6 191.0] 186.8] 182.0] 179.3 | 174.4 NI-MO-CR ALLOY C=276 (W10276) 20:5] 204.1] 200.6] 197.2| 195.1] 192.4 182.7]178.6]174.4]171.7 | 167.5 NICKEL 200 (N02200) 206.8) 205.5] 202.0] 198.6 | 196.5] 193.7 32| 184.1] 180.0] 175.8] 173.1 | 1689 ‘COPPER & AL-BRONZE 1172] 1165]114.5| 1124 [1103 107.6 r ‘COMMERCIAL BRASS 103.4] 102.7| 100.7] 99.3 | 97.2 | 95:1 ADMIRALTY 110.3] 109.6} 107.6 106.2 |103.¢ 101.4 TAN 1063] 106.2] 103.4]100.7| 96.5 | 91.7 m2 70-30 CU-NI (C71500) 151.7] 151.0] 148.2 [1455 [142.7 |139.3 W-MO ALLOY B-2 (wi066s) | 2165[215.1|211.0]207 5205.5 [2020 72/782. | 168.2 | 164.1 | 1806 | 1765 NI-FE-CR-wO~CU (NoBs25) | 193.1] 191.7] 188.2] 185.5 ]183.4 | 180.6 171.7]168.2 | 164.1 MUNTZ (C38500) = 1034] 102.7] 100.7] 99.3| 97.2] 95.1 ZIRCONUM (REO702) 993] 958] 92.4]-855] 79.3] 738 NI=CR-MO-CB (N06625) 206.8} 202.0| 198.6] 196.5|193.7 |191.7 | 188.2|184.1 |180.0]175.8 | 173.1 |168.9 [165.5 7 WO (532900) 199.9 |198.6[195.1 | 189.6 7_mo PLS ($32950) 1999 TP 439 SIN STL 1999 ‘AL-6XN STN STL (NOB367) 196.1 | 193.7] 188.9] 184.8 | 180.0] 175.8 |171.0]165.2|161.5]157.2| 152.4 N-29-4-2 1999 ‘SEA-CURE 2137) 2205 (31803) 199.9 |198.5 | 194.4) 190.3]186.1 ]183.¢ | 180.6 ‘3RE6O (531500) 199.9 [197.9 | 189.6 |184.8|179.2|174.4 | 168.9}164.1]158.6 REFERENCES: ASME SECTION I, 0, 1998 EDITION INTERNATIONAL NICKEL CO. RA. MOEN (COLLECTED PAPERS, LETTERS & DATA) ASTM SPECIAL TECHNICAL PUBLICATION f 181 HUNTINGTON ALLOYS, INC. BULLETIN #15M1-76T-42 CARPENTER TECHNOLOGY ALLEGHENY LUDLUM 'STEEL CORP. TRENT TUBE CABOT-STELLITE ‘ARCO, INC. TELEDYNE WAH CHANG ALBANY SANDVIK TUBE Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 237SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION ‘TABLE D-11 MEAN COEFFICIENTS OF THERMAL EXPANSION Tw. oan TWENES PERCH PER DEG FX 107 BENEEN 70 F A, 700] 200 [300 | «00 | s00] eon | 700] ono | soo ] 1000] roo 00" [ 300 [ Tao arta teh ee fen pa a ees ee 72 WO & 1 CR-1/2 WO 73} 600 | 643 | 676] 706] 728] 751 | 771] 726 | 800 1 1/4-1/2 wo &3 o-1 wo] 553] sas | 626 | 661] 601 | 217] 241] 750] 277 fs20 | oe 206] 725 | 243 | 738] 270] 723]796| aos] 014 12M 627| 654 | 670 | 658] 716] 752] 7247] 761 0 sco| a0 | eso} 670| eso] 707] 723] 73a [750] 782] 772 wo fse0| ss | eso| 673] ea] 697| ros) 715 |724| 232 741 wo 2 9 ot-1 wo Isso] ss | sas| 602| 615] 6.20] eo] ast [sz] 671 | 622 13 ck Js10] 5.39 | soa] 615 | 630] 640] eas] ess |e0o| 657 | 672 ware fs10] 5.19 | 539] 552 | ses ez 17-19 8 (P 438) 350 570 ox an | eas “AL GWOS OFT 56 & 57 SW ST tsa] 876 [857 fooa roxe | oas [vaso [1032 | et ‘AL GOES OF TP 304 SHH SL __ [ass] a7 | 900 951007 |1018 | 10.29 | 1039 | 1043 AL WOES OF TP 321 SIV ST. 22] 916 | 9.26 367| 373 | 973 ‘945 | 390 | 995 ‘AL GOES OF TP 347 SM STL ae2| 832 | 922 0.22 }10.35 | 1045 | 1056 | 1066 | 1025 25 CRN2 W, 25 R12 M25 R20 127| 902 910| 918 ssa] 321] 925] 928] 232 207 | ‘950 | sa ‘A-601 (60367) 906 sof ost | 968 "xvurea (005) i ‘nun (6061) hs TMM (CODES 123 & 7) “ -cu (Nowa) 0 NACA (ost00) Ec TNCFE-OR (SEDO & WaHETO) 75 N-FE-OR-O-CU (N85) 2 New (oY 8) 09] 624] 635] 640] 641] 647 | 637] 655 -MO-C (Lor c-276) (410276) 0] 630] 650] 671] est! 708] 722] 733} [NICKEL (ALLOY 200) (W02200) 6.20) 6.39] 6.77] 7.21) 752} 7.74] 791] 805 | 816] 827| 850] 860] &70| B80] B90 | 890 os (s31003) 709} 700] 725] 750] 765] 720) 730] aco] | .SREBO (S31500) 8.25} 845] 8.61/°E76| 8.90 | 9.04) 9.16 70-30 Gu-M (7800) ‘830] a7] 890] 210 20-10 # 00-2 CHW 50 Covren 150] 200] 44 960] 970] 9:20] 29010:0}1020}1030] 1040} 050 as 210] $30 | sq] 970] 000|10:20|r050|10.70|190)1120|11.40]11.60 | 1190 | 12.10 ‘AUMIN ONE 209 1 wo (S09) $80] 600] 60] 620] 635] 650] 66a] xa] 205 | 725] 744] 755 | 7201 7 wo Pus (532950) 630] csr] 6.94] 222] 743] 750] 758 | 796] 808 | az | ate ‘oPPeR- SUDO ir) our 29 ream 33 350] 370] 390)" | aso} CR-NI-FE-MO-CU-CB (ALLOY 20¢8) 8.30) 9.40} 9.60 ‘N-CR-WO-CB (ALLOY 625) (606625) 's20] 6.20] 670] 7.12] 720] 7.30] 735] 745] 752] 7.60] 7.70] 720 | ao0| a20| 035 | aso no. 320 Si-O 535] 54s] 52] 581] 50] 525 REFERENCES: ASME. SECTION 1, 0, 1998 EDITION INTERNATIONAL NICKEL CO. RA. MOEN (COLLECTED PAPERS, LETTERS & DATA) ASTM SPECIAL TECHNICAL PUBLICATION # 181 HUNTINGTON ALLOYS, INC. BULLETIN $15M1~761-42 CARPENTER TECHNOLOGY ALLEGHENY LUDLUM STEEL CORP. TRENT TUBE CABOT-STELLITE ‘ARCO, INC. TELEDYNE WAH CHANG ALBANY ‘SANDVIK TUBE BRIDGEPORT BRASS COMPANY NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS ‘SABIN CROCKER, PIPING HANDBOOK, 4TH EDITION D.G. FURMAN, JOURNAL OF METALS 238 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE D-11M MEAN COEFFICIENTS OF THERMAL EXPANSION eelere! Ten PER om PER DEE C4 10 BEEN TUN OEE MATER 1289] -733] 37.8] 933 ss7a] 5833] e409] ros] 7600] PU CARBON ST. C-N ST Roos fose|inzofr2ar CoH. C12 uo & 1 cR-172 wo fraos f035| 1031 fos se40 Coane ST 1 1/41/20 83 CR-1 MO sss Jiao 423]1455 | 14 w-ao st. hogs ase |i27i| i305 ai Pipes za} 7/4 Rt WO 70} 206 Roane 5.01/20 hs 70fi2a1 346} 3% i375 70172 wo & 9-1 wo io3s}i08e 242] 260 | 1276 Rees ese pe |:075|a7 wor a 17 Jars fe fos7 jose ise) fits treab 68 (439) 8 as] fiir | rss | 220 TAL GOES OF? 56 & 3 SST hss faze fiew AL GOES OF TP 304 OH ST 535s haishiase AL GES OF 1 321 SW STL 24648 irs |r AL GES OF 1347 SW STL 32606 isso|ast Big M25 GID & 25 CH-20 W sa7|isze ia7|i6s4 [_x-0n (v08367) 1530 res rere a (305) fm fr faearpaais na (6061) fz far | za 2324 ‘awa (GOES 1.23 & 7) a Jase noo (oso) 140 154 : MCR-FE (800) 12.4 1294 Teck (seto & nT) vay sa al aaa here fase -F-CR-wO-O1 (8S) 1325p] 14131435] 1455 wo (ior 8) 101.25) t143] 1521s sng 209 N-wO-F (AlOY 28) (10278) 103134] 11.20} 208] ze] i274 1304 139 Nove (LY 20) (200) vise}10| 12191258] 15] 1424 faa} 4.691488]. fsa | 5] 1524] 0 02 = 4 1890 2032 poss |21.«2| 2173 1271 | 1305] 1339] 1373] 14.06 4.18 [14.36] 454] 1482] 14.068] (COPPER-SLLCON sour ‘Roo (R-W-FE-wo-CU-CB (MOY 20¢8) N-CR-WO=C8 (ALLOY €25) (908625) NB? 7 scl 2 nay sss]1323}ssef sss ssc] Sas foe fossa] raze] tsa] 1520 S-CURE a7 1012}1048| 054107] REFERENCES: ‘ASME SECTION 1, D, 1998 EDITION INTERNATIONAL NICKEL CO. RA MOEN (COLLECTED PAPERS, LETTERS & DATA) ‘ASTM SPECIAL TECHNICAL PUBLICATION # 181 HUNTINGTON ALLOYS, INC. BULLETIN. f15M1~76T-42 CARPENTER TECHNOLOGY ‘ALLEGHENY LUDLUM STEEL CORP. TRENT TUBE CABOT-STELLITE ARCO, INC. TELEDYNE WAH CHANG ALBANY SANDVIK TUBE BRIDGEPORT BRASS COMPANY NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS ‘SABIN CROCKER, PIPING HANDBOOK, 4TH EDITION D.G. FURMAN, JOURNAL OF METALS Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 239SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE D-12 ‘THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF METALS Ta Oe TOR ATO. ware. 7 [oo 00 son 00 [70 [on [00 [ooo] 100 | 00 00] 00] 100 ORGON STEEL 300 268] 256] 245 [235] 225 | 214] 202] 190 | 175] 162 [156 1/2 woey STEEL aus 243) 237] 280 | 222 | 214 | 204 | 195] 184 | 167 | 153 | 150 V cR-1/2 MO & 1-1/4 68-1/2 wo] 213 213] 2x3] 08 | 202 197 | 19:1] 105] 172 | 165] 150 | 48 2-1/4 OR1 MO na aia] ava 207 | 202 | 197 | 19 | 105 180 | 172] 158 [153 ScR-1/72 wo 169 152] 192| 190 | 187 1a4 | 190] 178 | v7 | 168 | 160 [158 7 eR-1/2 wo 14 va] w7ifi72 [73] 72 | | ve8] 66 | 62] 16 | 155 9 Rt wo na 158] 159] 160 | 161 | 16: | 61 | 160] 158 | 156] 152 | 150 3-1/2 NOXEL ns 24] z29|223 | 215 | 209 | 201 | 192 | 192 | r69] 155 | 153 12 0R & ISR 182 158] 1591159 | 159] 159 | 158| 155] 153 | 15,1 | 150 ]151 15 a 147] 142 | aa | 4a | ras | rae] tas | 4a | 4a] taa [as 17 ek 126 32] 133] ise] 195] 138] 137] BPS | rat fas | s ‘17-19 CR (TP 439) 1 308 SN STL as roa] rr} va | 122] 127] 32] 136] m0 | 45 1 316 & 317 Sw SH. 1 to9| 105]10 | 115] 120] 124] 129] 133 | 138 21 87 SW STL a roa] roa] sna | 119] 123 | 128] 133] 137 | 141 1 310 st St 73 26{ to. }ios | ina) us| 121] 125] 131 | 38 205 (551803) 0 103] t10}s | 120 S60 (551500) a 102] 108] 110 | 113 Teel 200 ua] 325] s8 25 | 50] se Meu (W400) 26 79] 179] 189 | 198 209 | 220 MI-CR-FE (N06600)_ 86 406) 11.1] 11.6 | 12.4} 126 | 132] 138 | 14.3 | 149] 155 | 16.0 MI-FE-CR (N08800) 67 9.1) 9.6} 101 | 106) 11.1] 11.6] 129] 127 | 132] 138 114.5, NOFE-CR-WO-CU (10825) as|_ 21] 96 | 100| 104 | 19 | 14 | 118 | 12a [129 | 136 WewO ALLOY 8 7a] 77] a2 | a7] a3] wool 107 N-MO-CR ALLOY C276 (410276) as] a7] 92] sal ros | sno] 115] 12 oa 961 27 nia} n2]ia | naj ns] na] ns | ea] ta mao] 830 lzzso}z23.0 s7o| 420470 | «90] sto | sso 230] 250270 | 00 | sso | 370 roa] 113 nial 127 37 za] 2) es| ox] 26] 101] 106] 1.0 | 115] 120 | 25 as 19 a 123] 129 |137 REFERENCES: ‘ASME SECTION 1, D, 1998 EDITION HUNTINGTON ALLOY, INC. BULLETIN: #15M1-761-42 ALMLE. TECH. PUBLICATIONS NOS 291, 360 & 648 ‘ALLEGHENY LUDLUM STEEL CORP. TELEDYNE WAH CHANG ALBANY TRANS, AS.S.T. VOL. 21, PAGES 1061-1078 BABCOX & WILCOX CO. AMERICAN. BRASS CO. TRENT TUBE ‘AIRCO, INC. (CABOT-STELLITE CARPENTER TECHNOLOGY INTERNATIONAL NICKEL CO. ‘SANOMIK TUBE 240 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION TABLE D-12M ‘THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF METALS SECTION 9 Tor, 066 © W/i 066. € ae ii] wa] S33] es Osis. [ara | 2627] aa22 [5578] 5033] 89] Toma] ven] ors] coRaOW STEEL sia 517] 05] 492] «78] 460] «43/26 | 007 | 280 | 37.0] 350] 529 | 305/80 [270 C-1/2 WOLY STEEL 429 | 433] 436] 434] 429] 421] 410] 88 | sae | 370 | 353] 337] 313 | 209] 265 | 260 1 cR-1/2 wo & 1-1/4 c2-1/2 wo 369 | 372| 373] 381] 379| 376] 369] 360 | 350] 341 | 331 | 320 | 308 | 286 | 260 | 255 21/4 Rt WO 362 | 363] 69] 372] 372] s70| 355] 358 | 350] 41 | 353] 320] 312 | 298 |770 |265 5 cR1/2 0 292 | 299] 313] 324] 331 | 352] 352| 29 | 324 | 13 | 312] 305 | 28 | 207] 277 [73 7/2 wo 24a | 243] 265] 277] 286] 202] za5| 200 | 209| wa | 95 | 291 | 207 | 200/70 [268 9 cR-1 Wo 222 | 227] 242| 24] 263] 270] 275]273 | 273 | 273 | 273 | 277 | 273 | 270 |263 | 260 3-1/2 MoxeL 398 | 402] 412] 417] 414] 405] 306] 386 | 374 | 3562 | 48] 352 | 315 | 292 | 268 [265 RRAR 263 | 265| 268| 270] 273| 273] 275|275 | 275 | 275 | 273 | 270 | 265 | 251 |260 | 261 15 246 | 246| 249] 251| 253 254| 254] 256 | 256 | 255 | 256 | 255 |z56 | 2.5 | 258 |256 [re zB | za) 222 | 225] 7 m8] 250] 732 | 234 | 25 | 287 | 9 | 204 | 28a |2e7 [oat 17-19 © CP 4) 22 1 304 SIN STL sag | 15:1] 161] 170] 120] reo] 196] 204 | 21. | 220 | z28| 235 | 242 | 25:1] 258 |265 WP 316 & 317 SW ST. 133 | 1327] 145] 156] 164] 173] 182] 199 | 199 | 206 | 215 | 223] 230 | 239 | 248 [255 We 321 & 47 STW STL 140 | 45] 152] 163) 171] 180] 1e9| 192 | 20s | 203 | 222 230] 237 | 244 | 253 | 260 310m St. t26| 150] 158] 49] 187] x66] 175] 1@4 | 192 | 201 | 209] 218] 227 | 235 | 264 |251 7205 (531803) 138 | 142] 155] 164| 173] 142] 190] 199 | 203 SRE60 (551500) 145 | 147] 156] 163] 170] 172] 183] 190 | 196 MEE 200 @72| oa] 613] 580] 562/550 | 562 [575 | ses ‘0 (404400) nia | 223} 241] 260] 279| 2a] 31.0] 27 | 43 | 362 | 38 NCR-FE (806600) 4g | 152] 1527] 166] 175] tea] 192] 201 | 209 | 218 | 228 | 239 | 247 | 258 | 268 |277 NEFEACR (N08800) st6 | 113] 128| 138] 149] 157| 166] 175 | 184] 192 | 201 | 299 | 220 | ze |259 |251 Ni-FE-CR-MO-CU (WO8E25) |__| 225] 152] 140] 49] 157] 166 1 173 | 180 | 189] 197 | 204 | 215 |223 | 255 Now ALOT 8 vos] wea] ris] v2] wea] 133] 142 | vst] ter | 173| tes] N-WO-CR ALOY 6-275 (410276) 102] 11:1] 12a] 140] 140] 251159 | 170] 180 | 190] 199 | 209 NUM ALLOY 303 s72a [1773 |1803]1823) /AUUIM ALOT 6261 1663 }1677|173]1743 TA (GRADES 1,23 & 7) z20 | 218| 203| 202] 195] 195 137| 204 MALTY hans frase] i367 || Nn, ASS 1229 |12a]1333 1385) comer sen. |s.7|s7.7 90-10 cu-w 519] 537] saa] 640 917 70-30 GU-W (C7500) 312} 323] 363] 208 eo 7 wo (552000) as2{ 161] 170] 17] 187 7 Mo PU (552350) 14g | 163] 177] 19.2| 204 waz fzz9) zRcom 23 (MO NOY 24-27 196 CRM-FE-WO-CU-CB (ALOY 2008) 132] N-CR-MO-CB (NLOY 625) 99 | 100] 107| 118] 125] 135] 162] 149 | 157] 166 | 175] 163] 190 | 199] 208 213 152 130 SEA-CURE 163 | 166] 178] ta9| 201] 21] 223 ]237 A=6En (408367) 139] REFERENCES: ASME SECTION’Il, D, 1998 EDITION HUNTINGTON ALLOY, INC. BULLETIN $15M1~767-42 ALM. TECH. PUBLICATIONS NOS 281, 360 & 648 ‘ALLEGHENY LUDLUM STEEL CORP. TELEDYNE WAH CHANG ALBANY TRANS, ASS.T. VOL. 21, PAGES 1061-1078 BABCOX & WILCOX CO. AMERICAN BRASS CO. TRENT TUBE ‘ARRCO, INC. ‘CABOT-STELUTE CARPENTER TECHNOLOGY INTERNATIONAL NICKEL CO. SANDVIK TUBE Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 2a1SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION ‘TABLE D3 BamplEIGHTS OF CIRCULAR RINGS AND Disc™ Required: Weight ofa Ring 48° OD x36 1/2"1Dx2 1/2" Thek fe “ Serge cts srt Eyeeow name Rue MEgeie. | RSE ~ ‘Weight per ] Weight per Weight per) Weight Soo eee os 7 : toe me aa, | pe | ee se} a a sao eas fe a oe ae | oe ae] ae | cus | Be | 22 cos | ce ie | oe | ke | Be] 2s om | on a | Ge | Ss | ee | se at | te tele | ee || aa co | Geer | ee | eee a cm ce ia] ce | 82 | ge] se cme ss | te | 8 | oe] ose ee ee ele masta im | te | se | 32 | see re tm | ce | SS] ss | ss ot | ne iam ag fees ea cee | 0 i ta a oo |) sm | tx | am | BS | aes | ses om | cee | se | fe] -28-j-e | oe : oe | sm | ie | se | Be | ses | ass on | cae | aa | aap Rae | = ae en elie ta ie ioe eee aoe fa) aa we | ie |. SZ | we |. ae oe x | ee fo Be pis |. ae een | ts tos | cas eee ee ee 2600 1.39 9.41 10.500 24.56 > 14,500 46.83. co |e ro [ts | ee pee |e zo |e oe | ioe | Se | Mes | ass ue | ois as [oe | ay | “ey as aa le ase | eo eee ae ee fee ee ee | ties es toe ao | 2 | RE | ua tae ; foee aay ss | ae) gas | oan forge | mS | se | sto ee) ee a be eo) ioe fe ea ee ee ey || ed oe AISI 300 Series Steels ‘Alominum Bronze . [Naval Rolled Brass (Copper & Cupra Nickels 242 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 TABLE D-13-{Continued) WEIGHTS OF CIRCULAR RINGS AND DISCS Wee Dianews | “intel” Diameter Dimmer | “athe aie Hees Tad Pounds Tear ine Fomds e702 25.000 21405 e782 25.125 21878 5082 25.250 21782 5673 28.75 21028 cose 25.500 zaiot 6156 25.628 art e249 25.750 22453 e43 25.875 226.31 e427 so71 27.000 228.08 e532 tons 27.128 ze? 6528 st027 27.250 zaise erz ast 27375 zaas eas 11278 27.800 2827 ono 11402 27905 227.08 718 1828 27780 22890 mar 11685 27875 073 18.000 var 783, 28.000 17463 33.000 24288 19.125 wai? want 2a.tes 7e19 35.125 24440 10.250 7419 12040 23.250 1778 35.250 246.25 19275 721 121.70 2aa75 ro 30375 248.11 183500 7823 rast 23.500 e082 33.500 24997 19525 mar 4s 29.625 tw251 33625 25184 18750] 7as1 2564 23.750 eet 35750 271 19275 7938 126.96 28875 18571 2875 255.60 19.000 soa 24.000 12020 29.000 19732 34.000 25749 19.125 ear 24.125, 2868 20.125 180.94 34.125 250.38 19280 e254 24250 13086 29.250 19087 34250 251.29 19375 est 24375 ra234 20a75 19220 34278 253.20 1.500 8470 24.500 13370 29.500 9084 34500 25512 19625 9579 24825 13507 20825 19548 34525 25704 2588 24,750 1646 20.750 97.14 34750 25897 19875 8799 24875 19782 29875 186.0 24875 27081 e910 25.000 3821 0.000 20047 35.000 27288 soi 25.125 os 20.128 zo24 35.125 zat oa 25.250 201 20250 200.82 35.250 2677 e247 2sa75 ade 20375 20sst 35375 207 east 25500 aos 20.500 207.20 35500 22071 9475 25.625 626 20825 20880 35.625 29269 9590 25.750 769 30.780 21081 35750 25467 9706 25875 4013 30875 21233 ase7 29867 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 243SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE D413 {Continued WEIGHTS OF CIRCULAR RINGS AND DISCS. Wai 5 5 Dimer ae en ee ‘Tite aieere tiles Tasks Fos ie Pods Take Foods Taser Pounds 26.000 znae7 41.000 s744a 48.000 anise 51.000 smo 26.125 zones 41.128 ment 46.128 a7a88 s1.t25 32218 36.250 2280 41.250 7300 48.250 aes 51250 85.04 26378 mart 41378 8120 40.275 479.00 51375 58790 36.500 074 41.800 amet 48.00 weisz 51.200 56078 36.28 41825 25s 46.028 40421 51625 e288 36790 0082 41750 25 48.760 ‘eset 51.750 est 25878 20287 41875 280.58 46275 490.42 187s 500.29 37.000 30493 42.00 seas 47.000 49208 2000 202.29 37.328 30890 421208 295.25 arias 2040s 52.12 08.18 37280 20008 42280 397.60 47280 49728 52280 08.00 27378 ana 42975 300.96 a7a78 49991 52375 611.00 27.00 raza 42.500 40222 47500 2028s 52800 e129 27828 aisa2 42825 10489 47628 50520 52625 61685 237750 a17a2 42750 aoro7 47.750 50786 22750 61979 27878 aies2 42075 aos a787 51082 52875 e273 32.000 zi 43000. | aise 48.000 s1a.19 52.000 2567 38.125 22075 aa135 44 4a.i08 51587 sat25 e209 30280 32508 43.250 sree ‘8.250 518.55 52250 e159 0375 mes01 43975 4806 42078 521.24 2375 e458 38.500 015 43.500 2a 48.500 e234 200 x79 30625 22220 43.825 2290 49.605 e284 625 e102 38,750 ues 43,750 12534 40.750 52035 5.750 east 38875 aosee 49075 are 29875 62207 e275 46.50 29.00 30870 44.000 wiz 48.000 204.80 4000 west 20.128 406 44128 ao88 40.135 50753 54.126 e282 30250 aan 44.280 ante ao20 | s4o27 54.250 6559 30375 usa 44978 22100 aoa s43.01 54375 a6 20800 7a 44500 41.08 54577 54.800 51.50 39625 us7a 44805 ase 48.83 54828 65453 28780 35194 44750 iss e128 54750 68787 300875 ste 44875 ane 38407 54.075 67073 40.000 60 45.000 451.05 50,000 356.85 5.000 ora79 40.128 asast 45.125 45256 0.128 550.64 55.125 67685 40250 2008s 45.250 49607 0.250 6243 58.280 erase wo375 3ea.t0 45978 45860 50375 65.23 55375 an00 40.500 esas 45500 aeui3 50.500 68,04 5.500 26.00 woe2s 34781 45625 16386 50.825 570.86 5.625 0.10 10750 30.87 45750 eet 50.780 57388 58.780 02.20 40075 72x 45078 075 50.075 57651 55875 625.29 244 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION ‘TABLE D-13-4Continued) WEIGHTS OF CIRCULAR RINGS AND DISCS SECTION 9 Waianae i apse Diamar Tach of. paneer | “ped” | pam | “omer” Diameter Thiet Tide Theness Ther Pownds Thea Pomnde Tacher Pounds Tasker 56.000 e095 61.000 east s7025 71.900 56.125 70189 61.128 e221 e733 7.325 36.250 70478 61.250 0562 s77s2 71250 56375 70790 61375 82903 seit 71375 56.500 Ti104 61.500 124s 0501 71500 55625 7419 e162 245.88 90371 71825 58.750 71734 61.750 e492 0243 71.750 56875 rast 61875 95278 90.15 71875 57.000 7ea88 62000 855.21 088 72.000 57.125 78.06 62.125 050.66 tooast 72:12 57250 7004 62250 953.13 100735 72250 57375 7323 62375 98860 tors.10 7375 57.500 7384 62.500 s7007 1or4as 72500 57625 7304 c2e2s erase ro19s2 72825 17481 57.750 74285 62750 87708 1022.39 72750 1178.86 57875 74807 62875 0088 1028.18 72875 e291 8.000 74929 63.000 22405 1029.96 73.000 1105.98 59.125 75283 63.125 887.55 1089.73 73.125 s191.08 52.250 755.77 63.250 201.08 ea2s0 | 100753, 73.250 198.12 58375 72904 20461 eas7s | to4ta4 73375 119920 58.500 78227 69.500 0a. 63.500 1045.15 73.500 1200.20 59.625 78558 63.625, e018 exces | 104096 73835 1207.29 59.750 78880 63.750 0522 e275 | 105279 73750 wis 58.875 Teor 63875 900.78 62.875 1086.82 ra875 121860 9.000 7535 4,000 s1234 1060.48 74000) wao72 50.125, 7884 64.125, sisst 10641 74.125 rz.e4 59.250 7a194 4.250 19.48 1068.16 74250 vzra7 59375, 725.24 04.375, 223.08 107202 74375 wen 59.500 7005 (64.500 s25.65 107588 74500 1208.28 50.425 ris? 4525 900.24 1079.76 74825 0041 59.750 re19 64.750 soaes 1089.84 74750 124457 50875 reasz 64875 $9748 1087.53 74375 1248.73 60.000 201.86 e107 roo | s081.42 75000 125291 60.125 205.20 94469 yores | 109532 75.125 1257.09 60.250 200.56 s4ase 70.250 1098.23, 75250 1251.27 e075 enist 951.98 7st 108.15 75375 1285.47 60.500 815.28 955.61 70.500 110707 75500 126087 e042 1885 059.28 7082s 4111.00 75825 1273.88 60.780 22203 9521 70.780 111493 75.750 1278.09 eo87s 25.42 95588 787s 1118.88 75875 12821 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 245SECTION 9 ‘TABLE Da3{Continued) WEIGHTS OF CIRCULAR RINGS AND DISCS. GENERAL INFORMATION =F "EF [onc EF [ae EF om | or lo | Bel | SF l— | Se ee Vo reo | ums | sioo | via | seco | vena sion | mam feiss | fone | teas | tacos | itis | fea | fae | ie mes | tacce | stam | toe | team | tomar | ire | ieee mae | woesr | stae | tse | tem | tonme | ste | teen mao | twe | tio | mo | sam | fem | fa | feo mes | tare | stom | too | sam | tener | sree | fee mro | isco | Sino | tame | fmm | tees | ioe | toe meas | wes | tos | teers | seas | tmtor | tam | toe rr | vwmee | eaao | vorre | mam | voor | comm | mean ms | feet | tore | too | cam | tome | fie | toe mao | ton | team | toms | ore | toon | seu | toe mas | fen | Sie | ae | fm | sea | See | ime mao | ieee | tooo | tees | tam | tm | fam | imen ros | iow | tos | tops | am | cose | eee | ten nm | wee | tm | ae | te | ooo | mom | fen ras | tom | tos | tease | me | oss | foam | tous vam [mene | mea | see | mum | mam | wean | omar me | me | om | cor | om | com | So | ioe mm | tee | sao | tan | cue | tam | ma | ten mes | wen | soos | tea | um | omar | mam | teen ma | ies | tao | tote | oun | nue | mae | teem mes | ees | mes | tore | cuz | moa | mae | tee me | ans | frm | tam | mie | toe | Sie | lore moe | tee | toes | tomer | ot fos | tea wm | won | exam | somes | oun oxo | mia me | wes | come | ees | oom tie | ime ms | tees | ciao | tenor | ora cm | ine mas | twee | tam | toon | oe tie | tee mam | ter | use | toon | oa size | ten mes | ium | tem | toe | ues | ima nro | wee | fm | tome | ore vm | teat mos | fotos | stow | tense | come vs | Sas wooo | vases | esom | seman |e mo | mom ae | ies | sie | tus | se ts | Sen fie | tae | Sue | ftom | sae tam | Ben soe | tee | foe | toe | a ss | ae feo | eo | tao | tees | ao ceo | ma See | Mee | Ser | team | soe cas | mee tm | teem | sro | tort | om sim | Sea aun | Meas | tems | wee | om tas | bee 246 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 9 ‘TABLE D-13_{Continued) WEIGHTS OF CIRCULAR RINGS AND DISCS. Wame i nape pe Tees | pee ree | ena | gece | cee Dinner | Mahe ee wide ts He ince Tod o__ hee a eer Toit soo | 20827 || tor00 | zzrte | tosooo | ssoceo || sns0m | araar sores | poser || tories | zzz | tosses | zone | tiie | ross sezo | zooser || totzso | zosoae | fonas | astest || tuaso | arsaze sears | metse || totars | zamos | tosars | phooas || itis | arson seso | zorazo || torso | cour | toss | sess || tite | areots seses | zoross || torees | cmosr | tones | zuaz || innees | armas sero | moose || to17s0 | zucca | tocro | asec || nize | artes sears | moos || toters | zat | tosars | amie | titers | rere ero | 00873 || 1200 | corsa | arom | oxo || tr20m | reac srics | arse || totes | zecsce | tortes | zseeto || tiers | aoo0as srs | atossr || toaeso | soars | tora | zsezor || trees | aonse sears | atta || tocar | zeues | tovars | zeeao || tears | tare sro | azar || toasoo | zwors | torem | zsreco | tres | astooe orezs | aizase || oases | zusee | torsos | seoce || tases | asst orzo | tens || toarso | ates peeot || ttareo | ots srars | ators || tars | zerat merce || tiers | assras aac | a1vo1e || 10a000 | zwaoa | tonoo0 | ssoaca || t1s0m | cours eres | tases || toatos | zuare | toaros | ceouou || tates | sous sez | ator || toa | zrasz | ooo | stor || isa | sors sess | aissso || toasrs | cuore | toaars | stew || toate | aoenos sao | aietor || tease | asonoe | tons | zeczte || ttasco | ena esses | atesss | toases | sore | tosses | anenta || tases | oraz sero | cirecs || toaro | zerse | tooro | ceoace || taro | cosace seas | aires || ioaams | 2uase | tosars | coco || tisers | easy coat | aioe || sosooo | cuore | tonom | zeae || tram | oooare ozs | zens || toatas, | zeraoe | tones | aesaaa | ttatzs | otor sez | aioato || toaaso | aeore | toozmo | esast || ttaaso | moras sears | aims | toasrs | acess | tomas | zeoceo || ttears | cotare soso | cost? || toasoo | 2uase | toosm | zero7 || tam | ezose cose | zeiore || toases | 2eeto | toees | zereco | ttesos | none soso | zeiszr || toaroo | ouace | toro | zoszso || ttez0 | scone sears | zatae || toasrs | 2uces | toners | seence || tiaars | aeons too000 | zara || tosoo | ausaro || rraco | amsre || 115000 | ausze tooias | zzsa0e f} toeras | ates |) tates | arotar || teres | asa too2s | zasese || tosas0 | zaerao | ttoas | zmvat |) tisaso | oss toss | Zura || oscars | aerazr | ttoars | arias |) tisars | aaeuss eos | zausze |) toss | zemta | ttosco | rier |) isso | aoris0 toes | zassse || tosecs | ausce | tioms | arses || stse2s | aorzas torso | zzeaso || ton7=0 | 24000 | ttomo | araece || 15750 | aonazr fours | zest || tocars | 200000 | toa | araeto || sisars | moze Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 247SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE D-14 CHORD LENGTHS & AREAS OF CIRCULAR SEGMENTS —— FA» AREA A=CxD? ST on k= CHORD k= 2[K(D-h)}'7 eaeeeeaeaees sess fear Taamfeae eae Fy sa eres Best at rsa ts sna] 248 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationMULTIPLY, Square Inches Square Feet Square Feet Square Inches muumieLy Cubic Inches Cable Feet, Cable Fest Gallona (U-S.tiq) Gallons (imp. Bares (U.S) Gatlone (U. Lg) utreLy ‘Ounces (AV) Pounds (AV.) Pounds (AV). MULTIPLY Pounds Per Cube Inch Pounds Per Cubic Fact Pounds Per Cube Foot “pounds Per Galion (U.S. Lig) Feet Per Second Feet Per Minute MULTIELY Pounds-Foree MULTIPLY Pounds Per Foot Hour Pounds Pet Foot Hour Pounds Pat Fot-Second ‘Square Feet Por Second Pound-Second Per Square Foot Degrees Fahrenhet Degrees Rankine Degrees Fahrenheit GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE D5 CONVERSION FACTORS ey, ‘se3e7162 oooaests. paste aes 454500 560073 S.o0a78s mass ey, 2s ‘53502 0483592 By 27600 reotee6 swor7es onts826 veLociry ay ‘30480 8.00808 Divide by 18 ‘AS84597 and Divide by 1.8 SECTION Milimeters Centimeters Metare Meters itometers ‘Centimeters ‘Cube Meters Chere Liters titers Gute eters ube Meters ‘TOOBTAN Grams Graeme lograms qOOBTAN ‘Grams Per Cuble Centimeter kilograms Per Cube Meter (Grams Per Ler ‘lograme Per Lner ‘TOOBTAIN Meters Per Second Meters Per Second ‘TOOBTAIN Kllonewtone. ‘TOOBTAN Centpoises ‘llogram-Second Per Square Meter Centpoises Cantistokes Contipoises TO.ORTAI egress Centigrade Degrees Kelvin Dagraee Kelvin Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 249SECTION 9 GENERAL INFORMATION ‘TABLE D-48-{Continued) CONVERSION FACTORS PRESSURE ay yoosTan S.oros07 ilograms Per Square Centimeter 3028 ilograms Per Square Meter ‘eure Newtons Per Square Meter, 4 ears seoare Pascal Inches of Hg ous Pounds Per Square inch 6307 FLOW RATE, MuLnPLy a yooRTAN Gallons Per Minute (U. 8. Lia) 00006308 ‘Gabi Meters Per Second Pounds Per Hour 8.001260 ‘Klograms Per Second (Cubic Feet Per Minute ‘ao00% Cuble Meters Per Hour Pounds Per Minute 07858 Kllograms Per Second SPECIFIC VOLUME TooBTAN Gile Meters Per Kilogram thkers Per Kilogram muLTPLy, ‘Cubic Feet Per Pound Gallons Per Pound (U.S. Lia.) MuLmeLy aru aru atu Foot Pound BTUPer Hour MULTIPLY. - TOOBTAN BTUPerPound-F Toutes Per Gram MuLTIELy TOOBTAN BTUPer Pound Joules Per Gram MULTPLy te JOOBTAN BTU Per Pound-F ‘Soules Pet Gram-c ucmPLy TOOBTAIN Watts Per Square Mater c Watts Per Square Meter ‘elocalorles Per Square Meter-Hour ‘ilocalories Per Square Meter-Hour? C [BTUPer Square Foot HourF TOOBTAN Watts Per Meter Watts Per Meter ‘localories Per Square Meter-Hour* C Per Meter MuLTPLy BTUPer Foot Hour. [BTU Per Square Fool Per [BTU Per Square FootHour"F Per Foot mum qponran HLL oot se perso Boston Frere cperiiowat oucsquare ost rereTo vane Sttre mete nour? Ser ocaloe mass voor mune 3 roosraN Fonds Per HourSquare Foot Eborasea Faogramn Per Square Meter-Second HEATING VALUE ue & yposran Ha PE Son rot Fhirase Fe rercusic meter 250 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationGENERAL INFORMATION SECTIONS Tams D-16 CONVERSION TABLES FOR WIRE AND SHEET METAL GAGES Values in approximate decimals of an inch. ‘Ava oumber of gages we in ue for various shapes and metals, it is advitable to state te thickness in thousandths when specifying gage’ number en acne 7 nay Hh othe se. | a3 obits coe vee exer, as ae ae a i le ed 3 | i Bd % 0323 eat a a a :| 2 Rd i | & EA 3 | oe we : Ef a 0.128 0.172, 0.1870 0.160 i | be a eee os |. | a | ge oe | i | Be a | a Hf | ge | se fl tame ee Bs. | oe oa casa} aes] —gase oat we | cae gate ie | i | ie te | ie as Bd ie | a 7 meer ee a | ae wee | age z e| Be | _ ie g zB | ty | i z = | ee ee 5 = Geer ee 3 = | we ra 3 zg | ie tia | ie z | we Ge | ie 2 = | ee ae 2 ae epee eens : a | age gem | gas z = | ie | ae e = | = | ee See elias 5 a 7 = | vee | gas % z | igs | ge 2 B.| igs ies : als is 3 ie § 2 er é é ies # 3 nae 7 q et g 3 Be 3 7 ie | ee | 8 METRIC WIRE GAGE is ea times the diameter in milimeies. 1 Sometimes used for iva wire. : ‘+ Someiimes used for copperplate and fr plate 12 gage snd heavier and for tel mbes. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 251SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE AGP SECTION This section of the TEMA Standards provides the designer with additional information and guidance relative to the design of shell and tube heat exchangers not covered by the scope of the main sections of the Standards. The ttle of this section, "Recommended Good Practice’, indicates that the information should be considered, but is not a requirement of the basic Standards. When a paragraph in this section (RGP) is followed by an R, C, and/or B, this RGP paragraph is an eaension o: amplification of a ke numbered paragraph in the RCB section ofthe main Standards. Similarly, other suffix designations following RGP indicate other applicable sections of the main Standards. 252 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP.G-7.11 HORIZONTAL VESSEL SUPPORTS RGP-G-7.111 LOADS RGP-G-7.1111 LOADS DUE TO WEIGHT | SMFwr = SMMwr_ SMSwr eee vse { RF un Fae Sie fixes es suBINe sions SxooLe SADDLE SADDLE FIGURE RGP.G-7.1111 4. CALCULATE COMPONENT WEIGHTS AND WEIGHT OF CONTENTS (OPERATING AND TESTING). 2. CALCULATE VERTICAL SADDLE REACTIONS & LONGITUDINAL SHELL MOMENTS DUE TO WEIGHT FOR THE EMPTY, OPERATING & TEST CONDITIONS CONSIDERING ACTUAL COMPONENT WEIGHT AND LOCATION. RVFwr = VERTICAL REACTION @ FIXED SADDLE DUE TO WEIGHT RVSwr = VERTICAL REACTION @ SLIDING SADDLE DUE TO WEIGHT ‘SMFwr = LONGITUDINAL SHELL MOMENT @ FIXED SADDLE DUE TO WEIGHT ‘SMSw = LONGITUDINAL SHELL MOMENT @ SLIDING SADDLE DUE TO WEIGHT ‘SMMwr = MAXIMUM LONGITUDINAL SHELL MOMENT BETWEEN SADDLES DUE TO WEIGHT RGP-G-7,1112 EARTHQUAKE FORCES CABAL CA | ) Pico rire rise Sco MSFea RF Sea wyssea FIXED fis saa SuDING ‘SADDLE b SADDLE FIXED ‘SLIDING. SADDLE SADOLE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1112 1. CALCULATE SEISMIC REACTIONS AND MOMENTS. e= SEISMIC FACTOR siiMca=SWMwrxCs——-RHSea =" RHFwr x Ce Since TOTALEXCHWTxcs | RVBeo™=(RLFeoxH)/L—MSFea= RHFeax H ALES TOSIDNGSADDLS) ——AVSea=(RUFeaxH)/L_——-MSSea = RHStoxH StiFeo= SFr x C= Rea = Rew 3 ‘SMSea= SMSwr x Cs. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 253SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE RGP-G-7.1113 WIND LOADS Lose { Were ee ‘SMFw ‘SMMw ‘'SMSw 2 aie Hf) OO} + PHN ri RHF LFW Risw RHSw Ne Flw WwW MSFw b—a il = fad MSSw FMED SLIDING oe RVFW RVSw a FIXED SUDING SADDLE SADDLE SADDLE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1113, 4, CALCULATE WIND LOADS (CALCULATE TOTAL WIND FORCE), FLw = Were x Here x EFFECTIVE WIND LOAD (AS DETERMINED BY APPROPRIATE CODE) Ftiw = Herr x Lere x EFFECTIVE WIND LOAD (AS DETERMINED BY APPROPRIATE CODE) RLFw= FLw (MAY BE CONSIDERED NEGLIGIBLE FOR SMALL EXCHANGERS) RLSw=0 (SLIDING SADDLE) SMFw= LONGITUDINAL SHELL MOMENT @ FIXED SADDLE DUE TO TRANSVERSE WIND. (SHELL MOMENT DUE TO LONGITUDINAL WIND MAY BE CONSIDERED NEGLIGIBLE) ‘SMSw = LONGITUDINAL SHELL MOMENT @ SLIDING SADDLE DUE TO TRANSVERSE WIND (SHELL MOMENT DUE TO LONGITUDINAL WIND MAY BE CONSIDERED NEGLIGIBLE) ‘SMMw = MAXIMUM LONGITUDINAL SHELL MOMENT BETWEEN SADDLES DUE TO TRANSVERSE WIND (SHELL MOMENT DUE TO LONGITUDINAL WIND MAY BE CONSIDERED NEGLIGIBLE) RVFw = (RLFw x Here/2)/L RHSw = FHw x (8+ 0.5L) /Lere) RVSw= (RLFw x Her!2)/L RHF w= FHw x (A+ 0.5L) /Lerr) RGP.G-7.1114 THERMAL EXPANSION LOADS LOADS CAUSED BY LONGITUDINAL GROWTH BETWEEN FIXED & SLIDING SADDLES + U fae fee zr fuFee | afer | FIXED ‘SLIDING rxeD SUING ay SADDLE ‘SADDLE ‘SADDLE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1114 {. CALCULATE LOADS DUE TO THERMAL EXPANSION (WHERE j= COEFFICIENT OF FRIGTION BETWEEN FOUNDATION ANO BASE PLATE AT SLIDING SADDLE). RLFor = RVSer x SNSoe = RLSoe xH RLSoe = RVSI XH SMe = RLSee x H SMFee= RUPE xH FOR STEEL=08 [t FOR LUBRICATED PLATE = 0.1 (254 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP-G-7.1115 COMBINED FORCES men = =e RiFer 7 RiFer | riser I” | Ser stew L . MSSexe RVFesr RVSer oe Le FIXED ‘SLIDING aoe SADDLE SADDLE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1115 4. CALCULATE THE COMBINED SADDLE REACTIONS FOR THE FOLLOWING CASES OR AS APPROPRIATE IN DESIGN CRITERIA: + DEAD WEIGHT EMPTY DEAD WEIGHT EMPTY + EARTHQUAKE + DEAD WEIGHT OPERATING ‘+ DEAD WEIGHT OPERATING + EARTHQUAKE + DEAD WEIGHT FLOODED ‘+ DEAD WEIGHT FLOODED + EARTHQUAKE : ‘+ DEAD WEIGHT EMPTY + WIND + DEAD WEIGHT OPERATING + THERMAL EXPANSION ‘+ DEAD WEIGHT OPERATING + WIND OR ANY OTHER APPROPRIATE COMBINATION + DEAD WEIGHT FLOODED + WIND 2. CALCULATE RESULTANT SADDLE LOAD & SHELL MOMENT FOR WIND/EARTHQUAKE CASES: RVFerr = LARGER OF (RVFwr’+ RHFw*)'? OR (RVEwr + RHFect ) = ee RVSert = LARGER OF (RVSwr?+ RHSw?)!2 OR (RVSwr®+ RHSec*) 'SMFerr = LARGER OF (SMFwr2+ SMFW®) OR (SMFet2+ SMFea?) ‘SMSerr = LARGER OF (SMSwr?+ SMSw*)!” OR (SMSwr?+ SMSed )* ‘SMMerr = LARGER OF (SMMwr2+ SMMw?)® OR (SMMwr2* SMMea?)!? RGP-G-7.1116 EFFECTIVE REACTION LOAD SADDLE ANGLE RVerr Ranax ACTUAL SADDLE ANGLE EFFECTIVE SADDLE ANGLE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1116 4. CALCULATE THE EFFECTIVE SADDLE ANGLE FOR EACH SADDLE FOR ALL WIND AND EARTHQUAKE CASES. 2. EFFECTIVE SADDLE ANGLE = (ACTUAL SADDLE ANGLE DIVIDED BY 2) - ARCTAN(RHIRV)) x 2 (SEE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1116) Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 255SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE RGP-G-7.112 STRESSES ONCE THE LOAD COMBINATIONS HAVE BEEN DETERMINED, THE STRESSES ON THE EXCHANGER CAN BE CALCULATED. THE METHOD OF CALCULATING STRESSES IS BASED ON "STRESSES IN LARGE HORIZONTAL CYLINDRICAL PRESSURE VESSELS ON TWO SADDLE SUPPORTS", PRESSURE VESSEL AND PIPING: DESIGN AND ANALYSIS, ASME, 1972, BY LP. ZICK ‘Si'= LONGITUDINAL STRESS AT SADDLES (TENSION AT TOP, COMPRESSION ‘AT BOTTOM) ‘84> CIRCUMFERENTIAL COMPRESSION AT. ONGITUDINAL STRESS, AT SADDLE WITH STIFFENER PS i Sr LONGITUDINAL STRESS Tt AT MIDSPAN BOTTOM OF SHELL ‘Sp CIRCUMFERENTIAL ‘STRESS AT HORN ‘S2= TANGENTIAL SHEAR - RESULTS (OF SADDLE IN DIAGONAL LINES IN SHELL FIGURE RGP-G-7.112 I ee 'S, = TANGENTIAL SHEAR IN HEAD 256 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP.G-7.1121 LONGITUDINAL STRESS AT MID SPAN (S1) ‘Sher tHl|—— = 4--|H4 fl Eset t 2 LONGITUDINAL STRESS LONGITUDINAL STRESS (METRIC) syes(-Suer) Sie2(-SMEE) a0", see WHERE ‘SMMerr = MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE SHELL MOMENT AT MID SPAN (SEE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1115) into (mm-kN) JUTSIDE SHELL RADIUS, inches (mm) = SHELL THICKNESS, inches (rm) RGP-G-7.1122 LONGITUDINAL STRESS AT THE SADDLE WITHOUT STIFFENERS (S:’) -— THIS AREA IS INEFFECTIVE AGAINST LONGITUDINAL BENDING IN AN UNSTIFFENED SHELL el | as LONGITUDINAL STRESS LONGITUDINAL STRESS (METRIC) = Sueno Ser Ba Sher Mr apy wu 2SNacosa-2 SE wi] Ae sinacosa-2 588 SIRES - C054) ‘(SIN C058) WHERE ph ‘SMFerr , SMSerr = MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE SHELL MOMENT AT FIXED. ‘OR SLIDING SADDLE (SEE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1115) indb, (mm-KN) = OUTSIDE SHELL RADIUS, inches (mm) ts = SHELL THICKNESS, inches (mm) 4 ‘A= 4 EFFECTIVE SADDLE ANGLE, radians — EFFECTIVE SECTION MODULUS OF ARC Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 257SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE 1123 LONGITUDINAL STRESS AT THE SADDLE WITH STIFFENER RINGS OR END CLOSURES CLOSE ENOUGH TO SERVE AS STIFFENERS (S:") 4 f i aH Sige == ye SMSye ! iL t + 4 | 2 oe LONGITUDINAL STRESS LONGITUDINAL STRESS (METRIC) SMFerr or SMSere SMFere or a) Seco 0 ore (Si WHERE ‘SMFerr , SMSere = MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE SHELL MOMENT AT FIXED. OR SLIDING SADDLE (SEE FIGURE RGP-G-7,1116) inb, (mm-kN) UTSIDE SHELL RADIUS, inches (mm) ‘SECTION MODULUS = 11? ts ,inches® (mm?) 1s = SHELL THICKNESS, inches (mm) *) x10 ka IF THE SHELL IS STIFFENED IN THE PLANE OF THE SADDLE OR ADJACENT TO THE SADDLE ‘OR THE SADDLE IS WITHIN A 1/2 OF THE END CLOSURE, THEN THE ENTIRE SECTION MODULUS OF THE CROSS SECTION IS EFFECTIVE, ALLOWABLE STRESS LIMITFOR Si, Sr'& Si" ‘TENSION - THE TENSILE STRESS + THE LONGITUDINAL STRESS DUE TO PRESSURE TO BE LESS THAN THE ALLOWABLE TENSION STRESS OF THE MATERIAL AT THE DESIGN TEMPERATURE TIMES THE JOINT EFFICIENCY OF THE GIRTH JOINT COMPRESSION - THE COMPRESSIVE STRESS |S TO BE LESS THAN THE B FACTOR IN THE CODE FOR LONGITUDINAL COMPRESSION (OF THE MATERIAL AT THE DESIGN TEMPERATURE. 258 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP-G. 1124 TANGENTIAL SHEAR STRESS IN PLANE OF SADDLE (8:) A) UNSTIFFENED SHELL || ete 4 i eel a RVFere or RVSere ‘TANGENTIAL SHEAR STRESS ‘TANGENTIAL SHEAR STRESS (METRIC) K(RVFerr or RVSEFF) Ts MAXIMUM SHEAR AT @=a WHERE RVFerr, RVSerr = MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RESULTANT SADDLE LOAD AT FIXED, (OR SLIDING SADDLE (SEE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1115) in, (mimkN) ©, degrees B =(180-§ ), degrees A CONSTANT Ke FOR, an 7h $+ fp) radians VARIOUS VALUES OF © oe = OUTSIDE SHELL RADIUS, inches (mm) Ta [4.471 ts = SHELL THICKNESS, inches (mm) 130 [1.072 “140° [0.900- ees 7150" 10.799. = 8) SHELL STIFFENED BY RINGS IN PLANE OF SADDLE ‘STIFFENING RING Vale 4. { 2 TANGENTIAL SHEAR STRESS TANGENTIAL SHEAR STRESS (METRIC) «PVF ere) ux PARVFO OF RUSE)" kg eee 7 WHERE RVFerr , RVSerr = MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RESULTANT SADDLE LOAD AT FIXED ‘OR SLIDING SADDLE (SEE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1115) in-lb, (mm4N) = QUTSIDE SHELL RADIUS, Inches (mm) ts = SHELL THICKNESS, inches (mm) tex b= ate ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 259SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE. ©) SHELL STIFFENED BY END CLOSURE (A <1/2) hatte: . ba PA TANGENTIAL SHEAR STRESS. TANGENTIAL SHEAR STRESS (METRIC) cox Maverer Ser). gx KARVEer or RUSE) 40,0 MAXIMUM SHEAR AT WHERE RVFerr , RVSere = MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE SHELL MOMENT AT FIXED. (OR SLIDING SADDLE (SEE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1115) in-lb, (mitiekN) 6, degrees p =(180-9 degrees a=2-8 (+4) , radians CONSTANT Ks FOR VARIOUS VALUES OF @ {= OUTSIDE SHELL RADIUS, inches (mm) a KNESS, inches (rim {s= SHELL THIC (mm) te Ne fac StacOSe 0° [0.722 ea SINGCOSS. 40" | 0.582 1150" [0.485 ALLOWABLE STRESS LIMIT THE MAXIMUM TANGENTIAL SHEAR STRESS. FOR CASES A, B, & CIS TO BE LESS THAN 0.8 TIMES ‘THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE STRESS IN TENSION, OF THE SHELL MATERIAL AT THE DESIGN TEMPERATURE, 260 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP.G.7.1125 CIRCUMFERENTIAL STRESS AT HORN OF SADDLES UNSTIFFENED (2) ap CIRCUMFERENTIAL STRESS AT HORN OF SADDLE. FORLs2 6 _ _ (RVFere OR RVScrr) _3Ks(RVFerF ORRVScrr) Ib Sam = ais(b + 10ts) : 2s + int or FORLs<ér (RVFere OR RVSerr) - SagRVFer ORRVE er) | to 7 Ata(b + 108s) Usts?’ in? CIRCUMFERENTIAL STRESS AT HORN OF SADDLE (METRIC) FORLs2 @r _ [[ RVE@rORRVSen) __2KyRVFerr OR RVSeR| “[- eer OR Ruse) =o | x10 sea FORLs <6r _[[ (Aviron Rvser) __ konfevFerr OR VSI] Sa [- Ats(b + 10ts) Lets? x10 kPa WHERE RVFer, RVSere = MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE VERTICAL REACTION AT THE FIXED AND ‘SLIDING SADDLE RESPECTIVELY, Ib (kN) = OUTSIDE SHELL RADIUS, inches (mm) b= WIDTH OF SADDLE, inches (mm) Ls= SHELL LENGTH BETWEEN TUBESHEETS OR BETWEEN SHELL FLANGES OR BETWEEN SHELL FLANGE TO HEAD TANGENT LINE, inches (mm) Ks = CONSTANT FROM FIGURE RGP-G-7.1125 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE STRESS LIMIT FOR S1 = 1.25 TIMES ALLOWABLE STRESS IN TENSION FOR THE SHELL MATERIAL AT DESIGN TEMPERATURE. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 261SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE Figure RGP-G-7.1125 VALUE OF CONSTANT Ks ‘A= Distance from tubesheet or shell flange or head tangent line to center of saddle, inches (mm) T = Outside radius of shell, inches (mm) 0.05: 0.04 0.03. VALUES OF CONSTANT Kg 0.02 0.01 0.0 RATIO A/r 262 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 FGP-G-7.1126 STRESS IN HEAD USED AS STIFFENER (S,) If the head stiffness is used by locating the saddle close to the head, tangential shear stress should be added to the head pressure stress. The tangential shear has horizontal components which cause tension across the head. Central -2@+5, entral Angle a = 7% Zee 5 radians B = (180 - 0/2), degrees r Kj. 3 pee m -a + sino cosa, ‘a 8, degrees 7 \\ = Constant K, Value For Various Saddle Contact Angles, 0 PS pe ' 120" 0.401 130° 0.362 140" 0327 150" 0.297 Stress In Head Stress In Head (Metric) (VE qq OF RVS pq) Ky Ib (RVE eg oF RVS oe) Ky ara Oe ———] «108, kPa Thy Tt Where ty = thickness of head, inches (mm) Allowable Stress Limit ‘The tangential shear is to be combined with the pressure stress in the head and should be less than 1.25 times the maximum allowable stress in tension of the bead material at design temperature. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 263SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE RGP-G-7.1127 RING COMPRESSION IN SHELL OVER SADDLE (S,) The sum of the tangential forces on both sides of the saddle at the shell band causes a ring compression stress in the shell band. A width of shell equal to Sts each side of the saddle plus th saddle width resists this force. Wear plates of greater width than the saddle may be used to reduc the stress. B = (180 - 6/2), degrees O42) radians : : Central Angle a 5 *30 1+ cosa - @ + sin a cosa, Coistant Ks Value For Various Saddle Contac Angles, @ XA a 6 Ks 120° 0.760 130° 0.726 = 140 0.697 150 0.673 Ri ae Ri : Metri (RVF.q or RVSzq) Ks Ib (RVF yy Or RVS.q) Ks S,=——____—_ +» — S8,= | ————___———|k 10°, ts(b + 10ts) E: 15(b + 10ts) Where b = saddle width, inches(mm) Allowable Stress Limit ‘The maximum compressive stress should be less than 0.5 times the yield stress of the material atthe design temperature. This should not be added to the pressure stress. 264 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP-G-7.113 DESIGN OF SADDLE PARTS DETERMINE MAXIMUM LOADS FROM APPLICABLE LOAD CONDITION ‘SEE FIGURE RGP-G-7.1115, eRHFERE RLFEFF Msrerr — 1 MSSEFF RHSEFF . RLSEFF RVEEFF RVSEFF THERE ARE MANY TYPES OF BASE PLATE, WEB & GUSSET ARRANGEMENTS. THE FOLLOWING APPROACH IS OFFERED AS ONE OF MANY. CENTROID OF SADDLE ARC WEB z WEB xT = Ferr : 1 cusseT t y BASE PLATE CALCULATE PROPERTIES OF SADDLE ABOUT X-X & Z-Z AXIS ASAREA, in®(mm? ) lx-x, [2-2MOMENT OF INERTIA ABOUT x-x OR z-z, int(mm*) ‘Sx-x, Sz-2=SECTION MODULUS ABOUT x-x OR z-z, CHECK WEB & GUSSETS AS COMBINED CROSS-SECTION FOR BENDING BENDING STRESS ABOUT BENDING STRESS ABOUT cx AXIS X=» AKIS (METRIC) sp = Hee. 8, sp = MEX x 105, KPO ‘Sx-x ‘int Si WHERE Mx-x =(RLFEFe OR RUSEFF) X LerF , in-Ib (mm-kN) Sb <90% YIELD STRESS BENDING STRESS ABOUT BENDING STRESS ABOUT 2-2 AXIS 202 AXIS (METRIC) 2-2 < Sb = so + MEZ_ x 108, 4Po WHERE Mz-z_=(MSFEFF OR MSSeFF), in-Ib. (mm-KN) Sb < 90% YIELD STRESS Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 265SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE (CHECK WEB & GUSSETS AS COMBINED CROSS-SECTION FOR COMPRESSION STRESS IN COMPRESSION, Sc= vfs or Ree STRESS INCOMPRESSION, so= BVEer ot RVSer_ , 1, fiay ‘STRESS LIMIT = ALLOWABLE COMPRESSIVE STRESS COMBINE STRESS FROM BENDING AND COMPRESSION ACTUAL BENDING STRESS, __ ACTUAL COMPRESSIVE STRESS "ALLOWABLE BENDING STRESS "ALLOWABLE COMPRESSIVE STRESS 266 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP.G-7.12 VERTICAL VESSEL SUPPORTS ‘THE VESSEL LUGS DESCRIBED IN THIS PARAGRAPH INCORPORATE TOP PLATE, BASE PLATE AND ‘TWO GUSSETS. OTHER CONFIGURATIONS AND METHODS OF CALCULATIONS ARE ACCEPTABLE. APPLIED LOADS mas T pee Mie i. i : aN a oa TENSION al ' in TOTAL = ee i ae b+ as t w w [\ | N i ANALYZING (EMPTY, OPERATION, FULL OF WATER, ETC...) 1b (KN) NUMBER OF LUG SUPPORTS. H B= BOLT CIRCLE, inches (mm) ‘M= OVERTURNING MOMENT AT THE SUPPORTS. DUE TO EXTERNAL LOADING, in-b (mm-kN) “MW 4 MAX TENSION = 4M — W (UPLIFT) GEN ON T ! | i w W= TOTAL DEAD WT. PER CONDITION | t 1 «1b (kN) ew> 4 no upurt exists 8 aM, Ww MAX COMPRESSION = SM” + +b (kN) RGP-G-7.121 DESIGN OF VESSEL SUPPPORT LUG LL = LOAD PER LUG(TENSION OR COMPRESSION), Ib (KN) EC = LOCATION OF LOAD REACTION, inches (mm) SUPPORT WITH TWO GUSSETS ee P. Ht = DISTANCE BETWEEN TOP PLATE t {AND BOTTOM PLATE, ees (rn) = ‘To = THICKNESS OF BOTTOM PLATE, inches (mm) ‘Tt= THICKNESS OF TOP PLATE, inches (mm) ‘Tq = THICKNESS OF GUSSETS, inches (mm) ‘TP = TOP PLATE WIDTH, inches (mn) GB = BOTTOM PLATE WIDTH, inches (mm) bw = BEARING WIDTH ON BASE PLATE, (USE 75% OF GB IF UNKNOWN), inches (mm) La pe LEXEC. KES N) iL bec a—-| Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 267SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE RGP-G-7.122 BASE PLATE GONSIDER BASE PLATE AS A SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM SUBJECT TC UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD a, ib (kN) +9)? Ma = BATE to (mk) c WHERE tt =e 2) a+ 219 4 © = g+2Tg ‘in (mm, le FOR TENSION DUE TO UPLIFT, CONSIDER BASE PLATE AS SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM WITH A CONCENTRATED LOAD LL, Ib (kN) u ATITS CENTER vir BETO nt gray BENDING STRESS : BENDING STRESS (METRIC) eu* bb eu 6 oe sp = OMT x toh iP KT Tn wendy Sb < 90% YIELD STRESS M™ = GREATER OF Ma OR Mr RGP-G-7.123 TOP PLATE ASSUME SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM WITH UNIFORM LOAD 5 2 to 2 Me Sete am coma i the, = 2 (a) °° Tate hm (mm i & = BENDING STRESS BENDING STRESS (METRIC cc sb=— 0M 50-108 ka 3 CC in? TPF Sb < 00% YIELD STRESS RGP-G-7.124 GUSSETS {re 1 z a =ancran SSATP. degrees El © = eccenicty=£0- SB. inches (nm) MAX. COMPRESSIVE STRESS ATB MAX. COMPRESSIVE STRESS AT B (METRIC) = —eerrltbesgr— «t+ St = gare eer 11 + 88 x th ta Se*—eexTgx(cosay? «(1 * Ge Se=—G5xT9 x (COS a) 1 Gp x10, ‘Sc < THE ALLOWABLE STRESS IN COMPRESSION (COLUMN BUCKLING PER AISC) 268 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP-G-7.2 LIFTING LUGS (SOME ACCEPTABLE TYPES OF LIFTING LUGS) RGP-G-7.21 VERTICAL UNITS ;— eaaeswve —} ; a) Cae) TAILING LUG i I i i TALING TRUNNION I TRUNNION ‘TRUNNIONS SHOULD BE CHECKED FOR BENDING & SHEAR. VESSEL REINFORCMENT SHOULD BE PROVIDED AS REQUIRED. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 269SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE RGP.G-7.22 HORIZONTAL UNITS @ 2 -L HL eg ee — 4 LU {14 SUNG LIFT PREFERRED METHOD OF LIFTING IS SLINGING ae -L-H-—-—- 9 -—-—- E ca SHELL ERECTION LUGS ONLY IF SPECIFIED BY CUSTOMER, RGP-G-7.23 TYPICAL COMPONENT LIFTING DEVICES UETING LUG 270 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP.G-7.24 LIFT PROCEDURE. {- ESTABLISH LIFT PROCEDURE. LUFT PROCEDURE Is ESTABLISHED BY CUSTOMER. This STEP MAY NOT BE NECESSARY FOR ROUTINE LIFTS. TOTAL WEIGHT EXAMPLE: . 1 ee Seer VERTiCA ‘SPREADER, SLING OR TAIL LUG feleny eu ADIACENT TO BASE RING \ he Tl] 2. CALCULATE WEIGHT TO BE LIFTED. : 3, APPLY IMPACT FACTOR. 1.5 MINIMUM, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. 4, SELECT SHACKLE SIZE, NO IMPACT FACTOR IS APPLIED UNLESS CUSTOMER SPECIFIED. SHACKLE TABLES ARE AVAILABLE FROM ‘SHACKLE MANUFACTURERS. 5, DETERMINE LOADS THAT APPLY (SEE ABOVE FIGURES). Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 271SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE 6, SIZE LIFTING LUG. THICKNESS OF LIFTING LUG IS CALCULATED BY USING THE GREATER OF SHEAR OR BENDING. RESULTS AS FOLLOWS: ¢ 1 = REQUIRED THICKNESS OF LUG, inches (mm) ‘Sb = ALLOWABLE BENDING STRESS OF LUG, psi (KPa) S = ALLOWABLE SHEAR STRESS OF LUG, psi (kPa) L = WIDTH OF LUG. inches (mm) h = DISTANCE, CENTERLINE OF HOLE TO COMPONENT, inches (mm) > = DESIGN LOAD / LUG INCLUDING IMPACT FACTOR, Ib. (kN) 1 = RADIUS OF LUG, inches (mmm) 4 = DIAMETER OF HOLE, inches (mm) REQUIRED THICKNESS FOR SHEAR REQUIRED THICKNESS FOR SHEAR (METRIC) t= ——> ____._ nches te ——2 + x 108 mm SNe 62) aSyr- a2) REQUIRED THICKNESS FOR BENDING REQUIRED THICKNESS FOR BENDING (METRIC) 6ph sph x 105 mm «inches ‘Sb(L)? so)? USE GREATER OF THICKNESS REQUIRED FOR BENDING OR SHEAR. NOTE: COMPONENT SHOULD BE CHECKED AND/OR REINFORCED FOR LOCALLY IMPOSED STRESSES. 272 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 RGP-G-7.3 WIND AND SEISMIC DESIGN For purposes of design, wind and seismic forces are assumed to be negligible unless the purchas specifically details such forces in the inquiry. Se eee ‘When such requirements are specified by the purchaser, the designer should consider their effects ‘on the various components of the heat exchanger. These forces should be evaluated in the design of the heat exchanger for the pressure containing components, the heat exchanger supports and the. device used to attach the heat exchanger supports to the anchor points. Methods used for the design analysis are beyond the scope of these Standards; however, the designer can refer to the selected references listed below. References: (1) ASME Boller and Pressure Vessel Code, Section Ill, "Nuclear Power Plant Components” (2) "Earthquake Engineering’, R. L. Weigel, Prentice Hall, Inc., 1970. (@) "Fundamentals of Earthquake Engineering’, Newark and Rosenbluth, Prentice Hall, Inc., 1971. (4) Stee! Construction Manual of the American Institute of Stee! Construction, Inc., 8th Edition. (6) TID-7024 (1963), "Nuclear Reactors and Earthquakes’, U.S. Atomic Energy Commission Division ‘of Technical Information. (6) "Earthquake Engineering for Nuclear Reactor Facilities (JAB-101)", Blume, Sharp and Kost, John ‘A. Blume and Associates, Engineers, San Francisco, California, 1971 (7) "Process Equipment Design’, Brownell and Young, Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1959. RGP-RCB-2 PLUGGING TUBES IN TUBE BUNDLES In U-tube heat exchangers, and other exchangers of spgcial design, it may not be possible a fasile to Temove and replace defective tubes. Under certain conditions as indicated below, the manufacturer may plug either a maximum of 1% of the tubes or 2 tubes without prior agreement. ‘Condition: (1) For U-tube heat exchangers where the leaking tube(s) is more than 2 tubes away from the periphery of ‘the bundle. (2) For heat exchangers with limited access or manway openings in a welded-on channel where the tube is. located such that it would be impossible to remove the tube through the access opening in the channel. (8) For other heat exchanger designs which do not facilitate the tube removal in a reasonable manner. (4) The method of tube plugging will be a matter of agreement between manufacturer and purchaser. (6) The manufacturer maintains the original guarantees. (6) “As-built drawings indicating the location of the plugged tube(s) shall be furnished to the purchaser. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 273SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE RGP-RCB-4.62 SHELL OR BUNDLE ENTRANCE AND EXIT AREAS This paragraph provides methods for determining approximate shell and bundle entrance areas for common configurations as lusrated by Figures RGP-ACE-4.6211, 4.6212, 4.6221, 4.6222, 46201 Results are somewhat approximate due to the following considerations: {2} Nor-unitorm foeation of tips atthe periphery of he burce (2) The presence of untubed lanes through the bundle. (3) The presence of tie rods, spacers, and/or bypass seal devices. Full account for such concerns based on actual details wil result n improved accuracy. (1) Nozzle located near the bends of U-tube bundles. (2). Nozzle which is attached in a semi or full tangential position to the shell (3 (4) Impingement plates which are not flat or which are positioned with significant clearance off the bundle. Special consideration must be given to other configurations. Some are listed below: Perforated distribution devices. (6) Annular distributor belts. RGP-RCB-4,621 AND 4.622 SHELL ENTRANCE OR EXIT AREA The minimum shell entrance or exit area for Figures RGP-RCB-4.6211, 4.6212, 4.6221 and 4.6222 may be approximated as follows: op (Ep2) 222 ee (02) FP. where A, = Approximate shell entrance or exit area, inches 2 (mm 2), D., = Nozzle inside diameter, inches (mm) ‘h-= Average free height above tube birndle or impingement plate, inches (mm) h=0.5(hy+h2) for Figures RGP-RCB-4.6211, 4.6212 and 4.6222. h=0.5(D,-OTL) for Figure RGP-RCB-46221. fh, = Maximum free height (at nozzle centerline), inches (mm) hz = Minimum free height (at nozzle edge), inches (mm) hye hy -0.5[D,-(D, +.) D,= Shell inside diameter, inches (mm) OT L= Outer tube limit diameter, inches (mm) F = Factor indi ing presence of impingement pate F = Owith impingement plate F = 1 without impingement plate 274 Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 P, “Tube center to center pitch, inches (mm) D,=Tube outside diameter, inches (mm) F . = Factor indicating tube pitch type and orientation with respect to fluid flow direction F2=1.0for Be and be F,=0.866 for He F2~0.707 tor Om RGP-RCB-4.623 AND 4.624 BUNDLE ENTRANCE OR EXIT AREA ‘The minimum bundle entrance or exit area for Figures RGP-RCB-4.6231 and 4.6241 may be approximated as follows: Ayn B,(D,- OTL)*(B,K~A,) where Ay= Approximate bundle entrance or exit area, inches 2 (mm 2). B, = Baffle spacing at entrance or exit, inches (mm) K = Effective chord distance across bundle, inches (mm) K =D, for Figure RGP-RCB-4.6231 A= Area of impingement plate, inches 2 (mm 2) A,=0 for no impingement plate ny? for round impingement plate Ap= Ip? for square impingement plate 1,~ Impingement plate diameter or edge length, inches (mm) A, = Unrestricted longitudinal flow area, inches 2 (mm 2) Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 275SECTION 10 RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE ‘The formulae below assume unrestricted longitudinal flow. A(=0 for baffle cut normal to nozzle axis 4:~ 0.Sab for Figure RGP-RCB-4.6231 with baffle cut parallel with nozzle axis i= 0.S(D,~ OT L)e for Figure RGP-RCB-4,.6241 with baffle cut parallel with nozzle axis, = Dimension from Figure RGP-ROB-4.6231, inches (mm) imension from Figure RGP-RCB-4.6231, inches (mm) Dimension from Figure RGP-RCB-4,6241, inches (mm) RGP-RCB-4.625 ROD TYPE IMPINGEMENT PROTECTION £04 t¥be impingement protection shall utlize a minimum of two rows of rods arranged such tube ™num bundle entrance area is provided without permiting direct impingement om any tube. Shel entrance area may be approximated per Paragraph RGP-RCB.4.622, Figure RGP-RCB-4.6221. Burcle entrance area may be approximated per Paragraph RGP-RCB-4.624, Figure RGP-RCB-4.6241. 276 ‘Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE SECTION 10 FIGURES RGP-RCB-4,6211, 4.6212, 4.6221 AND 4.6222 ‘SHELL ENTRANCE OR EXIT AREA r RGP-RCB- 4.6211 IMPINGEMENT PLATE FULL LAYOUT i i ( 0,-OTL)/2 Or / a hooky ae ot RGP- RCB -4.6212 IMBINGEMENT PLATE - PARTIAL LAYOUT ry jd he + RGP~ RCB-4. 6221 No -AMPINGEMENT PLATE FULL LAYOUT poop ma FIGURE RGP-RCB— 4.6222 NO IMPINGEMENT PLATE - PARTIAL LAYOUT oD, On ho a tn ees (0,-OTLI2 SOS (D,-OTLY/2 Se Leen \ 4 <2 24 >4 DRY 0.003 002 | 0.002 | 0.003 | 0.002 (0.002 SALT? _| 0.008 (0.002 (0.002 0.005 0.004 0.004 35010 450°F ‘450° F and over VELOGITY FT/SEC VELOCITY FT/SEC <2 24 >4 <2 24 24 DRY 3004 | 0.003 | 0.003 | 0.005 | 0.004 (0.004 sar | 0.006 | 0.005 | 0.005 | _0.007_|_0.006 0.006 “Assumes desalting @ approx. 250° F Gasoline e008, Naphtha And Light Distilates (0,002-0.003 Kerosene (0:002-0.003, Light Gas Ol! (0.002-0.008 Heavy Gas Ol (0.003-0.008, Heavy Fuel Olls (0,005-0.007= “Asphalt And Residuum: ‘Vacuum Tower Bottoms 0.010 ‘Atmosphere Tower Bottoms, 0.007 Cracking And Coking Unit Streams: ‘Overhead Vapors. (0.002, [Light Gyole Oil (0,002-0.003 Heavy Cycle Ol (0,003-0.004 Light Coker Gas Oil [0,009-0.004 Heavy Coker Gas Oil (0,004-0.005 Bottoms Siurry Oil (45 Ft/Sec Minimurn) 0.003 Light Liquid Products (0.002 Standards Ot The Tubular Exchanger ‘Manufacturers AssociationRECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE Fouling Resistances For Oil Refinery Streams- continued SECTION 10 Catalytic Reforming, Hydrocracking And Hydrodesulfurization Streams: Reformer Charge 0.0015 Reformer Effiuent [0.0015 Hydrocracker Charge And Effluent™ (0.002 Recycle Gas (0.001 Hydrodesulfurization Charge And Effluent™ (0.002 (Overhead Vapors (0.001 Liquid Product Over 50° A.P.L 0.001 Liquid Product 30 -50°A.P.L 0.002 may be many times this value. “Depending on charge, characteristics and storage history, charge resistance Light Ends Processing Streams: (Overhead Vapors And Gases (0.001 Liquid Products (0.001 ‘Absorption Oils 0.002-0.003 ‘Alkylation Trace Acid Streams 0.002. Reboiler Streams 0.002-0.003 Lube Oil Processing Streams: Feed Stock [0.002 ‘Solvent Feed Mix [0.002 ‘Solvent. (0.001 Extract* (0.003 = Raffinate (0.001 ‘Asphalt (0.005 Wax Slurries* (0.003) Refined Lube Oi (0.001 ‘Precautions must be taken to prevent wax deposition on cold tube walls, Visbreaker: Overhead Vapor 0.003 Visbreaker Bottoms 0.010 Naphtha Hydrotreater: Feed 0.003) Effiuent. 0.002, Naphthas 0.002 Overhead Vapors: 0.0015: Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 289SECTION 10 290 Fouling Resistances for Oi RECOMMENDED GOOD PRACTICE lefinery Streams - continued Catalytic Hydro Desulfurizer: Charge (0:004-0.005, eluent 0.002 H.T. Sep. Overhead 0.002 Stripper Charge 0.003 Liquid Products 0.002 HF Alky Unit: ‘Alkylate, Deprop. Bottoms, Main Fract. Overhead Main Fract. Feed * [0.003 All Other Process Streams 0.002 Fouling Resistances For Water | Femperatsigrn UpTo240°F _240 to 400° E Temperature Of Water 125°F Over 125°F Water Velocity Ft/Sec_| Water ‘Velocity Ft/Sec 3and Less |Over 3 gand Less | Over 3 Sea Water 0.0005, 0.0005 0.001 0.001 Brackish Water 0.002 0.001 0.003 0.002 Cooling Tower And Artificial ae Spray Pond: Treated Make Up 0.001 0.001 0.002 0.002 Untreated 0.003 0.003 0.005 0.004 City Or Well Water 0.001 0.001 0.002 0,002 River Water: Minimum 0.002 0.001 0.003 0.002 Average. 0.003 0.002 0.004 0.003 Muddy Or Silty 0.003 [0.002 (0.004 (0.003 Hard (Over 15. Grains/Gal.) 0.003 0.003 }0,005 0.005, Engine Jacket, 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Distilled Or Closed Cycle Condensate 0.0005, 0.0005, 0.0005 0.0005 Treated Boller Feedwater 0.001 0.0005 0.001 0.001 Boller Blowdown 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.002, Ifthe heating medium temperature is over 490° F and the coating medium is known to scale, ratings should be modified accordingly. Standards Of The Tubular Exchanger Manutacturers Association theseA ‘Acoustic Resonance or Coupling Air Tost. ‘Alowable Warking Pressuro of Tubos. ‘Aloy, TEMA Definition. ‘Aloy Clad Tubeshaets ‘Alloy Shells, Misimum Thickness ‘Anodes: ‘Area, Bundle Entrance and Exit. Sogments of Circles. ASME Code Data Reports B B Class Heat Exchanger, Denton. Backing Devices Batfls and Support Piates Cross, Clearances. (Cross, Minimum Thick cuts Holes Impingement. Lengitudinal ‘Spacing, ‘Special Cases. Special Precautions. Type Bolted Joints Boltng, ‘Dimensional Data End Flanges. Foundation. Internal Floating Head Pass Alb Area, ‘Size and Spacing Tightoning Type. Bundle Ciesning ‘Bunale Entrance and Exit Area ‘Bungle Hold Down. By-Pass Valves c Class Heat Exchanger, Definition. ast on, Sorviee Limitation ‘Channel Covers ‘Channel Cover Formula Channel Cover Grooves. Channel Pass Partitions Channels, Minimum Thickness Channels, Type Designation & Size Numbering (Grouiar Rings and Discs, Weights ot Circular Segments, Areas of CGieaning Heat Exchangers Gloaniness, Inspection. Gleaniiness Provisions... (Clearance, Cross Bales & Suppart Plates ‘Glearance, Wrench & Nut Code Data Reports Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 95,117 24 288, 234, 235, 23 “45,74 9 28 36, 274-278 1248 14 23 38, 98 3 ‘31,92 92,83 3 81, 122 38 a8 33,34 34 33 at 19 198, 189 88, 281, 26 oar 38, 30 282 3 18 4 Bie 38 86,87 18 2aeo7 248 46.21, 22 15,19 7 32 588, 189, 14 186, 187, 188 150 Connection Pressure Gage. Protection Stacked Unita, Thermometer Vent and Drain. Consequential Damages Construction Codes Conversion Factors, Correction Factors for Mean Temperature Diferane en. Correction Factors for Boting Moment CGortasion and Vibration Corrosion Allowance. ‘Countortiow Exchangers Covers, ‘Channel, Floating Head Shell Cical Properties (Cross Bates, D Damages, Consequental Data Reports Detective Paris... Definitions. Density, ‘Gases, guia. Design Conditions, Design Prossures Dosign Tomperatu Diameters, Batfle and Support Plata, Tube Holes Tubeshost Holes Dimensions, ‘Botting Ftungs, Welding Flanges, ASME=. Pipa, Welded and Sesmioss. Tubing Dirt Removal Disassembly for inspection Osmanting Cieszance: Double Tubeshosts Drain Connections Draining Exchangers Drawings Dit Tolerance, Tube Hole Dil Driling Tolerance, Tubssheets. — Elssticty, Modulus of End Flanges. Entrance & Ext Areas, Tube Bundi... Exchangers (See Heat Exchanger) Expansion Joints, Shel. Expansion, Mean Costicients of Thermal Expanded Tube Joints “168, 175, 249, 250, INDEX 1 a7 91,82 ot ‘36,91 a4 23 sets 93 4 uA, 25, ‘27, 138, 147 88, 280, 281 38, 98, 40 3 82, 182 3134 150, 186, 157, 158 “150, 154, 155 18 ea 24 3 771 188, 189 185 186, 187 — 184 "20,281 47 20 7 e-62 4856.91 48, 20 18,34 72,73 7 236, 237 28, 93, 04, 21, 282 36, 274-278 62 38, 230 22.72, 73, 280 291INDEX Fabrication inspection Febrcation Tolerances . Faciltles for Cleaning Heat Exchangers Finish, Tubs Holes Fittings, Dimensions of Weiding, Fixed Tubeshoats Flanges, End 25,99, 94, 281, 262 ASME Standard 486, 187 Bot Clearances... 188, 109 Spit Type 2 Pressure-Temporature Fating 180-229 Protection, : : 15 Floxble Shel Eiomants 7508 Floating Heads, 38 Backing Davices 38, 59 Packed : 40, 41, 42 Interna, : 38, 99, 40 Nomenclature 3 Outside Packed 40,41, 42 Packed Lantern Ring 4 ‘Tube Bundle Supports ae) Floating Tubesheet 2, 85, 55 Flue Density, ‘ one 180, 154, 188, Fluid Temperature Reiations $26, 127 Fouling Economics of 126, 285, Effect of 126, 283, 264 Indication of 19 Fouling Resistance, CChemioal Processing Streams... 207 Industrial Fluide 286 Natural Gas-Gasciine Processing Streame. 287 Oi Retinery Seams 286, 289, 290, Water : ee 290 Foundation Bois Semen ett a7 Foundations = 7 a is Gages, Standard Diameters. ar Gaskets (Peripheral & Pass Partition) a) ‘Materia aa a Replacement monn Joint Detale “43. 4a General Construcion Features. vont, 16 Generalized Compressiblity Chavis. 186, 187, 158 Grooved Channel Covers, 90 Grooved Tube Holes... . 7 Grooved Tubssheets 74 Guarantoas 44.15 H Handling Tube Bundi... 21 Hardness Conversion Taio. vo BS2 Hoat Content Petroloum Fractions. 181, 167 Heat Exchanger Arrangement Diagrams, va Parts and Nomenclatutexsccsnnnnnn 34,5 Standard Dimension Tolerance ven Hoat Traneter : 124 Heat Treatment, U-Tubes 28 292 Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association Holes... Bates and Support Piates Diameter and Tolerance, Tube’ Finish, Tbe nn Grooving Hycrostate Tet Pressure Impingement Baas, ‘Bundle Entrance and Exit Areas Protection Flequirements Shell and Tube Side, Inspection, Claaniness. Inspection, Fabrication instalation of Heat Exchangers Internal Floating Heads Keto Type Reboir, Typical ilustration. L Latent Heats of Various Liquids. Leaks, Locating. Leveling Heat Exchangers Litng Devices an. Ugaments, Tubeshests Minima ‘Load Concentration Factor, Flanges Longitudinal Bttos.... Maintenance of Heat Exchangers. Material Warranties i Materials: Deintion of Terms ‘Mean Coatficients of Thermal Expansion.. ‘Mean Metal Temporatur Moan Temperature Difference (Seo also MTD) Motel Resistance, Finned & Bare Tubing Metal Temperature Limitations... ‘Minimum Inside Depth Channels & Bonnie Minimum inside Depth Floating Heads. Modulus of Elastin MTD Correction Factore 18 238, 24, 128 129, 126, 127, 26,2 134-1N Name Plates Natural Frequencies, Tubes. Nomenclature of Heat Exchanger Components Nomenciature. Nozzles, Connections. Floating Head Loadings Spit Flanges ‘Number and Size of Te Rods ° ‘Operation of Heat Exchangers ‘Operating Procedures Outside Packed Floating Head Pp Packed Floating Heads. Packing Boxes Packing Material Pats, Replacement. ase Pertilon Grooves... Pass Patton Plates Pass Paton Rib Area. Performance Failures Performance Guarantees Period inspection Physical Properties of Fluids Pipe, ‘Dimensions of Welded and Seamioss Shel Pipe Tep Connections Piping Loads Pitch, Tubes Plato, Sho hugging Tubes in Tube Bundles. Postwold Heat Treatment Floating Head Covers Channels and Bonnets Preparation of Heat Exchange fr Shipment. Pressure Gage Connection Pressure Loss. Pressure-Temperatire latngs for Valves, Fittings, ‘and Flanges... Pressure, Tube Working Protection, Impingement. ‘Shipment. Pulling Mechanism, Pulsaing Flue R F Ciess Hoat Exchanger, Denton. Fatings, Valves, itings, and Flangos (Soe Pressure-Temporature Ratings) Reboiir, Kotte Type, Iustation Recommended Good Practice, RGP Section. Replacement Parts Flemoving Tube Bundle fing Flanges, Spit Rings, Weighs of 18,19 cB, 18 “46,41, 42 126 190-229 290295 38 ar Bi74 18) 89 23 5 52 18 2 92 2az2a7 INDEX s Safety Relet DevCES nnn 18 Sealing Devices 36 Seamless Pipe, Dimensions of a4 Segments, Cicular 288 Seismic Design 6 283.268, Shall Covers, Minimum Thickness... 3 shells, Diamotes.ocnesnnnnn 30 Mustatons 2s Longitudinal Sires oo 67,68 Miniroum Thickness, 30 ‘Size Numbering & Type Designation a2 Tolerances aan ‘Shipment, Proparation of Units 45 Shop Operation, 13 ‘Shutting Down Operation. 18 ‘Size Numbering of Heat Exchangars. 4 Spacers and Tie Rods. 35,36 Spare Parts (inca 1812244 Specific Gravity, {50 Hydrocerbon Liquids : 54155 Specific Hest, 480, 151 ‘Gases, Miscellaneous, Atmosphoris Pressure, 165 Gases at High Pressure, 150, 181, 168 Hydrocarbon Gases, ‘Atmospheric Pressure, 150, 161, 162, 163, Liquids, Miscellaneous 150, 164 Petroleum Fractions Liquid 150, 158 Patroloum Fractions, Vapor: 160, 160 Specification Sheet, Exchanger nn 14,12 Spit Type Nez Flanges. 2 Stacked Unt —— cst, 92 Starting Operation... 18 ‘Stese Rleleving (Seo Postweld Heat Treatment) Support Plates, Hotes: rarer anmeorneeeeree St Spacing. 38,34 121 Thickness 32,33 Supports. 16.7, 15, 16, 255-268, T Temperature, Umitatons, Motal 24 Multipass Flow, ar Shocks. 19 ‘Temperature Eificiency, 27, 128 Cexniion xchange 147 1 Shell Pass... as 2 Shell Pas 149 Tost Connections. oe 18 3 Peumatic oF Ligid 28.24 ‘Tost, Standard oo con, 24 Test Rng... a I 21 ‘Thermal Gondtiviy. 7 Bao, 244 ‘Conversion Factors ‘6s, 249, 250 {Gases end Vapors, Misoelaneous a2 guide, Miscellaneous... 474 Uiguld Betoloum Fractions 470 Metals. : aaa, aan Pressure Correction, Cars, 74 Pure Hyttooarbon Liguid.. 470 “Thermal Expansion, Mean Coefficionts of, Metals. 238, 298 Thermal Performance Test... ‘Thermal Resistance of Uniform Deposits (See Fouling) ‘Thermal Relations. 126 ‘Thermometer Connections. seman 3 Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association 293INDEX “Thickness, Minimur, Battles = 92,33 CChanneis and Bonnets on BB Channel Covers. we 90,286, 381 Shels and Shell Covers 20,31 Tubes 27.28 Tubesheots 45 Tie Rods and Spacers, Number and Size 35,36 Tolerances, “Tube Holes in Tubesheets 70,71 ‘Tube Hotes in Baffles oe eatery Heat Exchangers and Parts os oo Shells and Shall Covers 20 Tubeshest Diling 70.71 Tube Bundes, leaning 18,21, 22 Handling 21 Plugging Tubes. 22.373 Removal 21 Support, ‘40 Vibration . 14 95-125, Tube Expanding. 22 Tubs Jot, Expanded vse 22, 72,73, 280 Loads 68,70, Testing, Welded. 1280 Welded, nT ‘Tube Support Piate Dring : 3t (Soo Also Support Pates) ‘Tube Wall Metal Retstence. see 12S ‘Tubo Working Pressure, Internal 283, 234, 205 Tubes, Characteristics 230, 231 Compressive Siross 188 Damas and Gages 27 Expanding 22 Fined ear oaks 20,21 Length : 27 Longitudinal Siress 67,68 ‘Maximum Recommended Gages ‘27.72.73 Natural Frequencies 7 ae 7 Pattern a 26,29 Plich.. 29 hugging in Tube Bundles 273 Projection os 73 Special Precautions. er ‘Tube Wall Reduction oe ve BBO U-Tubos 126,86, 104 Unsupported Length, Maximum... 98, 34 Working Pressure, internal. (288, 234, 235, Tubesheets, aes 45 ‘Applicaton instructions & Limitations 45 Applied Facings 45 lad & Faced Tubsshosis. 45 Divided Ficating Heads . 48 Double Tubeshosts a "85-62 Effective Tubosheet Thickness : 45 Foved Tubechests 46, 65, 62-70 Fixed Tubsshoets of Ditlering Thickness secs, 87 Formulae, Bonding cn AS Effective Design Pressures Floating Head (Type... Effective Differential Design Pressure. 65, 68 Effective Sholl Side Design Pressure. (84, 65 Effective Tube Side Design Pressure. 65 Equivalent Boling Pressure. 63 64 Tubssheote, Formulae, (continued) Euler Dire! Expansion Pressure Flanged Extension Sh Shol Longitudinal Sess ‘Tube Allowable Compressive Sirs. Tube Longitudinal Stross ‘Tube-to-Tuboshest Joint Loads, Integrally Cia, Minimum Thicknoss.. Packed Floating Tubsshest Typo Bel Shall and Tube Longitudinal Sees Special Cases, Tube Holes in Tubesheats ‘Tube Joints-Bxpanded & Weided 22.74, 20 Tubeshoot Pass Partiion Grooves. ‘i % ‘Tueshest Puling Eyes, % ‘Type Dosignation of Heat Exchangers. Ta u Unsupported Tube Lent, Maximum. 33, 96 U-Tubss,, 2 Rear Support : = 34 Heat Treatment. ae 2 Users Note. 2 vi v Vent & Drain Connections. “18, 56,91 Vibra, 434,35, 96-128 ‘Acoustic Resonance of Couping, 95, 116 Mechanisms Causing " 9 Dasigns & Considerations. : at, 122 Solectod References = 122) 123 Tube Excitation 87, 98, 98 ‘Tube Natural Frequencies. nanan 87, 98, 88 Turbulent Butfeting.. 116, 117 Vertex Shedding : 118 Viscosity, 151 ‘Conversion Factors 481, 175, 249, 250, Gases & Vapors, Atmospheric Pressure vn. 181 Gases & Vapors, High Pressure, 181, 182 Hycrocerbons & Petroleum Fractions 176-179 LUquids, Misoetlaneous 180 w Wall Resistance, Finned & Bare Tubes 128 Wetor Fouling Resistances ae 250 Weights of Circular Rings & Discs Bazaar Weigts of Tubing : 230, 231 Weed and Seams Pips, Dimensions ot. 184 Welded Tube Joints i "74,280 294 ‘Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association